[RSArchive Icon] Rudolf Steiner Archive Home  Version 2.5.4
 [ [Table of Contents] | Search ]


[Spacing]
Searching Rudolf Steiner Lectures by Date
Matches

You may select a new search term and repeat your search. Searches are not case sensitive, and you can use regular expressions in your queries.


Enter your search term:
by: title, keyword, or context
   


   Query type: 
    Query was: come
  

Here are the matching lines in their respective documents. Select one of the highlighted words in the matching lines below to jump to that point in the document.

  • Title: The Inner Development of Man
    Matching lines:
    • guidance, however, gives sufficient guaranty that no person comes by
    • insight into spiritual worlds, becomes an anti-social, inferior member
    • life as if reincarnation and karma were truths and they will become
    • cannot be made in vain, but should become the soul's nature later on.
    • he imprints in himself by constantly holding it in his mind, becomes
    • be so incorporated into one's being that a person becomes enabled to
    • facial expression or some other insignificant habit, if he becomes
    • existence becomes increasingly comprehensible to him. He who
    • must have come about due to some inevitable set of laws of the
    • In pondering the demands everyday life makes it becomes clear that it
    • impressions. To do so, it becomes necessary, therefore, to set aside a
    • For this brief duration of time he must become blind and deaf to his
    • sentences. One must allow such sentences to quicken and come to life
    • comes a certain definite moment when still another illumination takes
    • utterances are formed out of this clarity. Only if this has become the
    • is, in the simplest, most elementary manner until he comes to
    • has become proficient in allowing such truths to dwell within his
    • point, which sooner or later becomes available to everybody who has
    • allowed tranquility and silence to come to fruition in his soul. This
    • around him lights up in colors never seen before. Something becomes
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: Woman and Society (Die Frauenfrage)
    Matching lines:
    • could it be that questions which come so close to the human soul
    • abilities, they have for the most part overcome all the difficulties.
    • domination comes, which is so totally inherent in a woman that it
    • certainty comes somewhat to a standstill when so many different views
    • classes has today become the real women's question has become so
    • culture has become, in the greatest sense, a male culture
    • become something different. It is not so long ago that what today is
    • gradually become the domain of men; and it is from this that a higher
    • education and that the women's question itself has come up in our
    • of a wild fantasy. Yet it is the outcome of the spiritual research of
    • natural sciences. Spiritual science can see how it has come about
    • that physiology and biology have become deniers of immortality, even
    • But a time will come
    • fifteen years ago were still valid for many, have been overcome by
    • itself, to converse with itself in such a way that cannot come from
    • the fact that one becomes a completely different human being in the
    • become a different person. His habits and temperament must change;
    • body. One can become master of how the blood circulates; one can gain
    • masculine features. Many facts in life become clearer when we
    • Here it becomes event;
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: Problems of Nutrition
    Matching lines:
    • or not, is left with no alternative but to become a carnivore if
    • when it comes about in the right way as the following anecdote
    • it is. Diet, through spiritual development, becomes the personal
    • comes to measure his nutritional requirements against the
    • become an individual and absolute necessity. In spite of the
    • again from those who have become acquainted with spiritual science
    • our lives if we become bound by and dependent upon our bodies
    • freedom and become dependent upon our bodies if we ignore what is
    • By asking such questions, we come to look at the
    • We can become even more aware of this
    • can gradually become master over what takes place within him.
    • comes about through the astral body's processes of dissolution.
    • a man then becomes ill.
    • astral body become master of the physical and etheric bodies. When
    • becomes lord over his body. Otherwise, as a spiritual being he
    • such wise that he remains a passive spectator becomes a heavy
    • weight in him and hinders his urge to let the astral body come to
    • full life. Thus, the astral body's inner flexibility comes up
    • all its forces. He must become master of his own inner processes
    • become correspondingly active in the external world. It is
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: The Etherisation of the Blood
    Matching lines:
    • outcome of research into the spiritual world.”
    • These two poles become evident when we observe a person placed in two
    • We can go into these things more deeply and we come then into spheres
    • When we penetrate more deeply into this question it becomes evident
    • during the day, that is to say, one can become clairvoyant and see
    • little of all you do from morning to evening is really the outcome of
    • at the door and you say “Come in!”, that cannot be called
    • concepts and ideas; or we may become more highly moral, more cultured
    • activity of the will becomes comprehensible when we remember that all
    • between these two poles, and we shall come nearer to understanding it
    • can become active and effective. In his ordinary life today man is
    • intellectuality, but the Gods must come to our aid if we are to
    • dreaming is the condition that can come to expression in fantasy.
    • the heart. Now these streams, which in sleeping man come from outside,
    • is supremely important. If what has thus come to pass through Christ
    • these two streams can, however, come about only if a person is able to
    • say, the karma of their previous lives — karma which had come to
    • If this comes to pass, individuals will be able to receive and
    • life of the Earth and will become visible — at first to a small
    • the course of the next three thousand years, He will become visible to
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: Overcoming Nervousness
    Matching lines:
    • meant to be taken pragmatically, gradually comes to carry conviction
    • Nervousness becomes manifest in a variety of ways, most obviously
    • perhaps when a person becomes an emotional fidgety-gibbet, that is to
    • weak also become infected.
    • physical body, etheric body, astral body and ego. He will also come to
    • exercise can be quite useful in helping us to become less forgetful.
    • becomes habit to hold such thoughts when things are put aside, it
    • physical body has become dominant and makes movements on its own,
    • Surely, however, the effects of the force, when they become apparent,
    • When you come to think of it, it soon becomes apparent that people do
    • opportunity to come to that inner quiet required for such exercises, and in
    • practice such exercises. They also would become aware of the positive
    • involuntary actions, the control of the astral becomes increasingly
    • stronger over the etheric. Thus, he also becomes able, if necessary, to
    • mean that we need become fanatical about the indifferent use of our right
    • procedure in later life, it becomes possible to make good much that has
    • pupil to deny himself the wishes in such a way that the child becomes
    • the child, especially during the first seven years, and it will soon become
    • right way, we come to know spiritual science not only as theory but as a
    • become an effective truth when it is made a practice in everything that is
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Jesus and Christ
    Matching lines:
    • body. The statements of the spiritual investigator come from
    • rather to express something in which spiritual science must come to an
    • particular it is most important to come to terms with present-day
    • has become fundamental
    • development must be the outcome of spiritual-scientific observation.
    • our hair turns gray and our skin becomes wrinkled, our external life
    • become severed from the direct impulses of humanity. An earlier
    • the condition man ordinarily falls into unawares when he is overcome
    • come to realize that everywhere the final goal of the cosmos is the
    • come to me, and I cannot really know myself as man.”
    • the whole evolution of humanity. One human being had to come who could
    • What was striven for in the ancient mysteries has now become an
    • humanity, become something no longer human. After the turning point of
    • Only after the Mystery of Golgotha did it become possible to
    • can, through spiritual science, come to a recognition of Christ, and
  • Title: Lecture: Newborn Might and Strength Everlasting
    Matching lines:
    • Actually, today we face another world, a world that will become
    • until the time had come for his birth as that exceptional human being, the
    • found in the work of the Middle Ages. We ask why the people come out of the
    • of the hunting party who see what becomes of the body. When you look
    • willing resembles the changes of the weather, which become manifest in the
  • Title: Lecture: Pre-Earthly Deeds of Christ
    Matching lines:
    • IN our age it has become of ever increasing importance that those
    • into the spiritual Earth-sphere, so that mankind may become more and
    • which enabled him to become an upright harmonious being, permeated and
    • walk, when we realize that his being able to do so has only become
    • had not come down to Earth and poured into him, everything connected
    • with his speech must have become debased through the Luciferic and
    • indeed have come to pass that man would have found not only sounds,
    • once more the organs of the human body in so far as those organs come
    • to stand upright in the Lemurian epoch, and to become a speaking being
    • united with the Christ-Impulse, that thinking as such might not come
    • And the Life shall become the Light of my Ego.
    • can acquire, in which he must develop, all that can come to him from
    • and ideas, live on further in us. And a time will come for humanity
    • it actually comes, when it lives not only in the understanding of man
    • by the entrance into it of the Christ-Impulse. In time to come, if we
    • become duller and duller in their dark Ego-consciousness if memory
    • The power of Memory shall become Divine;
    • And a Divinity shall the power of Memory become.
    • All that arises within the Ego shall become
    • Comprehend the Light of the Memory which has become Divine!
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: The Four Sacrifices of Christ
    Matching lines:
    • must come to be realized that a school of unselfishness is needed in our
    • life, can come only through a training in unselfishness, and under the
    • unselfishness, and to become acquainted with all those incentives to
    • of selflessness, and what He may become for the conscious development
    • become selfless. This is a duty of our present culture to the future.
    • Mankind must become more and more selfless; therein lies the future of
    • done under Lucifer's influence, would have become self-seeking. With every
    • and find them selfless. If we, understanding this, have become grateful to
    • stomach or other organs, and the time comes when man knows that he
    • pain. To be ill means that an organ has become selfish and is leading its
    • element of the atmosphere is related to our organs. If we had become
    • come to learn so to regard all that makes us human, fundamentally and in the
    • human evolution that thinking, feeling and willing should become
    • What would have become of the human being without this third Christ
    • become disordered through Lucifer; in the first Atlantean period the vital
    • ego and the powers of the cosmos lest it become their plaything. This
    • possible wisdom might come forth, human beings could neither manage
    • harmony the ego that was to come into the world.
    • can come to true unselfishness. The senses have said, “Not I, but
    • and intellectual lives in such a way that human beings may become
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: Anthroposophy and Christianity
    Matching lines:
    • it comes to applying the natural scientific approach to spiritual
    • along comes the chemist and applies his methods to the water, breaking
    • infinitely heightened if we are to become spiritual researchers.
    • statements, so I'll come right to the point. We are all familiar with
    • monistic-materialistic view when it comes to looking at memory. In
    • This is where spiritual science comes in. Please note that it is not
    • mental activity leaves off. Anyone wanting to become a spiritual
    • such concentration is to be fruitful, that person must indeed become
    • in everyday life (but are nevertheless there) so that they become
    • independent of the body. It is just as if hydrogen were to become
    • faithfully, the great and significant moment comes when real spiritual
    • the way it most typically comes about.
    • then that moment finally comes, either during waking life or in a
    • nevertheless maintained myself, unlike this body.” We come to know
    • released so that we become ever richer and more inward as regards our
    • doesn't need to exert himself. However, as soon as we become passive
    • his soul-spiritual being. A reality becomes apparent to his inner
    • comes to know the soul-spiritual core of his being in such a way the
    • fall away. But what I have come to know as the soul-spiritual core of
    • In other words, we come to recognize the immortality of the soul
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: Christ in Relation to Lucifer and Ahriman
    Matching lines:
    • Secondly, it must also become apparent how this human body, in every
    • When this being comes into proximity with the Christ being, he feels
    • has come from spiritual heights and influenced man's development on
    • Christ has become a working force, let us visualize — as has been
    • relationships would have become different. But how did this victory
    • the souls of men those conditions by which it can become effective in
    • but becomes saturated with the Christ impulse as if by way of natural
    • 6th day of January. Thus, supernatural forces become active in the
    • overcome themselves, rather than being overcome by Him. In
    • physical body. For this reason man overcomes his sense of national
    • development. Michael had become, so to speak, the leading spirit who
    • as the appearance of the etheric Christ on earth. It will come to pass that
    • the twentieth century become clairvoyant to life in the etheric world
    • People these days talk as if it did not have to come about when it
    • we are able to suspect. This ether body has become one of the
    • impressions come from the debates among various political parties in
    • From what is now happening, a few souls must come to a realization
    • materialistic principle that has come to us from the British folk
    • continue to live for humanity, as a reminder of what is yet to come!
    • overcome: we must feel the dead among us as if they were alive. We
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: Preparing for the Sixth Epoch
    Matching lines:
    • come here today for the opening of the group founded by our friend,
    • know each other to come together and have access to the spiritual
    • another and who come together in friendship and brotherliness within
    • a preparatory stage, what is to come in the ensuing period of
    • overcome materialism, to prepare the kind of science that must exist
    • will gradually become more widespread, until by the end of the fifth
    • with the spiritual worlds when we come together in these working
    • brothers. What matters most of all is to become conscious of the true
    • and more out of community life, we must in turn become conscious of a
    • comes down to the earth and can permeate the souls of men. This must
    • brotherhood must prevail in times still to come. The Russian soul
    • never come to Western European civilization. There humanity will never
    • this: It is our task to overcome entirely just what you are trying to
    • overcome.
    • understand death, to overcome death by realizing that it is only
    • through death. It is an essential aim with us to overcome death
    • through understanding. But here we come to one of the points, indeed
    • death. In God there cannot be death. If, therefore, God were to come
    • then, can he prove his identity? Only by showing, when he comes into
    • say that if God were to come into the world we would need a document
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: Outlooks for the Future
    Matching lines:
    • then come into the sixth and seventh epochs. During the sixth and seventh
    • the physical body and the physical body will become a faithful copy of
    • present fifth post-Atlantean epoch, but it will become a reality in
    • realities, but they have the tendency to become realities.
    • consider the things which come to us from the etheric world as something
    • But a time will come, when both the physical and etheric body shall have
    • which come to us from outside. We face a time in which we shall first
    • world-conception describes in connection with man, would become true
    • to overcome it with deeds, not with lame objections. The greater the
    • and more become a reality.
    • likely, many people may still come along and say: “This is not
    • fundamental laws, and when those people come along who say that we are
  • Title: Lecture: Human Life in the Light of Spiritual Science
    Matching lines:
    • understand why such outsiders come to a negative conclusion at the outset.
    • with questions which are the outcome of changes in the conditions of
    • accomplishments in the way of scientific achievement, becomes
    • enmeshed at the present time. These questions become especially evident
    • come into being.
    • There are those therefore who have become united within the Anthroposophical
    • at Leipsic about 1870 has become famous. It closed with
    • upon which it is working. This becomes apparent on investigating the ideas
    • themselves from the main body! A cosmic system in miniature comes into
    • now causing the whole mass to rotate. And furthermore: what has come into
    • which eventually becomes the earth, and as a densifying globe it passes
    • answer to these questions must come from a different quarter. And it is
    • Spiritual Science or Anthroposophy fruitful for his soul need become a
    • is not of this type. It can become an instrument in the soul of each human
    • — that the living ideas contained in it can become a means in the
    • today everyone who earnestly strives can become, up to a certain
    • the spring time, become increasingly clothed in green, later on developing
    • plants physically shoot up out of the earth and become perceptible to the
    • become a living experience we begin to share this alternation of etheric life
    • We become acquainted with etheric life. This etheric life shows that certain
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Evil and the Future of Man
    Matching lines:
    • Post-Atlantean period, and any discussion of it comes up against the
    • will to understand will come in time, and we must see that it does
    • come. In every possible way we must see that it does come.
    • in the Universe as “evil” enter also into man. Here we come to
    • which, when they come to expression in their side-effects, are so
    • have just spoken, he would never come to the point where, out of his
    • intended to become of those forces whose caricature you see in the
    • You see, when we think of these things we come very near the central
    • All the disasters that have come upon us at the present time, and are
    • destined to come in the near future, are like the signs of an
    • that are about to come over humanity — signs which at the present
    • another must become ever greater and greater. This interest must grow
    • This must come to humanity in the present age of the Spiritual Soul:
    • will happen as we go on into the future; man will, as it were, become
    • Archai. This will come about through a growing recognition of the
    • indeed become an abstract thing; and all the efforts that are being
    • public lecture in Zürich, for the time has come to bring these things
    • subconscious into the conscious life. Indeed, we must say that what comes
    • To see through the veils of language: this must come over humanity in
    • speech. This age will not come to an end — certainly the last stages of
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: Social and Anti-Social Forces in the Human Being
    Matching lines:
    • era, become quite explicable when one knows that the task of our era
    • only when this instinctive nature becomes instead an active element,
    • not) must come from that which human beings can develop out of
    • impulses which seek to become reality. But in so doing we must
    • has to be overcome. Man has such a great inclination in our day to
    • or Consciousness Soul in which man must become independent. But on
    • Post-Atlantean Period to become self-assertive, to not allow themselves
    • just these anti-social forces did not become ever more powerful; they
    • impulses must become, right on until the 30th century. For men to
    • come about that with which man resists them: a social structure which
    • the “school-bench” of life long after we have become grey. This
    • be nursed, must be consciously cared for. And in our day this becomes
    • Our relationships have become so complicated that we no longer pay
    • this or that person who has come into our life? This is our natural
    • relations to others. It is when we try to become more and more
    • Soul through birth and heredity. This actually comes to expression in
    • Post-Atlantean period can come. The English are specially suited to
    • wishes by this means to become a politician — then one easily becomes
    • strives for aesthetic form, which can become untrue, an illusion, a
    • become politicians they either dream or they lie. I should add that
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: Spiritual Emptiness and Social Life
    Matching lines:
    • culminating in the terrible death-throes of social life that have come
    • clear about them — as to what must come into being as a new social
    • which can have meaning only when the threefold social order becomes
    • did it never really come to the surface?
    • typical representative of the times — raises the question: how comes it
    • — they will make it possible for the spirit itself to come alive in
    • science and of what had come out of the old Roman juristic system in
    • the modern age. It comes to expression in the absence of will from the
    • into thinking, so that thinking becomes an act like any other, like
    • loses the spirit. Along this path it is possible to become a truly
    • essential for the whole of mankind to become clairvoyant; but what is
    • West, the dimmer and darker does this radiance become. On the other
  • Title: Lecture: Social Understanding Through Spiritual Scientific Knowledge
    Matching lines:
    • physical body between birth and the seventh year, and this work comes to
    • man's organization during the first seven years of his life, become, as it
    • forces, come from? They are the same forces as the forces of the planets,
    • the earth. The forces of understanding come to us from the world's
    • come to manifestation in the work they do in the human being up till his
    • developing in the human being between seven and fourteen. Then comes
    • twenty-one we draw on what comes from the earth and its planetary
    • happen if a time were to come when human beings completely lost hold
    • at the age of ten. He re-experiences it. He has become mature now, and he
    • mental life does not have to be restricted to what comes to meet you from
    • joy nor enthusiasm will come from it later — the more you will be doing
    • come across a thing like this: You visit someone who has a scale standing
    • he will not be able to paint because of that. The ability to paint comes
    • The ability to teach comes from an entirely different quarter than the
    • dogmas, but to give them the sort of thing that makes them become
    • teachers and educators in the same way as people become artists or
    • other person's being. This will come about as a matter of course if people
    • become social if they really meet one another in life, and something
    • come to expression in our bodily nature. For the capacity is terribly
  • Title: Lecture: Soul and Spirit in the Human Physical Constitution
    Matching lines:
    • We then come to consider the fluid organism, which cannot, of course,
    • impossible for our thought to come to a standstill within the limits
    • It is different when we come to the second, the fluid organism that is
    • This is even more emphatically the case when we come to consider the
    • becomes an integral part of us. In our aeriform organism we actually
    • And now we come to the warmth-organism. It is of course quite in
    • warmth-organism, his Ego gives rise to what comes to expression when
    • manifest in the aeriform organism. And when we come to the etheric
    • account we come nearer to the life of soul. Materialistic
    • in the very nature of things water cannot become an organism, is bound
    • it is precisely in these other organisms that the life of soul comes
    • imparts what lives within it to the air, and we become aware of what
    • The astral body which comes to expression in feeling operates through
    • And now we come to the Ego. This human Ego, which by way of the will
    • falling asleep. But thereby we come to know man's physical environment
    • come to know our organization in its totality, although dimly and
    • Then we come to the three higher forms of knowledge: Imagination,
    • the waking consciousness and as states of consciousness become ever
    • below the ordinary consciousness we come to those chaotic
    • its ideas and mental pictures come to us in definite outlines. But we
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: The Moral as the Source of World-Creative Power
    Matching lines:
    • in our dreams it comes to expression in pictures. I said that we may
    • everything will eventually become a kind of slag-heap in the universe.
    • alleged, the world becomes a slag-heap, this will also be the
    • see, we have come from the realm of soul into the physical!
    • Taking this as an example, we may say: Moral ideals come to expression
    • but he becomes organically warmer as well — though this is not so
    • but they operate within him nevertheless. They become free when he
    • moral ideas as such become fruitful only in so far as we remain in the
    • our fluid organism, tone was kindled which now becomes part of
    • We come to the point of saying to ourselves that if today we allow
    • tone and light into the universe and will become
    • these future worlds that will come into being, we must go back to the
    • with enthusiasm and become impulses for deeds, work as world-creative
    • creations of the pre-existing world come to their end. When we
    • Here we come to the point where he who is initiated into the secrets
    • universe. But these thoughts are the corpse of the universe. We become
    • natural world comes to birth.
    • — new worlds come into being.
    • way of the warmth all that becomes active which we inwardly experience
    • all those impulses that come to us, for example when we contemplate the
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: The Path to Freedom and Love and their Significance in World Events
    Matching lines:
    • concerned, come to us from outside, but that it is we ourselves who
    • what thus comes to us from the outer world, something that is
    • one side, the thought content comes to us from the surrounding world
    • How, in reality, do we become inwardly more and more spiritual? —
    • in pursuit of sensations does not make us more spiritual. We become
    • spiritual we become. When we take in thoughts from the outer material
    • thoughts — we become, as you can easily realize, unfree; for we
    • only when we elaborate the thoughts do we become free in the real
    • as this comes from outside, and kindle into greater activity the
    • thinking becomes what I have called in my Philosophy of Spiritual
    • will, when we become inwardly free; our thinking attains such maturity
    • that has now become thought, or our thinking that has now become will.
    • freedom dawns when we enable the will to become an ever
    • come by degrees to actions which are more and more emancipated from
    • abstract modern thinking has become when it uses abstract words for
    • be irradiated by the will in order to become reality, ancient
    • of which we grasp, on the one side, what comes to expression in our
    • must come to life again, but in an entirely different form —
    • and which can come to life again only if man acquires the knowledge
    • our head that which, from an earlier time when it was reality, comes
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: Search for the New Isis, the Divine Sophia: The Quest for the Isis-Sophia
    Matching lines:
    • unknown gods should come to the aid of human beings without their active
    • involvement, and that such aid should come just where human beings consider
    • We come then to the fifth epoch of the post-Atlantean humanity, our own. Our
    • powers which shine down from the sun, enter the earth and then become part
    • increasingly come to understand from a spiritual-scientific point of view
    • of the world has been created, it is here. It has become increasingly
    • it provides the basis for the creation of worlds yet to come.) But Lucifer
    • has come to look upon Christ merely as the man from Nazareth. That means
    • become an empty phrase, And it is just because so many things have become
    • everything which has become mere phrases in the present age, and if these
    • — which have also become a phrase — spoken by the representatives of
    • new content must [be]come content which can give us entirely new feelings that
    • Isis and then places her body into the infinity of space, which has become
    • the grave of Isis, a mathematical abstraction. Then comes the search for
    • knowledge. In place of the heavens that have become dead, this knowledge
    • This anthroposophical community could become a community of human beings
    • Let us become conscious of this most intimate task! Let us go in spirit to
    • to do this. Nothing will come of this community if we merely bring into it
    • within your hearts, so that it may become a power that can help humanity
  • Title: Lecture: The Two Christmas Annunciations
    Matching lines:
    • call to mind something which can become clear to any one who considers
    • not the abstract mechanical thing it has become for modern humanity.
    • The mathematics of the universe, which have become so thoroughly
    • Whence does it come? It proceeds from the experiences we went through
    • passes through the gates of death and becomes the content of life
    • birth and death, which only come to their full blossoming in the life
    • Magi? It has become our mathematics, with its knowledge of the
    • outer has become the inner, and the inner, outer. And so we have
    • indeed grown remote from the Mystery of Golgotha. We must become aware
    • of this fact. We have become far removed indeed from such
    • The wisdom of the Magi too has become dry mathematics, perceiving the
    • heavens only in designs. It has become an inner thing. But inwardness
    • has become abstract in our mathematics. But the very same forces out
    • Golgotha. The external has become an inner thing, has become
    • out until it becomes a universe around us, until inner vision leads us
    • being our Christmas Tree, we come to realize that this Christmas Tree
  • Title: Lecture: The Threshold In Nature and In Man
    Matching lines:
    • science. This will be particularly evident when we come to consider
    • after all, a fact of the life of soul, and one that becomes more and
    • We shall perhaps be able to come to a clearer idea of the tasks of the
    • himself in the presence of deep uncertainties before he could come to
    • ordinary life, and what he becomes and is confronted with when he
    • enveloped in a kind of blindness that protects him from being overcome
    • how man had to cross a “Threshold” in order to come into the
    • fields of higher knowledge, and of how he must have become able to face
    • Strange though it may sound, it becomes clear to us if we are able to
    • man must needs first cross the Threshold before he can come into those
    • I have described the changes that have come about in
    • that comes from the comprehension of self. Only quite gradually has
    • We have come to regard history more and more in its purely external
    • not misunderstood) becomes, even in ordinary life, cognition on a
    • will enable him to rise to pure thinking; and on this path he becomes
    • authority in the widest circles and tend more and more to become the
    • part in his conception of the universe. Man becomes filled, that is to
    • becomes, in effect, completely objective.
    • drifted into materialism, this living in the body has been overcome by
    • correspondingly. The very fact that we have become materialists, and
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: The Sun-Mystery in the Course of Human History
    Matching lines:
    • Out of the ocean-depths of will in the human being, waves which come
    • dreamlike experience of feeling which comes to expression in
    • with the surrounding world. Our antipathies really come from more
    • and antipathies in the life of soul. But we become aware of it when
    • our connection with the outer world becomes abnormal, and when the
    • the upper hand in a human being, he becomes a world-hater, and such
    • that now and then, through strange dreams, something comes up into the
    • ordinary consciousness — on yonder side of the Threshold. He who comes
    • evil. Evil has its mission — and it is here. If this becomes known to
    • when it surge upwards into mental life, it becomes still clearer but at
    • the same time denuded qualitatively — it becomes abstract. In feeling
    • it comes to expression in the form of negative judgments, judgments of
    • We affirm and negate. We do not come to the point of actual antipathy;
    • affirmative judgment becomes experience of light. The same could be
    • And now we come to the Greco-Latin epoch when man's experience of
    • must become conscious wisdom, that what has sunk into the
    • and destiny. But in a spiritual sense it had become known to those
    • cosmic wisdom was lost to Christianity — and this comes to expression
    • come from the East, for the East is in decadence. Nevertheless the
    • becomes radiant. And so it will be with the wisdom of the East: dark
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: The Alphabet
    Matching lines:
    • has become very abstract. Going back into times of which history tells
    • smaller and are all contained in the unit. Here we come to quite
    • relations of number we can come to perceive the relations of the
    • And only then did the archetypal, underlying reality become an
  • Title: Lecture: The Human Heart
    Matching lines:
    • is there in front of the lens. The human being becomes aware of what
    • becomes the decisive factor between the change of teeth and puberty.
    • become a determining factor for the child only after the change of
    • begins to make his own faculty of judgment felt, comes only at the
    • ether body; but as they do so they become rays, rays with a tendency
    • to come together inwardly.
    • in the center becomes especially living. And in the midst of this
    • radiance that arises at the time of puberty becomes the true etheric
    • that which falls out in the etheric process of decay, there comes the
    • differentiated astral body becomes more and more undifferentiated.
    • Originally it is an entity of which we can say it comes from another
    • arteries. They do not come directly into the stomach; it is only
    • inheritance. Moreover, we must know that this inherited astral becomes
    • The astral body becomes more and more indefinite, for it sends into
    • they are imprisoned there; and thereby the astral body itself becomes
    • mist, new differentiations come into it from another side — first
    • physical organs. The astral body more and more becomes a cloud of
    • mist. When the child kicks and fidgets, all manner of effects come up
    • written into the astral body; thus the astral body becomes configurated
    • — this, too, comes together within. Moreover, this has a kind of
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: Truth Beauty and Goodness
    Matching lines:
    • This will become clear if we think of the significance of beauty as
  • Title: Lecture: Self Knowledge and the Christ Experience
    Matching lines:
    • repeatedly observed during our historical studies. We have become familiar,
    • crossing the threshold of death the moment would come when he would not
    • become fully human when he has crossed the threshold of death, and pure
    • thinking becomes his; for with pure thinking he can become a free being. It
    • life. We have undertaken to become worthy — worthy of what has been
    • Only after crossing the threshold of death did one become spiritual man
    • a way that, after death, he could become fully man. So, according to
    • Now we must come to ancient Greece, and the time when Greek culture was
    • My great task is to become aware of my humanity. My task on this earth is to
    • will be clear to him that although he is fully human, as has become clear
    • entered earthly life from the realm of the pre-earthly. You can become man
    • to let the Christ-impulse come to flower in him; he can let Christ's life
    • flow and breathe through him. He can absorb the stream which has come to us
    • as summer and autumn come round for the insect. This was a bridge to that
    • undone; today destruction follows. Then, not to become a candidate for life
  • Title: Lecture: The Invisible Man Within Us
    Matching lines:
    • becomes a body of forces that is active in us but does not come to
    • encroach on the activities in the organism. The human being becomes
    • right way, they can dissolve and again become part of the general
    • vessels, becomes rebellious. It wants to bring about healing, wants
    • that can come from below. It wants to prevent the ego, or the ego
    • body in this direction so that it can become active. It can become
    • astral body and then becomes active. That which comes from above and
    • become too strong. In such pale, lanky individuals we must strive to
    • and breath. If we then come to know by what outer means one or the
    • human being has to become strong enough to be active without the
    • it becomes encapsulated. In this part of his body man's whole
    • tracts in their destructive activity. The splinter comes out and the
    • wants to become an exudate so that it will make use of the breakdown
    • enough to overcome the tumefying force tending toward breakdown. Only
    • substance. With belladonna, the fruit becomes especially greedy and
    • with a proper knowledge of outer nature. We must come to know what
    • The ether becomes
    • becomes similar to that of the metabolic system: B.
  • Title: Lecture: Polarities in Health, Illness and Therapy
    Matching lines:
    • come to a more or less clear awareness of how uncertain, how vacillating
    • chemistry about outer natural processes in order to come to an
    • become conscious of all this). The reason for this confusion is that the
    • actually become the most highly developed teaching of the human being. Of
    • science to come to its results, this matter has occupied me for more than
    • and the actual metabolic system, This interconnection becomes
    • natural process becomes an abnormal one. It should remain in the
    • thread-like crystals become even thinner. It orders itself into clusters of
    • get a white smoke which can then condense on the walls and becomes
    • fever. In this illness the astral body becomes weak and is unable to work
    • This force of crystallization, which becomes active in antimony, if it is
    • works with the proper strength. Now if this nerve-sense activity becomes
    • nerve-sense system becomes so strong in the person suffering from
    • becomes incapable of allowing to act in the right way certain forces,
    • become too weak to regulate these organic combustion processes in the
    • entire organism, if the organism has become too weak to inhibit its
    • becomes clear through a more exacting study of the matter — with
    • come under consideration since pulmonary tuberculosis is an
    • remedies which come out of a full perception of man.
    • and treatment. This will become transparently clear if anthroposophical
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: Man As A Picture of The Living Spirit
    Matching lines:
    • outcome of research into the spiritual world.”
    • forsake the pulsating forces of our blood. What then becomes of them
    • he does come into contact with the Saturn-beings. Within Saturn in
    • present, inasmuch as he comes into relation with the Saturn-beings
    • planet. The Universe then becomes the scene of man's activity and of
    • we are on our way from death to a new birth, we come into the sphere
    • altogether. Yet the spiritual force which had come to Earth through
    • How much is yet to come to the humanity of modern time through looking
    • the Christ. Hence you must first let teachers come to you from India,
    • come to you from Asia; they will be able to tell you what Christ
    • in the stream of time he looks into the emptiness. He becomes
    • Man should therefore become aware of the deep significance of this
    • in my ordinary consciousness I call ‘I’. But I must now become
    • picture of our true Being — that our true Being never comes down into
  • Title: The Individuality of Elias, John, Raphael, Novalis
    Matching lines:
    • he comes into association here with the Spirits who live in the Moon sphere
    • And now we behold the wonderful artistic power of Raphael come to life
    • Power is able verily to overcome all that is of the demon and the dragon
    • Thought becomes fully alive — four times twelve human beings, that is, who
    • this Michael garment, this garment of Light, shall become the Words of the
  • Title: Lecture: Exoteric and Esoteric Christianity
    Matching lines:
    • conscious at once of the fact that their soul-being had come down
    • feeling. Men on earth had to come to this feeling, for it was
    • had therefore to become entangled in death. He had to become
    • them. There was no intellect. But the intellect had to come. If we
    • express it in a soul-spiritual way, the understanding could come only
    • comes from another direction than our own — The Ahrimanic
    • Ahriman comes into the stream of evolution from another direction. If
    • becomes the lord of death and, consequently, of the intellect too, we
    • rule. A god had to pass through death and he had to overcome
    • the whole Earth would have become entirely intellectual, without ever
    • from which we come.
    • entire evolution of mankind knows that the gods have overcome Ahriman
    • him to come down into the evolution of the earth without completing
    • his rule over the earth. In this time even theology becomes
    • materialistic. I have mentioned already that theology has become
    • Christ-impulse contains a living force which enables him to overcome
    • overcome death. This is man's inner evolution.
    • to come streaming down to men from the gods, for men have changed it
    • modern speech, which has already become abstract. For this reason, I
  • Title: William Shakespeare
    Matching lines:
    • printing press, the people were to come to the theatre and see the
  • Title: William Shakespeare
    Matching lines:
    • wraps; people were to come to the theatre and see the plays
    • times comes in which we again see the essential more than is the
  • Title: The Manicheans
    Matching lines:
    • by Augustine when he had become a member of the Catholic Church. He
    • Darkness and overcome it.
    • darkness must be overcome through the Kingdom of Light, through the
    • Root Race the Father withdraws. Then the soul is widowed, becomes the
    • Widow. The soul, which will later on become completely independent, is
    • become independent. Everything that comes from him is a call to the
    • everything which has not come from out of the soul itself. ‘You
    • external authority has transmitted to you. Then you must become ripe
    • that Evil may be overcome through gentleness (Milde). We must
    • and Evil. Life becomes form through finding opposition. It does not
    • from form to form. Life has fashioned the lily, then Life overcomes
    • poured into the old Form. What was formerly Life, later becomes Form
    • has come, like a seed, out of the Lunar Epoch. In that epoch,
    • Life as such overcomes every Form. It propagates itself through
    • be overcome through gentleness. That is the task of the Manichean
    • come later.
    • It is still there. It comes to expression later, again modified and
  • Title: Mathematics and Occultism
    Matching lines:
    • truths to become emancipated from sense in order that he may reach,
    • laws, then mayest thou become a student of Occult Science”
    • realm of mathematics itself, towards the super-sensible. This has come
    • however, the point becomes alive, the zero becomes an active Cause.
    • Extension itself becomes the creation of the extensionless. Thus did
    • magnitudes has become in recent years a powerful educational means for
    • science teaches the way to become independent of sense-perception, and
    • No one can become an Occultist who is not able to accomplish within
    • from those who wished to become his disciples. But the Occultist who
  • Title: The Dead Are With Us
    Matching lines:
    • have to become acquainted with completely different conceptions.
    • thought with which we must become familiar.
    • mistake, he immediately becomes aware of pain, of suffering, in the
    • environment; if he does something right, he becomes aware of pleasure,
    • and come together with what will live on Earth as a physical body, The
    • Other souls pass him by; they do not come within his ken. He becomes
    • aware of the animal realm as a totality; only those human souls come
    • more links — all of which are the outcome of karmic connections
    • Just as concerning the first kingdom with which the dead comes into
    • soul-life. When the dead becomes acquainted with a soul, he gets to
    • can become lower when it is within us on Earth. It is very important
    • come from us; when the other man speaks to us, we know that the words
    • come from him. The whole relationship is reversed when we are speaking
    • question to the dead, or say something to him, what we say comes from
    • him, comes to us from him. He inspires into our soul what we ask him,
    • this comes out of our own soul. It is a process with which a human
    • says comes out of his own being. In order to establish intercourse
    • but really to become accustomed to the total reversal of the familiar
    • comes out of our own soul, it comes from us. And we are far
    • where, if something comes to us from the environment, we ascribe it at
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: The Origin of Speech and Language
    Matching lines:
    • activities of the blood and the air, our feelings come about. Now we
    • understanding the external aspect of the mind has become possible
    • becomes ill in any way, we discover that nature herself arranged such
    • carried there by the blood, and of whatever activity comes in through
    • You see, this comes about because when a person is used to doing a
    • I sense the activity through this nerve, but I become aware of it in
    • direction where the strong forces come from. If a person is standing
    • matter ceases to be superstition and becomes science instead. And
  • Title: Lecture: The Sense-Organs and Aesthetic Experience
    Matching lines:
    • reflection of something which becomes great and significant in the
    • become so personal and really want to let personal feelings cloud
    • that the sense-organs become in a certain way life-regions once
    • to them. The sense-regions become life-regions; the life-processes
    • become soul-processes. A man cannot stay always in that condition, or
    • remarkable association of these senses comes about, not in the
    • imaginative process comes about in the region behind your tongue
    • life-processes become soul-processes.
    • mankind will come about in the future. On the other hand, Spiritual
    • way that they become realms of life, and that the life-processes can
    • medical or half-medical term. Because the life-processes become
    • impulse of reason and the impulse that comes from nature. Through a
    • spiritualised. Thus rational necessity and natural necessity come
    • soul-processes. Life-processes become more ensouled; sense-processes
    • become more alive. That is the real procedure, though given a more
    • one come upon matter without spirit. Thinking remains mere thinking
    • the spiritual, but must and can overcome the material and recognise
    • it could have come into existence only along with boughs and blossoms
    • come into being. We need to see with certainty that the tree-trunk as
    • reality. Take them just as they are and you will never come to the
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: A Turning-Point in Modern History
    Matching lines:
    • according to Herman Grimm's remark — the time would have come
    • that man has first to become inwardly free before he can achieve
    • when he becomes poetical, “having nothing that flatters or
    • being, man becomes free.
    • do in the external world becomes such that obedience to duty and to
    • the law comes about through an inclination akin to that of the artist,
    • and when all that comes from the senses is permeated by spirit, then
    • had wanted to become more personal: On Goethe and Myself. For Goethe
    • In conversation about Kant, Goethe would not let himself become really
    • general is considered. What Schiller expected to come about through
    • self-education is expected to come through alterations in outer
    • conditions. Schiller says: If men become what they can become at the
    • recovery in this connection is to come about in the future.
    • an old superstition that must be overcome! To experience, also, he
    • between youthful not-knowing and the knowing that comes through
    • under the control of the State. The State should become the only
    • saying: All men are equal before the law. Nothing personal comes into
    • This must become a new, fundamental doctrine: that the social
    • the other. This must become the elementary basis for social insight in
    • it has to be said: a turning-point in the history of mankind has come
  • Title: Lecture: Elemental Beings and Human Destinies
    Matching lines:
    • that such an event always comes back seven years later, for the lapse
    • know well suddenly becomes dejected and out of humour? You have no
    • idea why, but a change has come over him “out of the blue”,
    • to go on outside us! They come about through our instrumentality, but
    • become involved in all that is going on among the elemental beings
    • reaction that comes back on to Man — their power to do so,
    • it out all around you. When it comes back to you, it is not unchanged;
    • around him a spiritual atmosphere whereby he comes into contact with
    • “Welcome Sir Olaf, your hand I'll take,
    • Come dance and join us for my sake.”
    • feeling. For these always come back to us in a changed form. They
    • swim. Here then you may see how experiences can come back in the form
    • back; but they make a wider circuit and come back only in the next
    • experiences do not come back unchanged; they have undergone a very
    • ego-consciousness receives then a new form. The child becomes capable
    • that it comes back in the second seven-year period, at about the ninth
    • comes back in a more spiritual form, whereas in the second or third
    • events which comes back in a striking manner. The same observation can
    • Indeed, my dear friends, it will become urgently necessary for the
    • the life of Man. An insight into such things must gradually become
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: Man, Offspring of the World of Stars
    Matching lines:
    • really come to pass in the life of humanity through the ages. A great
    • As a matter of fact, this experience still comes to those who have a
    • become aware of the spiritual forces indwelling the rays of the Sun in
    • from the Sun enable the human being to become the bearer of an Ego. We
    • forces. Metabolism is primarily an outcome of the working of Earth
    • fulfilling its functions. The forces in the etheric body come, not
    • forces contained in the foodstuffs themselves come from the Earth, but
    • they become inwardly responsive to light and also to warmth. We say,
    • not leave or come down again properly into his etheric and physical
    • you know, began in the fifteenth century, we have to become free of
    • The Sun is connected with the Ego. And then we come to the inner
    • We come next to Venus. Venus works pre-eminently in the etheric body
    • Then we come again to the Moon. The Moon forces in the human organism
    • Sun. He had become a kind of amphibium — a creature who is
    • what has first been sent out into space from the Earth and comes back
    • materialism today man has become an earthworm. He must rise above this
  • Title: Lecture: The Ear
    Matching lines:
    • Through anthroposophical Spiritual Science we become aware, above all,
    • filled with physical, sense-perceptible material, and so becomes the
    • the human ear. Passing inward through the auditory canal you come to
    • (malleus, incus, stapes). Behind these again, you come to the
    • Let us now go farther back, within the ear. We come to the so-called
    • afterwards become the legs and feet, could equally become a kind of
    • ear. They actually have the inner tendency, the potentiality to become
    • strange saying. Nevertheless, it is the truth. Man might become an ear
    • development he already comes into the domain of the earthly force of
    • gravity, implying weight — weighs upon that which tends to become
    • the ear, transforms it and re-shapes it. And so it becomes the lower
    • become the legs. The embryonic ear does not enter the domain of
    • reality. As soon as we come into the spiritual world which lies beyond
    • to the earthly force of gravity and to all that comes from the
    • comes into being, we can always tell, of any system of organs, how its
    • world. Your morality becomes a beautiful, your immorality an ugly
    • music. And the harmonious and dissonant sounds become the Words,
    • head-organisation in the Spirit, to become an actual head once more in
    • experiences a condition wherein he becomes altogether one in his inner
    • he is the Hierarchies himself. Nor would he ever become aware of
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Education for Adolescents
    Matching lines:
    • When children come to the age of puberty, it is necessary to awaken
    • becomes free at puberty, forces are freed which
    • When such forces become free, and it has not been possible to awaken
    • transform themselves into what they become in most young people today.
    • world must become so all-engrossing to young people that they simply
    • feelings are concerned, pain only becomes greater the more we think
    • comes to expression. For if he does not do this, then when all that is
    • to class, and gradually everything in them stagnates, becomes
    • people at this age, or if we teach in such a way that they never come
    • city dwellers, city dwellers who have become teachers and doctors. And
    • things come to such a terrible — I do not want to say
  • Title: Lecture: The Work of Secret Societies in the World
    Matching lines:
    • perish and become dust; not a trace of it will survive. But what you have
    • This has become your soul. The spirit, too, once spread out around you. And
    • what is now around you will become your inner life. You will take into
    • yourselves what is now the mineral kingdom and it will become part of your
    • become your inner being.
    • edifice would one day become the content of his soul.
    • ourselves become in future times. What we do with the plant world, with the
    • animal world and with men, that too, we shall surely become. If you found a
    • what you have contributed will become an integral part of you. If a man
    • it with nature. In times to come we shall have within us what is now spread
    • build an edifice dedicated to selfless ends. It is easier to become one of
    • degrees of initiation and the secret of the epochs still to come. In the
    • upon human egoism. Only when man has overcome them will he be free of
    • things will come, just as the great water-catastrophe came to the
  • Title: Lecture: The Three Stages of Sleep
    Matching lines:
    • come to the point of questioning. The fact that someone asks
    • walking along a road and comes to a mountain. He passes into a
    • approaching us from a distance. He comes nearer and nearer, and
    • other man comes still nearer and the harmless instrument which
    • dream transforms things in this way. Anxiety becomes terror,
    • does not enter the body immediately, but becomes aware of the
    • sounds, and so on. The person becomes conscious. But there is
    • dream arises. But should that person become conscious before
    • example, you were to become conscious in the middle of the
    • — for it would then be visible — you would become
    • we become conscious in the lightest sleep, we are living in the
    • consciousness, and then we become aware of more than is
    • pictures become distinct; their light is enhanced; they reveal
    • will take some time to overcome when one regains consciousness
    • so express it — has become mineral, for in this state the
    • becomes indefinite and forms itself into a kind of sphere or
    • united with the Earth through the Mystery of Golgotha must come
    • need not have died had Christ come to their aid. This was felt,
    • come to raise it out of its deep sleep. All such legends were
    • these things come about? Into the spiritual world itself there
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: The Cosmic Word and Individual Man
    Matching lines:
    • the external world changes, inasmuch as the human being becomes
    • body becomes all the more active and inwardly mobile between falling
    • measure as the functions of the physical body come to rest, at and
    • music, which comes from the region of the organs of hearing; the
    • — all these become an organically coherent etheric system. (When
    • in the activity of thought becomes an ever-changing flood and flow. It
    • regions are described it becomes natural to explain a thing by its
    • becomes louder and louder, spreading outwards. But just because it
    • realm's of body, soul, and spirit, are revealed. In the end one comes
    • To Beings one must come at last in all understanding of the world. For
    • Beings alone are real. Anything comes into existence only through the
    • more. As I have often said, Man has become more and more intellectual
    • knows about himself becomes more and more abstract. But behind
    • must be formed in such a way that it can become the organ of thought,
    • limbs. Then we come to the Hierarchy of Cherubim, who bring the
    • are real. Their expression as Soul comes about because these
    • on to the true reality, we come to the individual Spirits themselves,
    • mankind may really come about, and that earthly life may not fall into
  • Title: Christ and the Twentieth Century
    Matching lines:
    • spiritual form, gradually descended to become the material being we
    • could never become ‘popular.’ Anyone who has even a
    • spiritual Being. What, therefore, has the Christ become to modern
    • research? He has become a poetical image, a figure that has only
    • historical research the Christ has become an imaginary God. To put it
    • in spiritual life, could then come forth as a prophet before the
    • These ancient Wisdom-teachings come to light in strange ways; myths,
    • man had become mature enough for an epoch when, without external
    • of man had become ripe for ‘Self-Initiation,’ under the
    • in accordance with what was to come.
    • Jesus as: “If any man come to me, and hate not his father, and
    • inner resistance, it becomes at home with a conception which hitherto
    • portrays a world to him, but its laws will become a means of
    • experience, the inner rebirth of the soul, comes to pass through the
    • impulse, in that it will reveal how truly the Christ Impulse becomes
    • “The man who overcomes himself is freed from the
    • overcomes himself shall he so come into his own that the form he has
    • will come to understand the Christ Event in the light of an extension
    • “The man who overcomes himself is freed from the
  • Title: Lecture: Richard Wagner and Mysticism
    Matching lines:
    • the universe were not the abstract conceptions they have become
    • time had now come for a re-union of the arts, and with his great gifts
    • outwards and as it becomes articulate is striving to unite that which
    • together or when one becomes dependent on another. But there are also
    • is obviously a dream which comes to a man because he is sleeping out
    • evolution we feel how the new Gods who rule over mankind have come
    • Richard Wagner's achievement was not the outcome of any conscious
    • the emissary of the ‘Holy Grail.’ He comes from the citadel of the
    • evolution is represented in the Initiates who come from mysterious
    •  Whence I have come
    • A stone falls from Lucifer's crown and this stone becomes the holy cup
    • would be purified, the substance of his body would become as pure and
    • in the higher calyx and becomes a creator in the Spirit. This
    • becomes “a knower through compassion.” And the
    • wrote: “The man who overcomes himself breaks that power which
  • Title: Lecture: Spiritual Wisdom in the Early Christian Centuries
    Matching lines:
    • thought which had in a certain respect become estranged from the
    • certainly be advised to read Paul Deussen. Things have come to a
    • different religions, not as the outcome of vague sentiment but of the
    • Ammonius Saccas and Iamblichus have come down to us. Of many other
    • There is no telling what would have come to pass in Europe if the
    • Julian was ‘Apostate’ only in regard to what was to come after. The
    • absolutely objective standpoint, for what comes to pass in history is
  • Title: Lecture: The Crossing of the Threshold and the Social Organism
    Matching lines:
    • themselves; the forces of thought, feeling and of the will become
    • independent. These forces become independent through the fact.
    • the individual human being. But things have become displaced.
    • on a separate character and this will come to the fore in various
    • spheres of thought, feeling and will become separated. This imposes
    • thinking can become sounder; we must moreover create a foundation
    • time has come to an end and that we must close our accounts with it.
    • spirit. In more recent times, the spirit has become very mechanical,
    • which comes from earlier conditions of earthly existence,
    • Everything which comes from other directions and seeks to transform
    • only be the outcome of SPIRITUAL IMPULSES!
    • night should become fruitful in the course of his day.
    • we would not bring along with us through birth the impulses that come
    • Our spiritual life is based upon the forces that come from the time before
  • Title: Lecture: The Weaving and Living Activity of the Human Etheric Bodies
    Matching lines:
    • way as to become a bearer of the Ego. Together with the Ego, the
    • differences belong to another field of study. We also come across
    • man’s spiritual life we must become broad-minded and we must
    • detaches itself and becomes incorporated with the universal ether and
    • incorporate with it. Of course, what thus becomes incorporated with
    • cosmos. However, this becomes inwoven with the cosmos in a manner
    • etheric body, this becomes inwoven, I might say, with the universal
    • astral body. And then comes the time — it begins with that
    • which, the higher Spirits work, becomes quite small, it grows smaller
    • value through, the fact that it becomes the point of departure for
    • we gradually become mature men, who concern themselves with the
    • Munich, people do not have much time), we might even come across a
    • that the human beings have become, so abandoned by the spirit as
    • then combine the things they see through their intellect, has become
    • become aware of the fact that he is connected, as a whole human
    • Things. We may then come to the following result: If we have acquired
    • whose astral body, that is to say, his sub-consciousness, becomes
    • particular become wonderfully transparent. This reveals the tendency
    • which must become united with the Central European qualities. We can
    • gradually become familiar with them, acquiring an idea of all that
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: And The Temple Becomes Man
    Matching lines:
    • And The Temple Becomes Man
    • The Temple Is/Becomes — Man!
    • Also known as: The Temple Is/Becomes — Man!
    • BECOMES
    • “And the Building becomes Man”
    • finally come to expression in accordance with the stage of culture
    • AND THE TEMPLE BECOMES MAN
    • upwards from the ground in order that it may come within the sphere
    • the body can become the outward expression and manifestation of the
    • We come now to our own
    • life of the universe. The seeds of whatever comes to pass in the
    • differ from all its predecessors. We now come back to what was said
    • super-sensible fact ... and yet it must become perceptible in the
    • own and the epochs to come could give birth to this form of Art. It
    • to come to our eyes and our hearts to penetrate through the walls, so
    • super-sensible being of man become externally manifest? When does an
    • that becomes flesh within the human being is the Spirit, the
    • come after us. But we shall succeed if, for the first time, we give
    • modern age become mature enough to understand the nature of such a
    • there, said something in his Presidential Address which often comes
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: The Migrations of the Races
    Matching lines:
    • of Jesus, “The kingdom of God cometh not with observation,
    • then come into contact with others who have intimate knowledge of it
    • already become perverted. In the Atlanteans, memory was the
    • We now come to the region where the original Semitic element
    • Civilization had developed the art of arithmetic. The outcome was the
    • of Dodona, for example, and others. The physical place becomes sacred.
    • We come now to the third, very complicated migration. Part of it
    • We have therefore come to know three groups of Initiates, the task of
    • it were in the Romans and become life.
    • was to come. (This was recorded in the Sibylline books.) Thus
    • He must come from a hidden source. Hence the Apocryphal writings
    • hold of, and becomes the principle making all men equal before God.
    • could become life through what developed out of the Roman
    • become Christians.
    • The Romans become Christians
    • We have come to the culminating point — or the center. The
    • Teachers who now follow have to preserve what has come into being and
    • which this initiation took place were very complicated, as now becomes
    • new fructification must come from the East — this was brought
    • about by the Crusades. The really important outcome of this was (the
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: The Mystery of Golgotha
    Matching lines:
    • planet to the Earth. Unable to become an earthly man, the Being would
    • of the spiritual World from which I am come down. Descending as a
    • within himself the power to overcome his sickness. Increasingly the
    • dream-clairvoyance of which he knew full well: “We have come
    • come down to the Earth to re-awaken the super-sensible spirituality in
    • called Christ, as of Him who would in future time come down to Earth
    • of Initiation that Christ would come to Earth when the time should be
    • would come down and would take on a human form. And they knew that
    • the question: How shall we come once more to the Supersensible —
    • Jesus. He had come down to Earth. He was the God whom mankind had
    • Being become an earth Being?
    • who comes from real worlds beyond the Earth, uniting with earthly man
    • Before we come down to Earth, we human beings live in a
    • comes before the soul in modern time with all intensity, just when
    • can become a free Being in our time because he has to do, not with
    • thoughts into the grave of Nature. For Nature does indeed become a
    • then in our vision of Nature it all becomes alive, and there arises
    • and it becomes for us a living, not a dead, dogmatic knowledge, when
    • Christo morimur, then too we feel what is seeking to come near us
    • If we let Christ become our leader, we may surely say:
  • Title: Lecture: The Recovery of the Living Source of Speech
    Matching lines:
    • other is true, so does man come, between falling asleep and
    • not even need to go back so far before we come to a time when the
    • become no more than a sign. But it is scarcely more than 1500 years
    • impossible in the course of that very study to come to a knowledge of
    • metamorphosed. Words become an expression before all else of sympathy
    • have come to a stage where this feeling, which is called forth in man
    • further and become the receivers of Inspiration. And what they
    • that one can come again to an understanding of the soul life of such
    • the Roman we can still feel ourselves near; then comes a great gulf.
    • come into an entirely different world when we come to Greece —
    • necessary is to be able to comprehend the change that has come about
    • And now when we come to consider our particular sphere, the sphere of
    • Then we come into a time when it is no longer so that the Archangel
    • speech, but to Imagination. And language becomes the language
    • cannot at any rate come to them from any one of the Hierarchies named
    • development in all its tremendous significance, we shall come to see
    • an element of death, how they tend to become mere empty husks. In
    • become a power in man that can create speech. And among all the facts
    • absurdity (for so I must call it) had to come about when the
    • in the Gospels, the knowledge of Christ has not come in its
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: Gnostic Doctrines and Supersensible Influences in Europe
    Matching lines:
    • Demiurgos, and as the outcome of Jehovah's union with matter,
    • of the Pleroma, the human being created by Jehovah comes into
    • connected with the man Jesus in whom a holy Aeon had come to dwell.
    • died away. The time had come for man to pass into an entirely
    • significance of these things in the present age becomes quite
    • highly spiritual form of knowledge has become corrupt; the life of
    • arts but who are infected by them and so come under the influence of
    • mythological lore was the outcome of a wonderfully spiritual
    • come into existence an astral region in which human beings are
    • astral sphere which since the Middle Ages has become the Paradise of
    • of the bodily structure of these beings has coarsened and become
    • modern age this astral region has become a veritable Paradise of the
    • way: The nearer we come to the Ural and Volga districts, the more do
    • of heads, while the other parts of the bodily structure become
    • form has coarsened to a bear-like form and the further West they come
    • beings come into existence in the astral world and the Earth-sphere
  • Title: Lecture: The Influence of the Dead on the Life of Man on Earth
    Matching lines:
    • for a law — quite unaware that whatever is not in order comes
    • certain sense, it does become dissolved in the elemental world. It
    • dissolves, it becomes ever more tenuous. But it does not become
    • thus becomes conscious is always there in the subconscious, whenever
    • To describe where this mediate influence comes to expression, I may
    • death and a new birth, and so he becomes able to work upon the world
    • comes to expression in man as wrong and evil actions would not be
    • connection which was begun during his own life on Earth), he comes up
    • us. This hatred must first be overcome by him; it is like a sword, a
    • threshold of consciousness. There comes a man, feeling in a depressed
    • Then comes a later time, when man has become utterly free from the
    • time to come historians will well observe such intimate impulses and
    • different from what they become the moment we enter fully into the
    • kingdom, come into us along with other experiences of soul —
    • becomes of the major part of that which enters our soul life through
    • without. For us, these things should more and more become no mere
    • old atavistic clairvoyance. Instead there must now come into us what
    • come to us in Spiritual Science, that Christ is for the Earth, then
  • Title: Lecture I: Ancient Myths
    Matching lines:
    • come again to such a thinking, such a grasp of the universe, as will
    • newcomers brought about, not while the other was extending beneficent
    • not yet come under the rulership of Jahve and the Elohim. This
    • they are, but we have developed further and have become weaker.
    • as good as widow. For what did she become? She became what is
    • overcome atavism, making use of sulphur atavistically. But Zeus and
    • electricity which comes about through thunder and lightning! But if
  • Title: Lecture II: Ancient Myths
    Matching lines:
    • orientate oneself for what is to come by considering what has been.
    • epoch, the Greco-Latin, and to the Third, the Egyptian; we come then
    • come about in modern times. But at that time there was indeed a
    • longer there. These things naturally come about in such a way as to
    • that which has become the abstract script. This no longer expresses
    • mysteries, but gradually, since it has become abstract, only serves
    • Phoenicia. From Phoenicia back to Egypt the abstract-script has come,
    • a different sphere, so to say, and though externally it only comes to
    • comes to life in me again, it is perception, it lives in me. That
    • more inward-lying forces of human nature are connected with what come
    • nevertheless it is true: the air has become different. Naturally it
    • nevertheless the air has become different. The air has lost the
    • could say — become coarser. It has actually become different on
    • earth since that ancient time. The air has become coarser. But not
    • only the air, but man himself has become coarser. That which formerly
    • dregs left behind. This had to come about since otherwise men could
    • become coarsened in the direction we have discussed. Among other
    • force living in reproduction that comes to manifestation too in
    • come in which right views, general views, on these matters must be
    • genuine, honourable truth comes in contact, on the one hand, with
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture III: Ancient Myths
    Matching lines:
    • meaning of the concepts which perhaps do not come to clear
    • among these often contradictory concepts and ideas, comes through the
    • catastrophe that is to come — like a catastrophe of nature.
    • become famous. Beneath this statue, as is well known, stood the
    • in fourteen pieces. When the spirit-visitor, the new Typhon, had come
    • see the whole miraculous change that had come to her offspring. She
    • cow-horns of ancient Egypt, in spite of having become a new Isis.
    • she had thus become clairvoyant, the power of her clairvoyance
    • age, deeply justified in what this age is meant to become and must
    • become.
    • method, that even the paper crown will become a genuine golden crown.
    • God.’ But the word has become phrase, it has withdrawn from its
    • those essences and forces of which we spoke yesterday, must come
    • comes out of the tragic state in which it exists today.
    • succeeded by another, that the letter must come which kills the
    • overcome again through another consciousness. The sort of
    • in life one becomes older. As a matter of fact modern mankind only
    • question: What perhaps do we lose, what becomes different in us
    • demand on our age. Humanity must learn to become older consciously
    • with every day. For if man learns consciously to become older with
  • Title: Lecture IV: Ancient Myths
    Matching lines:
    • abstraction in the sense we have come to know it, namely estrangement
    • connected with what comes to expression in the Crab, in the
    • one shares the air out-breathed by the other. Modern men have become
    • in Cancer, its forces are there, and there they come to development
    • the post-Atlantean world-conception which have come to light are
    • the earth. But think of the great revolution that now comes with the
    • Fishes) Culture. What the Pisces forces have become in the
    • thoughts can easily become empty phrase in these times.
    • forehead. Man can become great with this earth-culture in this fifth
    • comes from particular planets for the various sections in the path of
    • become what they now are. The question in our time is that each for
    • the time must come in which the child learns what it means to become
    • In order to overcome
    • further; it often comes up, as you know. What I will stress is this:
    • much inclined to take a lively interest in abstractions, to become
  • Title: Lecture V: Ancient Myths
    Matching lines:
    • years go on becomes older. In a certain respect one can say that for
    • by our power of will. We become physically different in our twenties
    • year through his natural forces. It becomes more and more pressing,
    • times can come in which only the views and opinions of youth
    • There must come an entirely new knowledge of the being of man. For
    • believe that, the future of humanity will come through with the
    • only come from an understanding of the spiritual world. Hence, thinks
    • standpoint and others take others, and an agreement must come
    • become unchristian, States have become unchristian, and that
    • produced by the Revolution and Napoleon, a Europe would come
    • come quickly and make all things new.’ And he headed it with
    • Europe have become in the course of the 19th Century! I repeat: it is
    • have seen exactly that such events had to come. They were preceded
    • by the age of materialistic science — which had become stronger
    • lo, I come quickly and make all things new.’ Somewhere
    • proceed from Rome of which it could be said ‘I come quickly and
    • than in the Protestant. But he was a free spirit enough not to become
    • Christianity. It must come quickly, he thought, a general renewal of
    • occupying us, the problem that will become clear to us in the coming
    • days: men have forgotten how really to become old, and we must learn
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture VI: Ancient Myths
    Matching lines:
    • comets; even meteors — irregularities, as we know — make
    • said ever come before us in life? What I have just said seems to be
    • arise: does it ever come before us in life? That is the important
    • would have become in the ordinary course of things perhaps seventy,
    • not understand how to become old — or I could say, to remain
    • head; love, which comes from the rest of the organism, does not
    • humanity were to understand how to become old, or younger in old age
    • as I showed yesterday, this science of today would become really
    • materialistic natural science of today will become spirituality.
    • It will the sooner become spirituality the greater the number of
    • become heart-knowledge. For that we lack two conditions, and only
    • dies, is buried, another comes, is born, dies, is buried, etc. etc.
    • conceptions had to come. But only the foolish see them as something
    • concepts may seem difficult today they will become something that one
    • and such pictures as are needed if they are to become the subject of
    • universe. And these pictures become forms of narrative which we have
    • that it becomes independent in man here upon earth, then this
    • When he comes to know
    • back again into the spiritual world — when this becomes a
    • inasmuch as I become more and more heart-man, inasmuch as I remain
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture VII: Ancient Myths
    Matching lines:
    • it ourselves. Between death and a new birth we come to know all the
    • death and rebirth we become familiar with the laws of the cosmos. And
    • one comes to the origin of a living being that they are not yet
    • universe is concerned. The head has not merely come about through
    • in our thoughts does not come from the head; it comes from that
    • the likeness often only comes out strongly in later childhood —
    • we come down to earth from the spiritual world, to find a place in a
    • just described. Thus we come into our bodily nature with what I have
    • will only stress this as a matter by which you can see how one comes
    • upon such things from quite a different side. One comes to such
    • the forces in the instreaming substance when he comes out of the
    • man becomes chubby. In this process undergone by the etheric body
    • spiritual existence. But inasmuch as we have come down to the
    • polarity that prevails in the universe in regard to man. We become
    • spiritual science so fruitful that the human being comes to feel how
    • the rejuvenation of man. That present-day humanity has come to such
    • whole cultural life becomes imbued with the principle that it should
    • materialism had become general, has a deeper meaning. In recent
    • takes in needs a few years for it to become at home in his organism.
    • more will it become — can one say — ‘un-purified’
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: The Souls Progress through Repeated Earth Lives
    Matching lines:
    • body, which however has now become something different. Indeed there
    • astral body and the ego. It thus comes about that when the human
    • there is a drawing together of what comes from without as the
    • intimately connected with what comes to us from the cosmos. Our power
    • earth life has expanded into the cosmos, has come back again, and now
    • comes to us from the earth. Between these two stands our rhythmic
    • side, from the spirit-soul side. We come to know the process from the
    • interweaving of the rhythmic with the metabolic processes, we become
    • the following: All that we conceive as mathematics, all that comes
    • transmitted down through external heredity, and come to the
    • this source, you will see, something comes to light relating to the
    • whence come the souls who have united themselves with these inherited
    • what has now become reality in European history was formed only as a
    • Christianity a few centuries after it had come into existence.
    • into him of Orientalism, especially of Indian tradition, comes to him
    • education, comes to him from outside. This is for the most part
    • And that comes from the fact that this soul lived in a former
    • Orient, although it had already at that time become somewhat tenuous.
    • predilection for the spiritual world, but this has now become
    • living spirituality, which has now become more deadened, more
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: The Forming of Destiny in Sleeping and Waking
    Matching lines:
    • evolution, Ego and astral body have no organs wherewith to become
    • in greater or lesser degree of development — when they come
    • significance comes to pass with the learning to walk, namely
    • indicate that what comes to expression in speech is connected with
    • obviously a matter of the life of soul), when we come to the
    • body of man is destined to come into inner contact between sleeping
    • antipathy, which are merely the outcome of something we are not
    • willing to overcome. True and genuine love for human beings during
    • little children learn to walk, can indeed come to realise what a
    • sleep in a previous earthly life, as the outcome of universal human
    • will quite surely come, — or again the illness, the misfortune,
    • the life of soul — that if this misfortune had not come about,
    • come upon me, because it has enabled a weakness to be eliminated.
    • occurred because of an earlier weakness, it is to be welcomed, for it
    • supervene, and no effort to overcome obstacles would arise in us.
    • For, after all, obstacles would not be there for us to overcome
    • perception of world-justice. It does not mean that he becomes
    • bear into our physical body the requisite power; otherwise we come to
    • become world-creative forces.
    • When the time comes for the Earth to pass over to the Jupiter
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: Goethe and the Evolution of Consciousness
    Matching lines:
    • of the legacy that has come to us from Greece can only consist in a
    • become closely acquainted with him, he wrote a characteristic and
    • must come to our aid here, for ordinary history can tell us nothing.
    • before true poetry can come into being. But there was an age in the
    • We know that even to-day, when it has become thoroughly decadent,
  • Title: Lecture: On the Reality of Higher Worlds
    Matching lines:
    • certain guiding lines, how the higher worlds can become a reality.
    • has developed in the sphere of natural science, comes up against
    • from the depths of the human heart. In both directions he comes up
    • science will inevitably come up against these boundaries and are
    • faculty of thinking which comes to expression in ordinary memory, but
    • picture or combination of pictures, but that it comes into our
    • because one becomes aware by degrees that thought is getting free
    • the marvellous organ it eventually becomes in the course of life. It
    • This process is at work during earliest childhood; it comes to a halt
    • In striving for Imaginative Knowledge we again become aware of this
    • longer need to come to a halt within the material world of sense, for
    • to our sorrow, forgetting often comes very easily to us. But a man
    • it were in space that has become time, or time that has become space.
    • The essential point, however, is that when a man becomes prone to
    • the course of life. What has long since become the past, has long ago
    • passed into you, as it were, from the external world, has become part
    • of man becomes clearly perceptible. His physical nature is recognised
    • in whatever has come to pass in the universe with which his being is
    • the like. — The experiences which come to the spiritual
    • yearning for the physical world. This yearning subsequently becomes
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: The Dual Form of Cognition During the Middle Ages and the Development of Knowledge in Modern Times
    Matching lines:
    • come across statements showing that the recollection of an old
    • have now become mere words for him. But on the other hand, he is
    • could be learnt if we would once more become acquainted with what has
    • super-sensible, which could only become accessible to man through
    • more and more overcome, I might say, by the knowledge which the world
    • the human beings acquired the tendency to become thoroughly absorbed
    • other form of materialism which has come to the fore in spiritism,
  • Title: Lecture: The Remedy for Our Diseased Civilisation
    Matching lines:
    • outcome of the arbitrary action of a certain number of leading
    • nineteenth and early twentieth century have become great. It was
    • in mind has become evident in a positively radical manner, at least
    • philosophers and those who had become their pupils in popularizing
    • comes to the fore symptomatically, we may gather that materialism
    • gradually come about that the arms, feet and legs of the human being
    • come to the fore as a materialistic world-conception can only be
    • become spiritually inclined, particularly the life of the will.
    • so forth. Particularly the individual side becomes an egoistic
    • Avenarius and of Mach has become the philosophy of the Bolshevik
    • merely come from the head, but from the whole human being. We might
    • dwells, and so forth. This enables man to become a being of the
    • which becomes just as widely popular as the materialistic
  • Title: Lecture: The Etheric Body as a Reflexion of the Universe
    Matching lines:
    • connected with feelings that come to the surface in these stormy and
    • comparatively short time the etheric body becomes severed from the
    • becomes severed from the human individuality and goes its own
    • question, it will be a good thing to become acquainted first of all
    • birth, then our etheric body, that has become united with our
    • become of his etheric body.
    • really to come down. Ever since the death of little Theodor Faiss, we
    • beings. Every sleeping human being becomes, as it were, a
    • that come towards it from the great universe. It is a magnificent
    • heavenly light. That is why it becomes a mediator of the forces which
    • now, its etheric body almost becomes a heavenly gift, a gift of
    • human beings should gradually become acquainted with spiritual
    • becomes the spiritual property of an ever growing number of
    • bodies. Help will come! Those who are genuinely filled with a
    • also apply to this field the saying: “Out of nothing, comes
    • used up during physical life. They do not come from nothing, they
    • have become accessible to us through that boy, it is far easier to be
    • human beings, they have become, as it were, emancipated from the
    • necessary that the new spirit, which is the outcome of spiritual
    • spiritual process of evolution, which comes to the fore
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: Salt, Mercury, Sulphur
    Matching lines:
    • soul-and-spirit in the spiritual world before he could have come down
    • experienced, however, they gradually become vision of man’s
    • spectre the faculties of thinking, feeling and willing also come into
    • some people, to see how they read Jacob Boehme and whenever they come
    • in reality they understand nothing at all. They come along with their
    • begins, directly the breath contacts it, to become indefinite, That
    • become abstract; man was obliged to look, not into his own being but
    • Kings relate that they have come from regions where conditions were
    • capacity; that a time would come when nothing would be known any
  • Title: Lecture: It is a Necessity of Our Earnest Times to Find Again the Path Leading to the Spirit
    Matching lines:
    • on jurisprudence, which, in reality are the outcome only of the Roman
    • which ego-consciousness comes to the fore with special incisiveness.
    • more recent times. The time of probation has indeed come! Great tasks
    • traditions are still alive, traditions that come from a clairvoyance
    • spiritually. We cramp ourselves egoistically in ideas that come from
    • scissors, we do not as a rule think that it comes from a kind of
    • upon us, if we do not only wish to become acquainted with the forces
    • healing of civilisation, must come from that world! The spiritual,
    • for our civilisation must come from that world! It is necessary, at
    • sacrifice, not one who could have come down to the earth, in order to
    • its spiritual science must become a concern of the great masses of
    • we become materialistic, when we spiritualize matter! And let us
    • Thus man would gradually become an automaton, unless we bear in mind
  • Title: Lecture: Some Conditions for Understanding Supersensible Experiences
    Matching lines:
    • evolution on the earth. A time will come in the physical evolution of
    • Something else, for example, might come about. The Ahrimanic Powers,
    • earth-evolution in a certain respect. It would then become possible
    • millennium. They would become much more like animals, while
    • become even more spiritual.
    • Anthroposophical Society should become in the real sense a bearer of
    • of the Ahrimanic Powers to cause the earth to become completely
    • the other senses become aware of surrounding objects. If I limit
    • Threshold is crossed man must become one with the light in his inmost
    • light itself, then for the first time he becomes aware that thinking
    • must become so entirely one with the planet, with the earth, that he
    • come towards them.
    • Men have become accustomed to think in the one and only way that is
    • Spiritual Science, must be overcome. Interest in the great affairs of
    • physical world, is your body. It becomes a mirror, reflecting back to
    • I said yesterday) merely the outcome of changes in phraseology. Only
    • in the old way, as for four centuries you have become accustomed to
  • Title: Lecture: The Relation of the Movement for Religious Renewal to the Anthroposophical Movement
    Matching lines:
    • have gradually become those of our arts — bodily, plastic
    • circles than merely the Anthroposophical Society. Hence it has come
    • Movement will become clear if we take our start from the forms in
    • the world, can be found by men when they become spiritual
    • researchers. And if men do not become spiritual researchers but
    • come to us from the spiritual world should first of all enter the
    • becomes, let us say, chemical as Chemistry is today, physical as
    • Anthroposophical Movement itself, but who will be able to come to it
    • impossible for the blood system to become nervous system, or for the
    • nervous system to become blood system. The several systems have to
  • Title: Lecture: The Ego-consciousness of the So-called Dead
    Matching lines:
    • death. For only in the light of spiritual science, death becomes
    • the light of spiritual science, death becomes an event,
    • life), it becomes a deep and serious event within the whole compass
    • which they come; and the more they lie inside our body, the less
    • If we now come to
    • being passes through the portal of death, it becomes all the more
    • physical body that come from the earth itself. We cannot,
    • comes from the ancient Moon existence, nor that part which comes from
    • those parts that come from the ancient Saturn existence, from the Sun
    • overcome by a feeling telling us that we stand within the world as
    • in a living and hearty manner, becomes dulled and loses its vitality.
    • earthly life. In this form they become inwoven with our life-tableau;
    • our physical body falls away, for it becomes inwoven with the whole
    • life that frees itself from us and becomes inwoven with the
    • our Ego, upon that which has become inwoven with the universe,
    • what thus becomes inwoven with the universe after our death; we bear
    • it within us, as our etheric body. But now it is spun up and becomes
    • become with lightning speed, also that part of our own experiences
    • which has become inwoven with the universe. That part of our own
    • therefore born to us, through the fact that our etheric part becomes
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: Concerning the Origin and Nature of the Finnish Nation
    Matching lines:
    • epic poems, we may say that these three heroic characters come from
    • place. The following thing must, as it were, come from a certain
    • inducing one to say, it comes along, and one should really be afraid
    • and becomes, rooted in what is always experienced through the “TAO”
    • take up what comes towards it, it must first be prepared for this. We
    • blackboard represents that out of which come the elemental forces of
    • in there, must come out of the organism of the earth itself out of
    • body becomes an instrument for that which is to be his particular and
    • And if we become the pupils of the Spirits of Form, we ourselves can
    • as the Finnish, the Bothnian and the Riga Bays. What comes out of the
    • element, and the element of the earth, or that which comes out of the
    • a time must come when the understanding for the tasks of evolution
  • Title: Lecture: Awakening to Community - I
    Matching lines:
    • by discussing how a society like ours comes into being. I believe
    • indeed in a not too distant future, that older forms have come down
    • really open mind about these things and has come to anthroposophy in
    • Those who have come honestly to anthroposophy therefore feel the need
    • today had not become so particularly intense.
    • growing up, now turns inward and becomes a striving to make one's
    • may come to realize purely instinctively that the life and practice
    • comes a second, one already contained in seed form in the first. It
    • from super-sensible worlds is something that comes about quite of
    • experience, and it becomes such to a degree determined by the depth
    • living force, the source of one's power to overcome.
    • where it becomes one's personal destiny. One feels oneself sharing
    • Anthroposophical Society could come into being only because there
    • them in pursuing it is welcome, and if someone doesn't, why, that's
    • and can escape from it on the soul level only, they become prone to
    • that in an evolution that has gone through three phases, newcomers to
    • matter itself becomes imbued with spirit as a result of one's having
    • Now along comes the
    • suffers from two evils, both of which must be overcome in the
    • man ought to overcome. The post-scholastic period is still haunted by
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: Perceiving and Remembering
    Matching lines:
    • shall inquire today: How does memory come about? How is it that we have
    • through? How does it come to pass that we have memory?
    • thus because of its law of continuity [or persistence] he again becomes aware
    • extol thee, O Light, for I desire to come to thee.’
    • not come near the upper Gods, that they may behold me. May great darkness
    • cover them and black darkness come over them; and do not let them behold me
    • understand what I have just explained to you. Therefore those who come across
    • easily come by a certain attitude of soul, which is necessary if spiritual
    • only come from Spiritual Science. Then before all else, it is clear to us
    • their readers, that of forgetfulness, then comes in usefully!’
    • come to think what a power newspapers have in the 19th century and the large
  • Title: Being of Man/Future Evolution: Lecture 1: Forgetting
    Matching lines:
    • bodies of the human being. Steiner shows how we can become, through our
    • repetition of one vertebra after another in the spine comes from this
    • widen and become the hollow bones of the cranium arises through the
    • we shall have to become clear about the fundamental difference
    • wheat a wheat stalk and ears will grow, and out of a bean will come a
    • come from negro parents, white children from white parents, and we
    • be taken into account until it comes to permanent habits,
    • Yes it has! The older a man becomes — not so much in his youth
    • included in its development becomes a hindrance to development. If,
    • inwards than it becomes soothing balm for many a thing in man. These
    • carry, and its contents would become more and more extensive, but at
    • the same time it would become more and more dried up. It is thanks to
    • memory picture we have immediately after death. There it becomes
    • life appear, in readiness for the work of Devachan. There they become
    • sculptors and overseers working on the form of the life to come. For
    • world. Just as these forgotten memories can become a source of health
    • in man, so can all the experiences of the past life become a source
    • does not need the connection with life which comes from ordinary
    • course these things must not be taken in such a way that you come to
  • Title: Being of Man/Future Evolution: Lecture 2: Different Types of Illness
    Matching lines:
    • bodies of the human being. Steiner shows how we can become, through our
    • cannot be immediately understood by every newcomer. But there is
    • such a way that they are equally suitable for newcomers. We could
    • come of this duplicating and publishing of lectures.
    • in particular comes under the strongest influence of materialistic
    • drop. For the moment blood comes out of the body it changes to such
    • that comes to expression in the nervous system, the external image of
    • originate therefore in the astral body, it can come from something
    • you see, the first thing you have to ask yourself when somebody comes
    • we come to those illnesses that have their spiritual origin mainly in
    • because the nervous system has become incapable of functioning in the
    • come to expression in man's glands. As a rule these illnesses have
    • must know that the human organs that come under the influence of the
    • we come to the illnesses arising out of irregularities of the astral
    • come to grips with what is at stake. Although, as with many another
    • arose from spiritual knowledge and has become more and more
  • Title: Being of Man/Future Evolution: Lecture 3: Original Sin
    Matching lines:
    • bodies of the human being. Steiner shows how we can become, through our
    • times as far as ancient Lemuria we come to that moment when the
    • meaning will become clear to you when you see what we call
    • to come into the world today with identical appearance and character,
    • long as they had a body of soft material they could actually become
    • human individuality would be extinguished, and men would all become
    • incarnates he comes down from the Devachanic world and forms his
    • of original sin. And now we come to something else: an entirely new
    • body into his organism himself to begin with as he comes down from
    • these things that occur in the human astral body it has become the
    • substance has become very thinly diffused and has itself acquired the
    • on his finer bodies, he will discover that he has become more or less
  • Title: Being of Man/Future Evolution: Lecture 4: Rhythm in the Bodies of Man
    Matching lines:
    • bodies of the human being. Steiner shows how we can become, through our
    • nothing. These changes become more and more unconscious until a
    • climax is reached, and then the ego becomes slowly more conscious
    • after four times seven days it comes back to the beginning again. A
    • become obliterated, because man has had to become independent of
    • but man has become more free of the cosmic influences around him.
    • particular connections come about. If you consider what I have just
    • see how everything that is physical around us is actually an outcome
    • then passed on to the physical body. This also becomes defective.
    • become defective through one or other cause. When it is the human
    • becomes defective first and then it passes through the etheric body
    • will only become possible again for the sciences to achieve fruitful
    • become displaced. Man can also sleep in the daytime, and stay awake
    • there today to a certain extent, but it has become independent of
    • that he used to share with the whole cosmos, but it has become
  • Title: Being of Man/Future Evolution: Lecture 5: Rhythms in the Being of Man
    Matching lines:
    • bodies of the human being. Steiner shows how we can become, through our
    • as it is today comes back as it were to its starting-point in
    • Everything in the physical organism is an expression or outcome of
    • extent connected with it. We will eventually come to talk about what
    • patient's disorder has been overcome in seven days, then all is well.
    • But if the disorder has not been overcome, and the astral body has
    • not got the tendency now to push the illness out, the patient comes
    • and a time will come for this — we should recognise the rhythms
    • Polarian, the Hyperborean and the Lemurian race. Then comes the
    • us come back to the clock. In a certain respect this also conforms to
    • absolutely coincide with the inner one. Something else has come
    • working of his clock will not have changed, it will only have become
    • also been displaced. Man would never have become an independent being
    • severing himself from external rhythm. He has become like a clock
    • circumstances only though, that have become displaced, the times have
    • become displaced as well. Even if we disregard the last-mentioned
    • essential thing. His inner life must become rhythmic. Just as rhythm
    • inner thought rhythm, and humanity would become completely decadent
    • Moon and Earth. In the future it will gradually become completely
  • Title: Being of Man/Future Evolution: Lecture 6: Illness and Karma
    Matching lines:
    • bodies of the human being. Steiner shows how we can become, through our
    • of these members comes to expression in certain organs and organ
    • system, the etheric body in all that comes under the heading of the
    • have an exact picture of how the karmic causes of one life become the
    • the kind of experiences that come about because he is now in an
    • newcomers to anthroposophy to understand at first. Man passes through
    • become as little children, ye shall not enter into the kingdom of
    • come.
    • make him the strong being he must become by the end of earth
    • of the world allowed man to become evil and gave him the possibility
    • he can become stronger in the course of karmic development than he
    • would have become had he reached his goal without effort. This is how
    • we have mustered, and when they have become mature they make their
    • comes down from the spiritual world our soul is attracted to the kind
    • of parents through whom it can inherit those qualities that come
    • is strong enough to overcome all the obstacles in the line of
    • of a lifetime, so that it overcomes what does not suit it. People
    • more or less to overcome everything not suited to it, though this is
    • always to some extent have the inner strength to overcome what does
    • better it can do this. And if circumstances are such that it becomes
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Being of Man/Future Evolution: Lecture 7: Laughing and Weeping
    Matching lines:
    • bodies of the human being. Steiner shows how we can become, through our
    • until the child has come into the world.
    • brain and the other organs so that they may become its instruments.
    • itself does not begin until the child has come into the world. And
    • little, to come to expression in the human being after birth.
    • returns to the group soul and becomes something that only lives on in
    • gradually transforms the organism, so that it becomes not only the
    • weeps? Weeping can only come about when the ego feels weak in
    • to the extent that the ego becomes master of the inner strings that
    • the spiritual point of view if we become clear about the following:
    • nature, pain and joy become forces that can work creatively in him.
    • All the joy and pain we experience in one incarnation become part of
    • that could really become an instrument for an ego and could gradually
    • moving, because we know that it will and must be overcome, but how
    • sorrow and tears in that world where they can no longer be overcome.
    • must pay good attention to these feelings that can come over us when
    • we make a broad survey of what comes to expression in man as the work
    • wrath that comes over anyone who understands life when he sees
    • way too, for its ego has not become so hardened in itself as later on
    • the fact that whoever has overcome his ego to the point of no longer
  • Title: Being of Man/Future Evolution: Lecture 8: The Manifestation of the Ego in the Different Races of Men
    Matching lines:
    • bodies of the human being. Steiner shows how we can become, through our
    • what tremendous human differences must have come about since the very
    • sun and the moon did man become like we know him today. What were the
    • such a way that he could come to best expression within it. Therefore
    • wanted to become teachers of those people who were inferior souls and
    • Equator and the North Pole. The human bodies that could become
    • not have come about. For the Lemurian population would have gradually
    • that it could become the bearer of self-consciousness in a harmonious
    • and so on, in such a way that they could become the expression of an
    • the details of later times you will see how much becomes
    • arise. It could only come right in the middle between East and West.
    • the ego too much or too little. Nothing special could come of the
    • We rely on what comes to us from outside and are not very concerned
  • Title: Being of Man/Future Evolution: Lecture 9: Evolution, Involution and Creation out of Nothingness
    Matching lines:
    • bodies of the human being. Steiner shows how we can become, through our
    • science should take hold of human life, and how it can become life,
    • completely enveloped in external etheric currents that come from the
    • clairvoyant consciousness a very special fact becomes apparent here.
    • forces. However, these currents and forces gradually become less
    • part that is the instrument for visual perception become connected
    • which first worked from outside become active from within. What was
    • sheaths in the twentieth to the twenty-second year; then it becomes
    • Take the may-fly; it comes into being, lives until it is fertilised,
    • in the animal. The astral body becomes free, and as long as it
    • possibility within it as a natural tendency when it comes into the
    • conception, and it now becomes free. Hence, because there is
    • something within man from the beginning that becomes free at the age
    • been at work, although it only becomes free at his twenty-first year,
    • that the seed is situated at one end of the etheric body like a comet
    • involved. When it comes forth it passes over to evolution, and then
    • spiritual become greater and greater.
    • actually come from? In what way are we to understand the fact that
    • constantly being added to man come from? We will make this
    • development. Everything that comes forth in the lily of the valley is
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Between Death and Rebirth: Lecture One
    Matching lines:
    • of truthfulness and earnestness, and become thoroughly conscious of
    • appeared have been the natural outcome of that original spiritual
    • flow into it. Individual souls will become more and more receptive
    • essential to become accustomed to a great deal that is the exact
    • world, the calmer our soul can become, the more all inner
    • is therefore essential to regard whatever comes to pass as something
    • bestowed upon us by grace, something that comes to us as a blessing
    • that year it has become necessary to allow the spiritual to come to
    • outer events; since that year they have become more inward.
    • become more and more dependent upon inner exertions, and men will
    • can become, the more will the facts of the spiritual world be able to
    • come to expression through us. Hence it is also necessary, if we are
    • who says to himself: I must wait until the answer comes to me like a
    • How does perception come about in everyday life on the physical
    • anything is to come about, to happen through us in the spiritual
    • will come to us that we have not ourselves produced in our search for
    • he comes into contact with those who died before him and with whom he
    • belong to us. Just as in the physical world we become aware of
    • colour ‘red’ comes, let us say, from a red rose, on the
    • spiritual plane we know that the ‘vision’ comes from the
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Between Death and Rebirth: Lecture Two
    Matching lines:
    • point of view will become thoroughly clear only when the whole course
    • that understanding can become more complete. Let us, however, begin
    • experience comes to him? A clear observation of life can teach us
    • come into any sort of collision with the outer world, he could never
    • become ‘I’-conscious. You can discover for yourselves how
    • often you become conscious of your ‘I’ in later life. You
    • by such contacts with the world outside that the child becomes aware
    • character becomes more marked the longer ago the events in question
    • returning each morning clearly into our consciousness is that we come
    • if we were to come into a new incarnation with the forces of the
    • what comes to expression in the bodily constitution. The fact that at
    • passed through the gate of death becomes in the real sense a Mercury
    • have the faculty to become thoroughly acclimatised in these other
    • the Mercury sphere with a moral disposition of soul, with the outcome
    • man becomes a hermit, feels excluded from the community of the other
    • and make no contact with them. This self-isolation is an outcome of
    • to the Sun sphere. In very truth we become, as souls, Sun dwellers
    • becomes a reproach which weighs upon us unceasingly and which we
    • becomes a source of suffering, as if towering mountains were
    • to become the leader of his people, underwent an Initiation at this
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Between Death and Rebirth: Lecture Three
    Matching lines:
    • become reality on the physical plane exist as forces and effects in
    • spiritual world we come into contact with a friend or an individual
    • responsible on Earth. To a certain extent change has become
    • on Earth, one of whom comes into contact with Anthroposophy at a
    • certain time in his life and becomes an anthroposophist. It may
    • find Anthroposophy he might himself have become a very good adherent.
    • rages against Anthroposophy because his friend has become an adherent
    • denounces Anthroposophy because his friend has become an adherent
    • now asserts itself and becomes an intense wish for Anthroposophy.
    • becomes a hindrance only when he has passed into Devachan. Hence the
    • ideas about the members of man's constitution or about what can come
    • humanity, this will eventually come about. Simply through paying
    • How can we become aware of this spiritual world?
    • this or that to amuse ourselves. This goes on until the time comes
    • come our way. Who among all of you sitting here can know what you
    • All these possibilities which do not become reality on
    • comes from the sun that enables the leaves to open again and the
    • had come her way. The first brother was a painter and he said to the
  • Title: Between Death and Rebirth: Lecture Four
    Matching lines:
    • at a point. There comes a period between death and the new birth when
    • to his physical body. Nor does he become free from the physical body
    • becomes possible only as we progress patiently in Spiritual Science
    • picture of the Ego when a human being is asleep, actually becomes
    • and becomes dark and more or less opaque while the part streaming up
    • progresses it will become more and more possible for him to picture
    • process of evolution as a whole becomes clear only when all the
    • magnificently by Kepler. But the nearer we come to modern
    • The nearer we come to the modern age the more is
    • witness the outcome of these life-giving forces because knowledge of
    • In this way spiritual teaching actually becomes part of
    • forces he had otherwise always drawn from those worlds would become
  • Title: Between Death and Rebirth: Lecture Five
    Matching lines:
    • come to men in purely spiritual bodies.
    • Christian form. It may truly be said that when the Buddha had become
    • could not become the common possession of all mankind. It was
    • supersensibly, in the stream that had become part of the process of
    • disposition of Francis of Assisi. They would have become, within
    • the new birth we actually become inhabitants, in succession, of Moon,
    • necessary that the evolution of Mars should become a process of
    • ascent, for the consequences of the phase of descent had become all
    • change that had come about in the forces brought by human beings from
    • two categories of human beings would have become more and more
    • Mars forces themselves there would come to man the impulse to work
    • could be achieved through the Buddha should become part of the
    • the evolution of Mars something similar to what had come about at the
    • as Christ Jesus had become for the Earth. The Buddha had been
    • This is the momentous outcome of what might be called
    • any truly effective influence in life on the Earth inevitably becomes
  • Title: Between Death and Rebirth: Lecture Six
    Matching lines:
    • about the content of anthroposophical views, ask: How comes it that
    • that occultism has to give — how comes it that hitherto, indeed
    • this. He is not immediately the being he is intended to become as a
    • Spirits whom he has to overcome in the course of his life, who give
    • have become Dynamis, Spirits of Movement, but fell behind in their
    • Form. They are Luciferic Spirits who have come to a standstill in
    • Observing how a human being comes into existence through
    • battling with those other Spirits who ought already to have become
    • what we shall gradually come to recognise as the true ‘I’,
    • something that comes out of the head like writhing snakes. Every head
    • have been at work to enable a human being to come into existence
    • disappear when he is already in the physical world; but they become
    • comes to life. Of this we will speak in the next lecture.
  • Title: Between Death and Rebirth: Lecture Seven
    Matching lines:
    • will be characteristic of those who are to become spiritual leaders
    • discover that whatever comes in this way into the life of man and
    • ceases to be active. What comes about later on is only an expansion
    • formative principle has now come to its conclusion. Were its activity
    • come to an end?
    • principles belonging to the first category come from the Spirits of
    • working from without are not of the same kind. They come from Spirits
    • comes into manifestation in the first seven-year cycle of his life.
    • being. Of the one I have said that it comes from without and moves
    • it comes to expression in the completion of the outermost principle —
    • course of evolution. If we realise this, it will, become evident that
    • what comes into the category of intangible but sovereign authority.
    • earliest youth the human being becomes dependent upon them and his
    • what impersonal public opinion has become today. Anyone who is
    • after death as a somewhat dim clairvoyant consciousness, had become
    • had not taken place, men would have become progressively empty in
    • than for a purely physical life, and so would have become more and
    • advanced peoples, however, can become conscious after death only to
    • who remained backward and have become Luciferic spirits. What we call
    • thinking that comes to expression as public opinion. The function of
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Between Death and Rebirth: Lecture Eight
    Matching lines:
    • outside us in life on Earth becomes our inner world. Preparation of
    • But if and when in the course of development the time comes when
    • sleep, in other words, when we become clairvoyant, having wakened
    • discern all its secrets. Thus between death and rebirth there comes a
    • only be done with halting words. There comes a time between death and
    • that here, in life on Earth, is outside us becomes in that other life
    • assumes that when a human being comes into existence through birth he
    • Here is a man; how comes it that he is alive? It is because he has
    • visible is what has come from the Earth; everything else is
    • physical body becomes visible. And it is only when we come to deal
    • conception, the first physical atom of the human being comes into
    • existence. Thus what is later on to become the body of the human
    • will come when men will lose interest in the direct impressions of
    • sub-sensory, below the level of the sense-world. This often becomes
    • forces. A time will come when human souls — and some of those
  • Title: Between Death and Rebirth: Lecture Nine
    Matching lines:
    • no account of what is alleged to come afterwards, we cannot miss
    • aspect. When a man has passed through the gate of death he comes into
    • but he comes into contact with definite forces and Beings —
    • again through birth, he becomes in a certain way the moulder of his
    • upon our physical body possessing organs which enable us to come in
    • in such a way that although he becomes an individual who is,
    • When we come across individuals who have worked on their
    • because what comes later will be revealed in all good time. But the
    • life between birth and death may become more and more intelligible.
    • speak, for speech does not come of itself. So our free-thinking
    • and his logic come to a halt when confronted by the facts. His logic
    • backwards and come to the regions through which his soul passed
    • were obliged again to forego the right guidance and could not become
    • own self made into God! In the case of many pious souls it becomes
    • can become servants of the evil spirits of illness and misfortune, so
    • too we can become the servants of those spiritual beings who promote
    • becomes aware that in physical life on Earth there are two ways in
    • sense. Earth-evolution is such that this aspect of life will become
    • tasks that men will have to carry out will become increasingly
    • devotion — this prepared the soul to become a server of the
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Between Death and Rebirth: Lecture Ten
    Matching lines:
    • which has its centre of gravity in the Mystery of Golgotha comes from
    • order finally to unite with the seed which comes to it from the
    • by the senses comes to an end and whatever is left can at most only
    • become compared with their former vividness; that will give you some
    • is generally called the unpleasant element of Kamaloka already comes
    • that in the Sun sphere after death the soul comes into contact with
    • the Light-Spirit, with Lucifer, who on Earth has become the tempter,
    • the corrupter. When the soul has expanded into the cosmos it comes
    • clearer to us through spiritual experience. And man himself comes to
    • had come to the Earth, to the territory where Mars wisdom had been
    • everything that is earthly. After the soul has become inwardly free
    • regions the soul comes once again into the Jupiter region and there
    • indeed come over from Sun to Earth but belongs to far deeper regions
    • evolved to become Earth. What streams to us from the Christ Impulse,
    • however, comes from Old Sun which preceded Old Moon.
    • become what it is today because behind it there is an infinitely long
    • there need be no contradiction, for what is said is not the outcome
  • Title: Christ and the Spiritual World: Lecture One
    Matching lines:
    • memories seriously, then it becomes clear to us that at the same time
    • the light of Anthroposophy. It might become one of those
    • the pupils of Socrates a little earlier; it had become popular in a
    • the Mystery of Golgotha, we become aware of something different. We
    • important to let this struggle work upon us. For we then come to
    • the ideas that sprang from their thinking, and then one comes to the
    • feeling of the isolation of thought comes over one; a feeling that
    • Then one can see also how in the surrounding world that one has come
    • there comes this disquieting awareness of the isolation of thought,
    • thing remains for him; but it does remain. Something comes towards
    • him by two worlds; and it becomes apparent — so the clairvoyant
    • comes a feeling which at first knows nothing of the historical
    • scholarship of today has come to recognise that in this period of
    • the sense world. It is easy enough to come to terms with a spiritual
    • One can easily imagine the smile that comes to a Monist,
    • and permeates everything that comes into being in the realms of
    • Aeons, one comes eventually to an Aeon from whom there arose on the
    • Achamod had completely become this material world, where men now
    • inner being, a memory comes to life within me. The element that holds
    • understanding will come to realise through the external documents
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Christ and the Spiritual World: Lecture Two
    Matching lines:
    • everything earthly and comes from spiritual realms; such a Being can
    • Now we must speak of the way in which Paul tried to come
    • questions and try to answer them, the course of events will become
    • the past, one certainly comes to a strange result. First of all, one
    • the Bible as the three Magi, who come from the East and are the
    • When we come to the fourth post-Atlantean epoch, we can
    • course of time I have tried to come near it through the most varied
    • say from which language the word ‘Sibyl’ comes. As soon
    • that external documents provide, we come upon something quite extraordinary,
    • telling mainly of awful things to come, but sometimes also of good
    • until we come to the time of the Mystery of Golgotha. Then we see how
    • of the character which strikes us immediately in Jeremiah and comes
    • nor Greek philosophy had come into the world? Humanity would then
    • though the Damascus vision had come to expression through him; as
    • good element in Earth evolution, then one comes to the phenomenon
  • Title: Christ and the Spiritual World: Lecture Three
    Matching lines:
    • have always emphasised that of the soul-element which has come forth
    • attacks of both these spiritual Beings. If nothing further had come
    • about — if, that is, the human souls had come down from
    • quite simple matter for these human souls to come down from their
    • solar activity, did not become organs of mere sympathy and antipathy.
    • Lucifer and Ahriman, the vital organs would have become merely organs
    • soul-organs would have become disordered. I mean that willing would
    • this arose that science of planetary activities which comes before us
    • come into existence because the Being who had been permeated by the
    • this third event to come about?
    • human souls; this had to be overcome. The angelic Being who was
    • We come to know Apollo if we look at Parnassus and the
    • overcome the dragon, the Python, a temple was built, and instead of
    • held at the time of his departure, and his return was welcomed in the
    • he had come into the world with ass's ears because in his life
    • which the Ego-force could come to necessary expression on Earth. The
    • Golgotha had not come to pass.
  • Title: Christ and the Spiritual World: Lecture Four
    Matching lines:
    • which had to come about for the evolution of humanity through the
    • Then we come to the third post-Atlantean epoch.
    • secret influence which had come into the world though the threefold
    • in our sense of the term. How do we first come upon the ranks of the
    • has come down from earlier times, from Saturn, Sun, Moon. Jahve is
    • wisdom, since it professed the Jahve-god, had to become Geology. And
    • man out of earth; and he, the Jahve-god, having become in the
    • Italy and smoke comes out. So does fiery smoke, telluric activity,
    • come out of the mountain. And in telluric activity the Jews always
    • of the Hebrew people come from the desert, where the Earth-forces
    • with Meteorology. And a wonderful spiritual reflection of this comes
    • the return of the Messiah, but that he would come down from the
    • were predetermined: they reflected the outcome of the relations of
    • heralding of things to come. And we meet with the remarkable fact
    • was later to come to Earth as the Nathan Jesus-child; a Being who at
    • you, a wild olive, have been grafted in among them, and have come to
  • Title: Christ and the Spiritual World: Lecture Five
    Matching lines:
    • those that come from subconscious depths, but those that speak to the
    • Christianity in the West could not come about through the quarrels of
    • but can only give evidence of itself. But where and how did it come
    • Parsifal comes to a lonely place and finds two men: one is steering a
    • the Fisher-King's aged father, whose only nourishment comes
    • and in a lonely part of the wood comes upon a woman with her husband
    • Knights of the Holy Grail, the Knights of that holy Order, come to
    • Parsifal becomes the Grail King. And so the name,
    • outcome of many years of research — that in our epoch there is
    • stellar script must once more become something that speaks to us. And
    • Parsifal comes to the hermit:
    • With weeping comes he through the wood
    • Then come the conversations between Parsifal and the
  • Title: Christ and the Spiritual World: Lecture Six
    Matching lines:
    • results to which one has to come in spiritual research are to be
    • research is not the outcome of ideas that have been put together, as
    • come when someone or other may think it profitable to attack us. And
    • important fact. The gold-gleaming sickle becomes apparent because the
    • little, to become a sickle. Something must be visible of the dark
    • might become the bearer of spiritual culture in later times. Now let
    • had become a moon god only in order to help the Earth forward.
    • symbol — go no further! The time has not yet come for drawing
    • When all that has come over into Earth evolution from
    • come over from the Moon period and with its outcome for Earth
    • such stories are despised, the rarer they become. For these spirits
    • how the spiritual revelations come to be permeated by Christ, for he
    • 1607 he spoke thus of the changes that had come about in the
    • protected from it. What he learns to know comes from sources active
    • the Grail, for it is on a Good Friday that he comes to the hermit;
    • come to the Mysteries with the same forces which otherwise dominate
    • And something else had come about through the union of the Ruler of
    • out into the Earth's aura, had become the Lord of the Earth.
    • in the depths of his soul, comes with the power of Saturn; and the
    • accordingly, had to come by degrees to understand something that will
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Perception of the Nature of Thought
    Matching lines:
    • forth the connection of cause and effect that comes to expression in
    • evolution become entirely spiritual, but leaving its signs behind in
    • become spiritual to the same degree as the Old Saturn laws. The
    • Saturn laws have become so spiritual that we can only investigate
    • determined comes under the rule of ancient Saturn laws. There we are
    • overcome as soon as the human being draws the first active breath for
    • embryo becomes so to say more and more atomistic. The nearer the
    • becomes increasingly spiritual. For that which is attached to the
    • comes the actual thought-life. And in the epoch described here the
    • soul, an impulse had to come that seized its inmost part, an impulse
    • comes the fourth evolutionary period; the independent rule of thought
    • that comes to light so magnificently in the thought-structures of
    • etheric body. Then we come into the Christian period. The Christ-
    • to epoch, cause philosophy to become precisely what it is. Because
    • period and then the Christ, the Sun-Being, becomes active in the
    • comes into connection with an evolution which is not the human
    • Spirits of Wisdom and the Archangels come to light again on earth in
    • comes from Spirit itself, philosophically at first, otherwise
    • born. But in modern times it comes to actual self-consciousness in
    • thought. Then comes the next 7 years, what man experiences from the
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: The Spiritual Individualities of the Planets
    Matching lines:
    • superficial observation. So we can say: What comes from the Moon is
    • for such a man does the Moon become as it were inwardly transparent
    • we come to all that was once taught to primeval humanity on Earth by
    • In this way one comes gradually to a knowledge of the “individuality”
    • steadfastly participated in whatever has come to pass in our
    • informant concerning what has come to pass in the planetary system,
    • eyes of spirit and soul, Saturn becomes a living historian of the
    • what has come to pass in the planetary system. In this respect Saturn
    • and especially astral hindrances, the Jupiter Beings come to the help
    • We now come to Mars. It is difficult to find appropriate expressions
    • responsive to everything that comes from the Earth. The Earth is, so
    • know nothing of it. But she lovingly reflects whatever comes from the
    • what comes from the Earth. As I said before, she declines every
    • from these sources into what is done and what comes into existence in
    • the world. Venus receives into herself everything that comes from the
    • language tends to become superficial, poor in qualities of soul, when
    • We come next to Mercury. In contrast to the other planets. Mercury is
    • When a human being comes down from pre-earthly life into earthly
    • is connected more with the life of soul and spirit and comes to
    • in which freedom becomes a luminous reality in the universe; and at
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: The Problem of Destiny
    Matching lines:
    • pertaining to the spiritual worlds. The facts which come to light in
    • is good to draw attention to them — the facts which thus come
    • must be the result of victories; our strength grows if we overcome
    • that life becomes less interesting through the fact that the riddles
    • discovery: We shall see how human beings come together here, in the
    • come to the fore which bring about death from within the human
    • that he is losing it more, and more, it will become an ever growing
    • onward, and in future it will become more and more necessary.
    • overcomes death in this soul-manner and that it penetrates into life.
    • this force grows powerless because man must become independent, he
    • evolution of man's future, but these truths should become
    • would become paralysed if no help comes from the spiritual worlds.
  • Title: Lecture: On the Connection of the Living and the Dead
    Matching lines:
    • to us — what has already come before our souls during these
    • who never come to incarnation, but only to
    • ourselves become precisely such a being as these elemental beings
    • are. In a manner of speaking, we ourselves become an elemental being.
    • becomes one with the etheric counterpart. A few days after death we
    • become — united as it now is with its counterpart or
    • body in the course of life becomes a part of the spiritual world. It
    • our etheric body into the spiritual world and become part and parcel
    • spiritual training we come into actual intercourse with this
    • person who is spiritually trained wishes to come into connection with
    • that come from the dead who were formerly related to us. Many a human
    • whom he becomes connected in one way or another — to whom,
    • are instrumental. Our life does not become any the less free thereby.
    • that we become unfree because our soul constantly receives influences
    • connected with warmth and cold, with all the things that become our
    • comes to us from those who have died before us. We are equally
    • that which comes to us from them, and we can truly say: man's working
    • They are, however, beings who do not need to come to embodiment in a
    • occultly-trained person cannot consciously come near to one who is
    • dead like fire. To come into conscious relation with the dead we must
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: The Elemental World and the Future of Mankind
    Matching lines:
    • being of man something comes together which, in a certain
    • when a change has come about in the last few decades, when a young person
    • comes out automatically; it is as if the brain itself has lost its
    • intelligence has become something mechanical which no longer springs
    • observation. This situation has come about because intelligence was
    • world. It will be necessary for man not only to become conscious once
    • by the intellect, sees the world. But the time has come when mankind
    • mankind does not become receptive to what streams towards him from
    • If it should happen that the elemental beings come under the
    • evolution. The earth can only become what it was originally intended
    • to become if man, in each epoch, tackles his task rightly.
    • becoming multitudes. The ones who strive the most to become
    • another and become many individuals. Rather do they strive to grow
    • together and disappear into one another; they seek to become a
    • powers. In order for the earth to become what it was originally
    • intended to become, man must wake up to the dangers that threaten
    • earth. When the evolution of the earth comes to an end, all mineral
  • Title: Lecture: The Moment of Death and the Period Thereafter
    Matching lines:
    • spiritual science does death become a real event in the true meaning
    • portal of death. In the light of spiritual science, death becomes an
    • life); it becomes a deep and serious event within the whole compass
    • from which they come; and the more they lie inside our body, the less
    • If we now come to the etheric body, we shall find that
    • portal of death, it becomes all the more important. The time through
    • earth only those parts of our physical body that come from the earth
    • physical body that comes from the Old Moon existence, nor that
    • part which comes from the Old Sun existence or from the Old Saturn
    • existence. For those parts that come from the Old Saturn existence,
    • we gaze at it, we are overcome by a feeling telling us that we stand
    • becomes dulled and loses its vitality. But when we pass through the
    • become interwoven with our life-tableau; in this form we experience
    • it becomes interwoven with the whole universe, with the whole world.
    • and becomes interwoven with the universe, even what we experience
    • namely, with our astral body and our ego, upon that which has become
    • earthly life we bear within us what thus becomes interwoven with the
    • But now it is spun up and becomes interwoven with the world. And we
    • what our physical body has become with lightning speed, also that
    • part of our own experiences which has become interwoven with the
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: Relationships Between the Living and the Dead
    Matching lines:
    • physical body, he stands in a world, as we have become accustomed to
    • of the entire actual world. As we come together so seldom, it is not
    • our work, and become ever stronger, as we can well see, yet we may
    • becomes especially difficult for him to penetrate into the spiritual
    • because their ideas have become stiff and dead, through the fact that
    • into the different ways by which this physical body becomes united
    • one comes very easily to such a preconception. But this mode of
    • smallest parts of our bodies finally become, under all circumstances,
    • become air and water become at last warmth. Yes, even though it may
    • indeed come when what is present there to-day as skeletons, will
    • or, let us say, through conception — gradually becomes
    • surely do we always have before us, when we become fully conscious
    • Then comes the time, as you know, when we carry with us
    • even if we were unable to come into contact with the Being itself,
    • deceased, but could come into contact only with what he had left
    • must be carried out in perfect calmness of soul. If anyone becomes
    • experiences which come to us.
    • looking at it, has something that attacks something which comes out
    • quietly in its place; nothing comes toward us, out of the blue. On
    • able, in part, to penetrate into it, while at the same time it comes
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Mission of Folk-Souls (1929): Lecture 1
    Matching lines:
    • transform the astral, so that it will become something different from
    • ‘ I ’, become the Spirit-man or Atma. Thus we
    • mankind this may become different, and it will become essentially
    • above them.’ If at the present day a man becomes conscious in
    • this form will become more and more concrete in the following
    • able to sit together, who come here from many different countries,
    • different persons come from the domains of many different
    • is not repeated. After this comes the repetition of the
    • seventh epoch will come, which will be a repetition of the primeval
    • The fact that individual persons become instruments in this mission
  • Title: Mission of Folk-Souls (1929): Lecture 2
    Matching lines:
    • etheric auras is in a certain respect a fusion of what comes from the
    • forgotten and only material consciousness comes into play. In truth
    • physical laws work and come into consideration, as in the relations
    • also come into consideration. These consist in the fact, that they
    • We should then come to yet others, which we do not,
    • that which could not come about without the whole structure and form
    • constellation has to come about. Only remember that on one occasion,
    • would have become of many physical things in modern times, if this
    • become Spirits of Personality during our earth existence, work in
    • definite form of ideas. Hence it comes about that man is not only
    • look upon these as men who had to come, and at their activities as
    • The true knowledge of a people comes from listening to
    • the constitution of the people. Hence it has become difficult for
    • They have indeed to differ, because one writer feels more what comes
    • the abnormal Archangels, and again a third that which comes from the
  • Title: Mission of Folk-Souls (1929): Lecture 3
    Matching lines:
    • appear in the intellectual-soul or mind-soul, and only becomes quite
    • Archangels out of all that can also become human consciousness? What
    • perceive quite clearly that such things come into the human
    • call our moral ideals come to us. There would be no moral ideals if
    • think about that which comes to us from the outer world by means of
    • being inwardly, so that it becomes a part of his life. Observe the
    • as centers within him, the Archangel has the feeling that what comes
    • age these members become relaxed, they refuse to work; that is
    • which he perceives begin to become less productive, less active, when
    • they begin to have fewer contents. Then comes the time when he
    • Therefore these Beings come into closer contact with that which makes
    • of Personality come into collision with the measures taken by the
    • who expresses himself in the Spirit of the Age becomes, so to speak,
    • the Archangel as its first power. Then the Spirit of the Age comes
    • to this portion that which has become the important concern of the
    • the urging, the activity which comes from the mission of the Spirit
  • Title: Mission of Folk-Souls (1929): Lecture 4
    Matching lines:
    • and being come about. We know from the study of Akashic Records and
    • become capable of taking into himself an ‘ I ’.
    • you will admit that only from a very complicated work could that come
    • also necessary, if man were to come into being, that at certain
    • the co-operation of these Beings man has come into being. We are then
    • able to say, that the chief Being who comes into consideration for
    • these Beings have really to accomplish in man, only actually comes
    • last time in a particular way. Then comes the time from the seventh
    • only during the condition of the Earth-life. We then come to the
    • which only comes in about his twentieth year, have no direct interest
    • that, if you come to think of it, you will no longer find it very
    • are concerned, man need only come into existence in the condition in
    • followed a normal development he would only then come out of himself
    • Thus man comes into existence and receives capacities
    • then man would only come into consideration, as far as the physical
    • only becomes man during his earth life in the middle part, and in the
    • belongs to the later epochs of life. Through this man has become a
    • would have intended man to come down only at this point (twenty,
    • If all this had become what it did not become, that is
    • up above in the periphery of the earth, and had only come down to
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Mission of Folk-Souls (1929): Lecture 5
    Matching lines:
    • necessary for one to rise above all the feelings that may easily come
    • Our consciousness, our horizon, becomes wider, more
    • present time must come before our mental eyes as the secrets of Race
    • however, can only come gradually before our mental eyes.
    • vegetable and mineral kingdoms.) Above him come the Angels, then the
    • presents itself as forces which come out of the earth and radiate
    • outstreaming forces; and where they come together they form as one
    • the earth, out in every direction; and that which comes in from
    • really come into existence? There was a time, which lies far back in
    • become solid. Viscous waves were then thrown up from the South, so
    • activity had not come in, one which is exceptionally enduring and
    • live, move and have our being. They come out of universal space, but
    • towards the activity of the Spirits of Form, who come from outside.
    • through various incarnations before it could become earth, through
    • inner life which comes from within. These words are carefully chosen;
    • whole world of the hierarchies had to cause a planet to come into
    • In the same way the old Sun had to come into existence,
    • equilibrium comes about between the three forces which in earlier
    • Trinity becomes a Quaternary, and the latter begins with its fourth
    • inner being becomes the substance of love. That is what we may call
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Mission of Folk-Souls (1929): Lecture 6
    Matching lines:
    • work that finally a state of equilibrium comes about. Hence you will
    • the earth, and that the way in which man becomes aware of these
    • you will have become somewhat more closely acquainted with what may
    • normal Spirits of Form, then nothing would come into existence on
    • that namely, which comes from the abnormal Spirits of Form who are
    • sprang. We then come to Asia and find there the Venus-race or the
    • so that his racial character may come about, cannot at first work
    • characteristics comes from the fact that the Mercury forces seethe
    • activity. This modification of the common human form comes therefore
    • comes down in the blood from Abraham, Isaac and Jacob and so on. That
    • humanity which comes from the abnormal Spirits of Form whom we may
    • modifications can come about, and that in the formation of the
    • race. From that action comes its mortality, its disappearance. The
  • Title: Mission of Folk-Souls (1929): Lecture 7
    Matching lines:
    • post-Atlantean civilization after their Archangel had become the
    • impulse for this from them. The Monistic impulse has always come from
    • himself became manifest, when he had become the Spirit of the Age, in
    • Asia, Africa and Europe, whose centre the Greek people had become.
    • Spirit of the Age that he might become the leader of exoteric
    • true esoteric Christianity comes from his inspirations. The secret,
    • destined to come gradually under the guidance of many different
    • a Spirit of Form. Thus it comes about that our fifth post-Atlantean
    • culture, it has become possible for the many different kinds of
    • of the Age. These tendencies will be able to become an important part
  • Title: Mission of Folk-Souls (1929): Lecture 8
    Matching lines:
    • states of clairvoyance, had become a matter of complete indifference
    • We then come to the Chaldean peoples. They already
    • of the West — unless they come to it indirectly through
    • giving him what were to become his soul forces, and he found there as
    • awake, he might become Guide in the soul-world of the Germanic
    • microcosmically have become the twelve brain nerves. He sees the
    • that which comes from the human South, from the heart, works towards
    • that which comes down from above; he seeks for it outside in the
    • passes over into what later becomes ‘Riesenheim’ (Home of
  • Title: Mission of Folk-Souls (1929): Lecture 9
    Matching lines:
    • impersonal, and above all one is required to become impersonal in
    • man gained two things: he gained the capacity to become an
    • How does that come about? It comes about because in the second
    • themselves by inner contemplation, in order to come into the higher
    • come across such a clear and profound knowledge of the fact that
    • is connected with karma. Sickness and death would never have come to
    • man if the Lucifer influence had not come in. The karmic working out
    • another, and yet come from quite different causes. External facts may
    • have been as described, and yet death would have come about from an
    • proceeding from inner impulse. Where man comes into relation with the
    • the myth say? Loki's influence has come upon man, and this is
    • Hela. Man has become such that his view, his clear luminous vision
    • into the spiritual world has become dimmed by the increasing pressure
    • slowly and by degrees has the outlook of man become limited to the
    • in the death of Balder, had become true for the majority of men.
    • kingdom of Heaven is come nigh unto you.’ Over there, where
    • the words: ‘Change your view, for the kingdom of Heaven is come
    • become visible, — brought about the feeling that the time spent
    • Lucifer having come into conflict with that which comes from the Gods
    • himself as receiving all that comes from former ages as the origin
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Mission of Folk-Souls (1929): Lecture 10
    Matching lines:
    • only could it come about that nearly 100 years after the
    • Mysteries. This mystery-education allowed just so much to come to the
    • founding of the parliamentary forms of government at once becomes
    • the Spiritual Soul in our own, which is not yet completed. Then comes
    • worlds have come into question. This relation, if we compare it with
    • conception of Christ has been able to come in the East than in
    • Western Europe, excepting where it has come about through
    • to a state into which the Spirit-Self can come; so that man will in
    • significance of Christ becomes the central point of philosophy, and
    • it thus becomes a very different thing from what the Western European
    • feeling of the people up to its philosophy, comes to us as something
  • Title: Mission of Folk-Souls (1929): Lecture 11
    Matching lines:
    • myth and it has been preserved in all that has come down to us in the
    • northern people by means of these pictures, really comes from the
    • come about, for instance, that persons will be able, through the
    • come before his eyes which at first he will not understand. But if he
    • clairvoyance as a mystery to come, the ‘Mystery of the Living
    • manifestation which must come when human capacities so develop in the
    • The Mystery-training will nevertheless not become
    • school for that which is to come. Humanity is now organized for
    • within it, and it might occur that those persons who will come
    • become the most wonderful manifestation for mankind. Everything that
    • In that which has come down to us as the ‘Twilight
    • future, and herewith I come to a chapter the starting-point of which
    • would come into play against that force which in olden times had to
    • was overcome by the flaming sword of Surtur, who sprang from the
    • come in. And what that is, is, however, known to Germanic Norse
    • would bewilder mankind, if Odin did not overcome the Fenris Wolf,
    • has kept silence all the time, will overcome the Fenris Wolf. That
    • times that which is to come, know that the new spiritual
    • having a proper understanding of that which is to come.
    • capable of development, we must therefore overcome that which it had
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: A Picture of Earth-Evolution in the Future
    Matching lines:
    • enigmatically, of the need to recognise and welcome certain beings, “not of the
    • intellect has become more and more shadowy, and as a result of the developments
    • matters of the greatest significance come into consideration here. Man's being
    • outcome of a decision on the part of the Spiritual Beings who guide and direct
    • possible for him to become an earthly being. Through this event — through the
    • earth — man has become an earthly being, existing in the sphere of earthly
    • gravity. Without earthly gravity, he could never have become a being capable of
    • personality. He was able to become a personality because of the concentration
    • nature has become more spiritual, but with his spiritual faculties he thinks
    • possible until the 27th year. In the fourth millennium a time will come when
    • year of life. Women will then become barren. An entirely different form of
    • the earth and become part of it.
    • If the intellect continues to become even
    • cosmic realms beyond the earth they come down to the earth and enter into a
    • earth-existence. Just as the Vulcan-men were the last to come down to the earth
    • what comes from them: namely, the substance and content of Spiritual Science.
    • are speaking of concrete fact when we say: Spiritual Beings are seeking to come
    • earth. These Beings of whom I have spoken will gradually come down to the
    • complete manhood, however, cannot come to expression in such a form of
    • intellect, and men will have no relationship to the Beings who would fain come
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Mission of Spiritual Science and of Its Building at Dornach
    Matching lines:
    • Anthroposophical Society are names which have become more widely known
    • which had become dear to me because a Professor of Philosophy, Robert
    • circumstances, it has come about that the building has been erected
    • misunderstood. One who has become conversant with this spiritual
    • brain have become abnormal and diseased. In every case in which the
    • training has come in, among those who have studied natural science,
    • done with thinking in order that it may become something entirely
    • whole inner life of the soul becomes changed. Something happens which
    • lifeless form, were suddenly to begin to walk and to become living.
    • itself becomes a living being within him. Thereby he has grasped
    • conceptions. He becomes permeated by this living, ruling element. And
    • bringing logical thinking to life within him, becomes conscious of a
    • transformed that it no longer leads merely to images, but becomes
    • from what comes through the development of thinking. If we desire to do
    • hands; but the will only comes to expression in this movement. In its
    • become something inwardly alive, a kind of etheric body. The will may
    • the will we become aware that we have a second human being within us,
    • become unconscious and know nothing about ourselves and our
    • whole, becomes split up into certain principles of which it is
    • This new human being can be seen in the present one, for it becomes
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: The Spiritual Communion of Mankind
    Matching lines:
    • Mysteries that were the outcome of different conditions in the
    • they had come to him together with the pictures. And this gave rise
    • the masses of those who were their followers: “We have become
    • a doctor to become ignorant in August and September — if I may
    • how in the earth's environment there is not only that which comes
    • enables the roots of the plants to thrive. The seeds become roots and
    • present year comes to manifestation only in the blossom. Even the
    • he too is shut off from the cosmos and comes nearest to the God who
    • come to understand the universe. We study the human heart, for
    • intensity how we can come to know the universe, we must gaze into the
    • because we can only become Man again in the true sense by finding the
    • with the strength that will come to your souls when you feel with all
  • Title: Lecture: Michelangelo
    Matching lines:
    • History nowadays has come
    • come into human history as soon as we cease looking at it just as a
    • light of this conception of repeated earth lives we shall soon come
    • Greeks because something lived in their souls which did not come to
    • when in his heart he becomes fully aware of what lies before him; he
    • the moment when the soul becomes aware of its task, and that moment
    • impossible for the soul in one epoch becomes possible in another, and
    • Why had this become
    • soul had become more inward. There is a marked difference between
    • become more inward. This inner deepening he expressed by external
    • a growing point for what is to come. If he created Madonnas or some
    • living message so that generations to come might look at this
    • what is to come in the Christ-Impulse and the Mystery of Golgotha.
    • only become clear to us if we turn our gaze towards the Sibyls.
    • utterances of the Jewish Prophets. How did the Sibyls come to make
    • the forces of the Sibyls come actually from the forces of the earth
    • How did Christ come into
    • creative principle. Thus it comes about that what men in general felt
    • live. Hence comes the mood of the poem which he wrote —
    • chief figures show us Michelangelo as we have come to know him —
  • Title: Lecture: Technology and Art: Their Bearing on Modern Culture
    Matching lines:
    • modern life. We must come to feel that Spiritual Science is a
    • is that in the former case the experiences become conscious; the
    • of the adjuncts of modern life may come into contact with my bodily
    • attitude is not the outcome of strength, but of weakness of the soul.
    • impulses that come from Spiritual Science and spiritual research, so
    • discover its real nature, they come out with a great deal of
    • That is modern technical science; it arises because men have come to
    • therefore, we come upon the nature-spirits which are continually
    • destructive element when in his Ego and astral body he comes down
    • We will turn now from what we have thus come to know
    • inner life that man comes into connection with the divine-spiritual
    • killed, destroyed. And he becomes aware that this destruction makes
    • modern Spiritual Science is to become living reality. Mankind has
    • milieu created by technical science that it is possible to come into
    • — something. That is a turn of phrase which comes quite
    • as the result of the mechanisation of life, modern man has come
    • to-day, but he was quite differently related to something that comes
    • Building — and here comes the shockingly homely simile —
    • when it encounters the (impact of the painting, may itself become a
    • carried to a further stage, the plastic-pictorial element becomes a
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: Past Incarnations of the Peoples of Today
    Matching lines:
    • When a man comes to Spiritual Science today he begins to understand
    • happened in these earlier generations. He becomes familiar with the
    • the outcome of real and very strenuous spiritual research —
    • the rather coquettish style of Tagore is the outcome of the influence
    • you, another question forces itself upon him; namely: What has become
    • Today, of course, it has become altogether decadent, but at the time
    • old, instinctive clairvoyance. They spoke of how the world had come
    • was a very long time before the urge arose within them to come down
    • as if something were going to burn them. One comes across incredible
    • “After all, when it comes to things that do not directly
    • upon the earth. Understanding will not come from a study of heredity
  • Title: Lecture: Morality and Karma
    Matching lines:
    • Theosophy becomes really fruitful if we can observe its influence on
    • our own life and if it becomes living substance within us.
    • must become less selfish; we should be able to rejoice at another
    • quality in which the Luciferic power comes to expression. It is a
    • get rid of it, to overcome it and drive it away. When a person first
    • against it. When we try to overcome falsehood, we can see that
    • case exercise its influence and we should wait until this becomes
    • When this has disappeared, when it has been overcome, we can observe
    • laws already comes to expression in one and the same incarnation,
    • which build up the next life; it will become interwoven with the
    • truth, it should become manifest that by adopting the right attitude
    • of Theosophy will then become living substance.
    • Now someone might come along and say: It is quite right that things
    • us at all! The fulfillment of Karma will come of its own accord; our
    • We may come towards a person with understanding; i.e., immerse
  • Title: Lecture: The Inexpressible Name, Spirits of Space and Time.
    Matching lines:
    • facts, which come to light through spiritual-scientific knowledge.
    • the beginning of the 4th post-Atlantean Epoch, we come, as you also
    • piece of the body tends to become something resembling the whole body
    • mathematical-geometrical sphere, the less transparent things become.
    • conception. Our world conception would become far less selfish than
    • many other things besides. Now I come to a point which clearly shows
    • that modern people must become more and more conscious of the real
    • Most egoistic of all have become religions, religious creeds. Even
    • superficial facts can show you that religious beliefs have become
    • People may now have democracies or parliaments — they may come
    • large, they become majorities. In that case it is not human destinies
    • of East and West; a religious renewal will come when human souls will
    • true nature of the Archangel cannot come to us if we only move in
    • Roman life fills modern law. Sometimes the old native law comes into
    • that which is active in space, but also the impulses which come from
    • things to come, live in our soul, we are filled by a new feeling,
    • of Time, or the Archai. That is to say, we come to the third Divine
    • explained. For the Spirits of Form, which come after the Archai, are
    • stereotyped model; he ceases to be a real human being and becomes
    • improvement of the human forces; people should once more become
  • Title: Lecture: The Etheric Being in the Physical Human Being
    Matching lines:
    • being expands and becomes a world. Man himself actually grows to
    • perceive a new world which seems to come out of our own being. We
    • reality, now becomes an immense world, whereas the physical world
    • which surrounded us becomes a Being and we live within it. This
    • manner described and become part of the whole earthly organism,
    • even as winter comes over the fruits of the earth and covers them
    • that condition in which the earth becomes for us a Being to whom
    • so that our existence from birth to death becomes a whole, a
    • we come to feeling, and still further to the will. When we look
    • Man did not first come into being upon the earth, but in order to
    • become man he had to pass through the evolutions of Saturn, Sun
    • lifeless character and becomes a living being.
    • body, become a flaming light, when we live in the spiritual
  • Title: Lecture: The Coming Experience of Christ
    Matching lines:
    • culture of Middle Europe, as we have come to know it in recent weeks,
    • called the Christ-Experience yet to come. We learnt yesterday
    • clear that just as other incisive events in human evolution come
    • come in an unexpected way. And it will have a clearly definable
    • souls has become quite different from what it was before that time.
    • what has been inculcated, and this comes out very clearly if one
    • popular science. And this comes about because popular science has
    • rapidly, especially in the last decades, ideas which have become
    • himself becomes comprehensible. There is no place for man in the
    • been developing in one's soul since childhood, and comes
    • the spark which kindles in them from childhood onwards comes from
    • are conducted as to whether it comes from the grandmother or
    • oppressive and dreadful will it gradually become. And the strength of
    • become unbearable, for it is associated with another feeling, a
    • something directly felt, and then it will become an oppressive
    • of the claims that have arisen as the outcome of a gigantic piece of
    • centuries; it has come to a climax in our own day. Those who are
    • sides that the conception of the human being has become lost to
    • and fourth conditions; and now in Our present earth-evolution comes
    • evolution can come about in you: during earth-evolution only the
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: Spiritual Knowledge: A Way of Life
    Matching lines:
    • scientific fact. Knowledge has become severed from direct personal
    • basing our conclusion on the facts of experience. Once we have come
    • before us as something objective to ourselves. Whereas when we come
    • become changed when we begin to have immediate experience of the
    • thereby obliged to come into a nearer, more personal relation with
    • As we come to apprehend the truths of the pre-earthly
    • the spiritual world, we come to feel how, through such knowledge, we
    • devotion to the world; but that thereby our life had become richer,
    • inwardly richer. We have become the world, and in so doing we begin
    • life, becomes a characteristic of one who is able to receive
    • inclination to selflessness, to love. He comes also to understand
    • when we come to consider the deeper impulses that rise up in human
    • immediate reality. Let us examine a little how this comes about.
    • beings become actual and objective; we begin to be familiar with
    • have to come right out of ourselves — rather as we do when we
    • love another human being. And in so far as we become able to do this,
    • forces, is in reality guided from elsewhere. We come in fact
    • Now we can come to a knowledge of the other lives we
    • knowledge. Our knowledge has to become a loving knowledge, intimately
    • spiritually active beings — as we do this, we come into a
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: How Can the Destitution of Soul in Modern Times Be Overcome?
    Matching lines:
    • How Can the Psychological Stress of Today be Overcome?,
    • CAN THE DESTITUTION OF SOUL IN MODERN TIMES BE OVERCOME? —
    • in which humanity will be living for many hundreds of years to come.
    • The significance of all this becomes clearer if we give
    • will become increasingly difficult to bring ourselves into a right
    • continue to spread and become more and more intensive. How hard it is
    • will become more and more difficult, because of the increasing need
    • This becomes clearer if we compare human beings with an animal
    • to become matters of general interest. This is a necessity for social
    • to the difficulty of understanding one another. It is what must come
    • thing to bear in mind if we want the otherwise empty saying to become
    • souls. And what comes from these group religions will simply not be
    • Him anew. This will not come from the imposing of fixed dogmas, only
    • of life more and more, to penetrate it, and by so doing to come to
    • unsuitable and will become ever more unsuitable for the growth of
    • although much comes under this heading which would have to be
    • become more and more necessary to exterminate Jesuitism, the enemy in
    • authority has become so great and so intensified that under its
    • are being built up which in their turn will become the basis of
    • understandable. But under the pressure of authority we shall become
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: Modern and Ancient Spiritual Exercises
    Matching lines:
    • phases to become what may be described as modern man's consciousness of the
    • breathe in, hold the breath and exhale; this becomes a conscious process
    • rhythm, because as thinking becomes separated from the inner rhythm of
    • becomes free of the bodily functions, the moment it has torn itself away
    • exercise becomes mechanical because the strong energy, which is
    • overcome is one's own lethargy; then comes the other resistance, which
    • because thinking, which has gradually become strong and alive, has found
    • made to overcome this pain of the soul, which becomes ever greater as one
    • becomes purely an inner soul path in which the body does not
  • Title: Lecture: The Meaning of Easter: St. Paul and the Christ Impulse
    Matching lines:
    • their connection with the sun-forces — when the Sunday comes that
    • which is beyond the earth, man is to become free of the evolution of the
    • Christ Impulse, to become free of earthly conditions.
    • period of earthly evolution have become more and more veiled and hidden
    • had come to an end in the physical sense, Paul was still an antagonist of
    • which becomes intelligible to us only when with the help of spiritual
    • entirely new way of relating themselves to cosmic evolution had come to
    • understand history as it truly is, we must come back again and again to
    • spiritual in all the phenomena of the world of sense. A time had to come
    • entered earth-evolution. “Christ will come again to you,” he said, “if
    • earth. Christ will come again to you, for He is here. Through the
    • working of the Event of Golgotha, He is here. But you must find Him; He must come again
    • enough. today, mankind has only come so far as to speak of the contrast
    • necessary outcome of the teaching of modern theology, if only people took
    • soul-and-spirit sickness of our age comes to clearest expression; for a
    • come out of a primeval nebula, and in course of mighty changes undergone
    • come into being. And carrying the theory further, a time will come when
    • beyond the earth. The time has come when man must realise with full
    • all that can come from super-sensible knowledge.
    • also find the way to come to the super-sensible. At bottom, it is
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Agriculture Course: Lecture 1
    Matching lines:
    • a specific form of agriculture which has come to be regarded as 'premium
    • Whatever comes to
    • Count desired us to come to Koberwitz.
    • believe that every single one of us has come here gladly for this
    • Agriculture Course. We who have come here can express our thanks just
    • during the succeeding days, to come to a right understanding on all
    • and carefully weigh out everything that comes on to their plate)
    • the outer Universe. The nearer we come to man, the greater this
    • extent, with twining stems; they would all become like creepers. The
    • forces which comes not from the Earth but from the so-called
    • the plants — works through those forces which come down from
    • when plants become foodstuffs to a large extent — when they
    • evolve in such a way that the substances in them become foodstuffs
    • come into the Earth from Moon, Venus and Mercury and become effective
    • those forces which come, for instance, from the Moon. Water brings
    • forces that come from the Moon on days of the full Moon, something
    • at any time? Something, no doubt, will come of it even then.
    • has become almost entirely thoughtless nowadays. They are only too
  • Title: Agriculture Course: Lecture 2
    Matching lines:
    • a specific form of agriculture which has come to be regarded as 'premium
    • farthest distances of the Cosmos — the farthest that come into
    • sand, with its silicious content, that there comes into the
    • water and of the solid earthy element itself. They become still more
    • of their external life. Yet in this very process they become open to
    • themselves from the Earth's immediate neighbourhood and come under
    • this winter season. The time will come when such things are
    • its own mineral masses; it comes under the influence of the
    • Earth have the greatest longing to become crystalline, and the deeper
    • we go into the Earth, the more they have this longing to become
    • time when that which is under the surface of the Earth becomes
    • plants?” The time will come when it is recognised, how very
    • humus-formation comes very largely to man's assistance in
    • transformation due? It is due to the fact that that which comes from
    • And even more so when you come to the coloured flower; therein
    • about to come. You may take my remark amiss or not, as you will. We
    • Nature. What has come down to us from ancient times — whatever
  • Title: Agriculture Course: Lecture 3
    Matching lines:
    • a specific form of agriculture which has come to be regarded as 'premium
    • again the very moment it comes into being.
    • fast, having become solidified, mingled with other ingredients.
    • always have physical carriers. Then the materialists come, and take
    • living enters into us we become faint. Even an ordinary hypertrophy
    • bearer of life — that is, of the ethereal. And it becomes the
    • our breathing it becomes alive again. Inside us it must be alive.
    • becomes living oxygen the moment it passes, from the atmosphere we
    • too it becomes living oxygen. Oxygen under the earth is not
    • come to an understanding on these matters which the physicists and
    • These two must come together. The oxygen must somehow find its way
    • oxygen — that is, the ethereal life. Then comes the internal
    • in the air. But the moment it comes into the Earth, it is alive
    • again. Just as the oxygen does, so too the nitrogen becomes alive;
    • nay more it becomes sentient and sensitive inside the Earth. Strange
    • only becomes alive but sensitive inside the Earth; and this is
    • of the greatest importance for agriculture. Nitrogen becomes the
    • Nitrogen is not unconscious of that which comes from the Stars and
    • process thus: In all these structures, the Spiritual has become
    • outward, till it becomes of such a nature that it can be received out
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Agriculture Course: Lecture 4
    Matching lines:
    • a specific form of agriculture which has come to be regarded as 'premium
    • Agriculture, and notably when we come to the question of manuring.
    • The very way the words are often put by scientists when they come to
    • is only in the body that it becomes condensed. The body receives
    • very difficult to come to terms at all with this science of to-day,
    • even in the most essential questions. Yet somehow we must come to terms
    • come from the theorising. You see how difficult it is to come to any
    • living substance, is always on the way to become plant-integument. It
    • only does not go far enough in the process to become such plant-integument
    • to become inwardly alive — akin to the plant-nature. Now the same
    • permeate the earth with the requisite degree of life. We must come to
    • aromatic scent! Then you become aware of the marvelous mutual aid prevailing
    • let decay, to that which comes from fallen leaves or the like, nay,
    • develop inner mobility; their body becomes inwardly quick and alive.
    • may easily come about that it will scatter its astral content on all
    • all that works organically in the nerves and senses. So it becomes a
    • the watery; but notably in the earthy element. It has the force to overcome
    • of its own inherent ethereal and astral forces. Then come the little
    • — the entire content of the horn becomes inwardly alive. For the
    • a comely size. But he does not pursue the investigation far enough beyond
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Agriculture Course: Lecture 5
    Matching lines:
    • a specific form of agriculture which has come to be regarded as 'premium
    • as I said in yesterday's discussion, must not come in in a turbulent
    • which rest on completely false premises — which are a mere outcome
    • through the manure may presently become inadequate — and this
    • the earth; we let it become permanently impoverished. We must then provide
    • as they need what comes to them from the Earth. They draw them in from
    • the help of all that comes from the world-circumference in this fine
    • footing, and as an outcome of her work I think we may take it as proved
    • to come together in the right way with other substances in the organic
    • of the plant organism which become rigid structure or framework in many
    • it from settling where it becomes a nuisance — it may become a
    • to the sunshine. When autumn comes, take it down again and bury it not
    • used, we shall make good again much that would otherwise become a ruthless
    • — silicic acid, lead, etc., which come to the earth in finest
    • if I become a little local in my references at this moment. But I would
    • becomes inwardly sensitive — truly sensitive and sentient, we
    • products” which you obtain thereby become mere stomach-filling
    • wood or forest. That is what happens, once it has thus become inwardly
    • the plants the forces which tend to come to them through the dandelion
  • Title: Agriculture Course: Lecture 6
    Matching lines:
    • a specific form of agriculture which has come to be regarded as 'premium
    • which, though they come from the Cosmos, are first received into the
    • hand. So it has come about: far and wide, the vine plantations
    • that come in from the Cosmos — from Venus, Mercury and Moon —
    • other hand there is all that which comes by another way — above
    • the level of the earth — all that which comes from the forces
    • course the Moon permeates them with its own forces. They come to the
    • a being grows, it becomes larger. In this process the very same force
    • that is not the only thing that comes to the Earth.
    • Moon's rays the whole reflected Cosmos comes on to the Earth. All influences
    • can thus become disinclined to receive the lunar influences. We can
    • I will employ 150. Now comes a clever fellow and declares, I do not
    • come to the animal pests. Let me choose one example — a characteristic
    • no good unless the neighbouring farmer also does so, for they only come
    • about it. For in the end the mice always come back again. What we need
    • Now that we are passing from plants to animals, we come to the “animal
    • soon come out again if the pepper has been so sprinkled that a few areas
    • from the air; whereas the roots absorb those forces which come into
    • into a region where it eventually comes near to the roots. Diagrammatically
    • surrounding sphere, to come right down into the Earth. Moreover,
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Agriculture Course: Lecture 7
    Matching lines:
    • a specific form of agriculture which has come to be regarded as 'premium
    • or digested by another, or when the dung of the animals comes on to
    • another — the one root winding round the other, until it all become
    • comes into being? It is as follows:
    • that the air and warmth may become mineral for the Bake of man and animal.
    • If you make the necessary effort, you can easily become esoteric in
    • become clair-sentient with respect to the sense of smell, especially
    • and the scent of trees. Then, in the former case you will become clair-sentient
    • You see, the farmer can easily become clair-sentient. Only in recent
    • The countryman, as I said, can become clair-sentient with regard to
    • life a little more, so that it becomes slightly more mineral. While,
    • the root in its turn will be influenced. The roots of the tree become
    • the other hand, what becomes poorer in ether, down below in the soil.
    • what I have now explained; here it becomes most evident. But the fast
    • is: What becomes very evident in the tree is present in a more delicate
    • tendency to become tree-like. In every plant, the root with its environment
    • to the rest of the root-world — that is, they become associated
    • it becomes too great. If the soil is tending to become too strongly
    • become wonderful regulators, safety-valves for the vitality
    • men have become so intellectual, so clever. When they were less intellectual,
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Agriculture Course: Lecture 8
    Matching lines:
    • a specific form of agriculture which has come to be regarded as 'premium
    • remember the outcome of our last lecture. The plant, as we saw, has
    • does so. Something that still comes from the sense-organism passes into
    • the rhythmic; likewise, something that comes from the metabolic organism.
    • in the middle of the creature the metabolism becomes rhythmic —
    • system also becomes more rhythmic, and the two melt into one another.
    • In other words, the rhythmic pars of the animal does not come into being
    • bones, etc. — comes not from the Earth at all. It is cosmic substantiality.
    • It comes from that which is absorbed out of the air and warmth above
    • we should give them the opportunity to come into relation with the surrounding
    • first becomes weak. It can no longer feed the body because it is unable
    • has the brain of the animal come into being? Take the whole organic
    • process into the noble matter of the brain, there to become the basis
    • complicated — they become individual, in fact.
    • now recognise it as that foodstuff which, if it comes into the human
    • pursue the matter further. Suppose you wish the animal to become strong
    • you wish to become strong in this region? The milk-giving creatures
    • backward, good and copious milk will be the outcome. For the good milk
    • the sexual System, has become as nearly as possible akin — in
    • the way to become sexual secretion is met by the head-forces working
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: The Significance of the Mass
    Matching lines:
    • following feeling: “Thou must again become like the
    • hast been astral and hast become physical. Thou must now
    • matter. He then comes forth, being able to accomplish
    • to them further: “Do not speak of this until I come
    • Paternoster. First comes the reference to the living God in
    • God, of the Logos Who had become Flesh in Christ; and then
  • Title: Lecture: The Universe
    Matching lines:
    • comes the sixth stage: Through
    • a very small measure, we cease to become human beings.
    • Although we are human beings, we become inwardly dust, so
    • become dust inwardly, we again fit ourselves into the
    • mineral world. We become, as it were, a body which has
    • development consisted essentially of this. Then comes our
    • nourishment and our not allowing it to become completely
    • He becomes a breeder of animals. This is the next stage.
    • Ten: A breeder of animals. Eleven: He becomes a farmer;
    • He becomes a trader. Later on you will see that I do not
    • the stars come into consideration insofar as they are
    • pouring out water: Aquarius. And he becomes a trader
    • possibility to become symmetrical. But in regard to the
    • with the human being himself, we come across the feet.
    • honest callings, and although they had already become more
    • etc., we would finally come to Pisces. There we would find
    • yet come down to the physical world. In the age of Pisces
    • particularly what comes to expression in his limbs and in
    • hidden itself into the head which has become a sphere,
    • to obtain metabolic man with his limbs, seeking to become a
  • Title: Lecture: The Templars
    Matching lines:
    • in history whereby the peoples of Europe sought in their own way to come
    • being. It becomes objective — it is not merely within his own soul, but
    • it comes about that an experience of the soul is not simply there for the
    • come to birth and are there. When a person performs his daily task with his
    • become acquainted — and this is the case with everyone who truly sees
    • into the spiritual world — they had become acquainted with all the
    • had become familiar. In many an hour that was for them a sacred hour of their
    • of the senses; for these worlds must first be overcome before Man can enter
    • and only to what they had experienced as something to be overcome, was
    • overcome stood before them, like a vision, whilst they lay stretched on the
    • overcome; they confessed it to be a custom within the Order. They confessed
    • the evolution of humanity. It had become a factor in history.
    • — he would never become free. Things are indeed so ordered in the
    • evolution of humanity in order that human beings may become not only good,
    • Hence it has come about that what we know as materialism has spread itself so
    • with the spiritual world have become so deep and intimate. For indeed, what
    • moving towards an ever richer life, and will have to become more and more
    • opportunity for something spiritual to come down to them. What a human being
    • what we receive in this way as our ether body, comes down to us from the wide
    • spaces of the cosmos, and it comes at certain times, from the far spaces of
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Paths to Knowledge of Higher Worlds
    Matching lines:
    • ordinary science must come to an end, but through its methods
    • science must come to a final point in regard to a knowledge of
    • person who wishes to become a spiritual investigator, in the
    • clearly surveyed, so that the processes become, as it were, quite
    • complete willpower. A person who wishes to become a spiritual
    • Then one comes to quite a new way of thinking. The old way of
    • come to the conclusion that ordinary thinking is a combining way of
    • spiritual experience and it is impossible to come to it with ordinary
    • which a spiritual-scientific investigator has to advance, must come
    • experiment for a long time, yet they will only come to quite abstract
    • The ordinary thoughts of life come and go, or we try to get rid of
    • and predispositions, we become able to suppress the whole tableau of
    • must become mobile and our thoughts must be inwardly connected with
    • know that we cannot immediately become familiar with this third kind
    • by the sense of gravitation, when another sense comes to our aid,
    • endure over the gulfs of time then we come to the point of ascending
    • Through the development of mere thinking we only come to a world of
    • part of him which desires to become acquainted with these worlds
    • which formed the nut, so the Anthroposophical realities which come to
    • becomes absorbed by the physical form. But this fact does not deprive
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Errors in Spiritual Investigation
    Matching lines:
    • only refuted but overcome, conquered. Only by knowing them in such a
    • qualities of the soul life in a higher stage come to be of even
    • damage in this striving is everything that overcomes man in ordinary
    • need for an immensely strong force to overcome the sense of self,
    • ordinary world with an abnormal soul life, his self-love becomes so
    • one come to be able at last to erase a spiritual world when it
    • this, then comes the all-important, serious moment in the life of the
    • will surely fall. This must in a certain way become an experience in
    • offered there, one comes step by step to a point at which one feels
    • One has already become so tranquil in one's soul, however, that
    • at a point at which it becomes necessary for the soul to recognize
    • not to be horrified by the horror, not to become anxious with the
    • being that otherwise never would come before our soul, is the
    • yet one need not come by this means to a real understanding of the
    • People who become subject to this leaning become, rather than
    • crassly), those who see ghosts (Gespensterschauer); they become
    • of himself. He has become free of himself, however, only by feeling
    • surrenders one's self, loses one's self, comes out of
    • comes to a definite knowledge only of one's own self in
    • occupy ourselves only with our own concepts, we become poorer and
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: The Supersensible Being of Man and the Evolution of Mankind
    Matching lines:
    • super-sensible, their knowledge has also come to them from spirit
    • organisation and the organisation that comes to expression in man's
    • the kind of seeing that active thinking opens up we come to realise
    • thoughts that come to meet them. But we keep a bit of this
    • unconsciously. But when it comes to the experiences of active,
    • never come in place of an absolutely dreamy experience if we could
    • activity or mental imagery is not something that comes from forces of
    • life, as materialists believe, but something that comes from the
    • overcome this phenomenon is to have other soul exercises going
    • not admit this, and he is supposed to change what comes in
    • self-discipline of the will I was speaking about: become actively
    • engaged in self-education and become at the same time independent of
    • ourselves but only when we are outwardly active and when we become
    • life which has to come out of our whole being, there then rays back
    • preparing the way for man's being to become conscious and inwardly
    • however, we have come to the time — in this epoch of human
    • an understanding of it will become the general possession of mankind.
    • next. This knowledge of repeated earth lives cannot become a
    • have tried to describe. If you become aware of what is living deep
    • humble attempt like this, yet is aware that it comes out of the
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: The Year as a Symbol of the Great Cosmic Year
    Matching lines:
    • independent entity as regards the Earth only comes clearly before us
    • materialism. A time will come, however, when man will not only make
    • have passed through since the founding of Christianity, we again come
    • develop within our hearts that inner warmth which comes, when in the
    • twelve thousand years) becomes a symbol of the great New Year's Eve
    • cycle, can only be understood aright when it becomes for us a symbol
  • Title: On the Duty of Clear, Sound Thinking
    Matching lines:
    • an authority which has come down to him through very many channels
    • an external impression comes, it responds to it in its own specific
    • least whether a matter is correct or not, quite other things come
    • that therefore, he cannot come into touch with anything real, with
    • images; but when the images come in touch with living
    • Everything comes to us from the outer world through the senses. But
    • of it, for we know only what comes to us through our chance-senses.
    • only exist in the domain of which I am speaking, where it comes very
    • thought has become quite unreliable. Therefore it becomes a
    • erudition. It has already become a question of force. Among those who
    • that they become Ahrimanic or Luciferic. Thus at the close of this
    • overcome all tendency to slackness, all love of sloth and laziness,
  • Title: Lecture: The Peoples of the Earth in the Light of Anthroposophy
    Matching lines:
    • that the metabolism becomes a kind of continuation of all that is
    • Thus when we enter into all that has come
    • East. The inner essence of the Earth becomes articulate, as it were,
    • sense-phenomena are the outcome. They are therefore less
    • When he forms a concrete ideal of how he can become higher
    • European, become merely an ‘interpreter’ of the being of
    • for only then will he become fully man. Full and complete manhood is
    • antipathy do not necessarily come into play. Tagore compares the
    • where they can become feelings and pass over into
    • herself have become part of the very being of the oriental —
    • feel the need at least to become complete man — are aware of a
  • Title: Lecture: The Christmas Mystery, Novalis, the Seer
    Matching lines:
    • forever overcome death, becomes visible.
    • Novalis recognises the God who in time to come will have as
    • whence man had come forth in the age of Lemuria. Our souls
    • Beings from whom man has come forth.
    • whence men had come forth, proclaimed a truth which they
    • have come forth. The spiritual and physical realities you see
    • come forth can be seen in its leaves. But we are able to
    • woven from physical substances. There will come a time when
    • you, to where the new seed comes to life, where there will
    • experience the One who was to come, who was still hidden from
    • would come when men were ready to receive Him into their
    • would come were presented by Zarathustra to his pupils. To
    • to give a general picture of what would come to pass in the
    • from the physical world. The God with whom man must become
    • whom he must become one.
    • were able to make the ancient Gods come down among them. And even
    • into the spiritual world, experiences that come to him in the
    • physical world contains. What has come forth from the
    • seed of a new plant, says to himself: True, it has come forth
    • the old. But this could come about only because humanity was
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: Some Characteristics of To-day
    Matching lines:
    • will come to see more and more, namely: that there was not so very
    • the face of world-events that have come upon them. A most serious
    • the course of his evolution had gradually come to be able to use only
    • the physical body. It had really come about that only the physical
    • himself from his greatest entanglement in what is material and come
    • subconscious and unconscious processes. The time has come when man
    • living to-day come from the fact that men must receive
    • the leading statesmen in 1914 had come to a point at which nothing
    • not want to come to new modes of conception. The anthroposophic view
    • be intensified and clarified, must become perception which he
    • “impulses” (or springs of action). If one comes to-day
    • necessary to overcome these old forms, re-modelling one's whole soul
    • early stages of what is trying to come to healthy expression in the
    • “astral bodies” have becomeempty. They are remarkably
    • Hence his “astral body” has gradually become empty. He
    • most unfavourable time for making decisions. For we have come to a
    • spiritual world. These do not come from the physical world at all.
    • sacred for the modern man. He should feel: I come from the spiritual
    • thinking and our whole feeling must become different, so that we
    • the spirit. Humanity's present misfortunes have come from its refusal
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: Anthroposophy's Contribution to the Most Urgent Needs of Our Time
    Matching lines:
    • theories of knowledge. Then we come with this natural scientific
    • ‘We may not come to a halt before human freedom.’ I have
    • we come to the point where we turn our gaze to the moral world, to
    • power of the human soul and spirit, then we must come to the
    • down to the depths out of which comes the instinctive life, the life
    • spiritual science enables man to come to terms with what I have shown
    • Imaginations which in fact do not come from ourselves, but from
    • through this we come gradually into the reality of the spiritual, the
    • oneself to all the mockery and objections that must come quite
    • through Inspiration we become aware of a World Being which plays into
    • become clear to us that man bears in himself a real force, which is
    • comes to the point of being able to recognise that everything which
    • destroyed. Man becomes inwardly creative, inwardly up-building. In
    • where the moral world itself becomes creative, where something arises
    • love, so that we can become men who act freely out of love springing
    • duty must sink down so that it becomes inclination, how inclination
    • must rise up so that the content of duty becomes congenial. Duty must
    • There, where this love has become spiritual, there it draws into
    • loves duty, because it is something that comes out of the
    • duty man can never be so spiritualized in his inmost being that he becomes
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: Buddha and Christ: The Sphere of the Bodhisattvas
    Matching lines:
    • actions, in the seventh epoch the natural outcome of such
    • the seeds of what will become part of mankind in future epochs are contained
    • gradually become able, from the twentieth century onwards, to
    • 14:26 And when the people were come into the wood, behold, the honey dropped; but no man put his hand to his mouth: for the people feared the oath. \
    • aestheticism and morality will come to expression in men's life of
    • condition will become more and more pronounced in the future
    • human being can become immoral? It is because in his successive
    • the more immoral it tends to become. This fact is confirmed by a very
    • Kamaloka a very significant experience comes to every
    • from the rank of Bodhisattva to that of Buddha, and to become a
    • become the successor of Buddha (Joshaphat is a phonetic variation of
    • will never come again in a physical body.
    • comes into ever closer connection with Karma, it will acquire the
    • Jesus of Nazareth for three years only and does not come again in a
    • physical body; in the fifth post-Atlantean epoch He comes in an
    • Bodhisattva — who would eventually become a Buddha
    • come from the lips of the Maitreya Buddha.
    • Buddha will contain a magic power that will become moral
    • Individuality appeared and was to become a Teacher of humanity, signs
    • change in the personality becomes apparent at a certain point in his
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: Nervous Conditions in Our Time
    Matching lines:
    • ways: most easily in this way, that the person becomes what we might
    • who come into high and responsible positions have studied in the way
    • becomes more and more enfeebled under such pursuits, precisely
    • so is to strengthen the ethereal body; thereby we become healthier
    • not come to that inner quiet which is needful for such exercises. In
    • over the ethereal body. You thus become able, if need be, to
    • to do them in one way. One need not become a fanatical upholder of
    • is strong overcome something that is weak. And that is important, for
    • life in such a way that illnesses will become less and less
    • oppressive; and they will become less oppressive if by such
  • Title: Lecture: The Position of Anthroposophy among the Sciences
    Matching lines:
    • does not of itself come into conflict with current science. It
    • experience. He cannot ask how he comes to have space; he must simply
    • that would be necessary if we were to come to a clear understanding
    • We now come
    • what has come from us in this way. When we judge the distance, or the
    • of space; simply by making from it a kind of abstraction, now becomes
    • man move forwards, subjectivity does not come into consideration.
    • to sense perceptions, however, science has become really confused. In
    • such “imaginative perception”. In this we come to
    • as, in a sense, we come to perceive space (which has, at first, no
    • mathematics in the right frame of mind, we come to see precisely in
    • independent of ourselves. For example, in recent times we have come
    • must turn back at a certain point, and the fourth dimension becomes
    • become abstract; that one simply continues along the line of thought
    • space becomes filled with spirit, whereas three-dimensional space is
    • to describe, come thereby to a comprehensive survey of the spiritual
    • me for the first time, he asked: “How did you first become
  • Title: Lecture: Anthroposophy and the Visual Arts
    Matching lines:
    • nothing to do with what is usually expressed when people come and
    • people who come to Dornach to-day and maintain that something
    • not expressing what has come to birth with this building. Our aim is
    • course, if such intentions press on one's heart and soul, one becomes
    • intended only as an introduction to what will be able to come before
    • come in its place. And from this, again, there must be achieved
    • One comes to
    • beauty by means of plastic art, we must become aware that the beauty
    • soul-forces. One becomes a sculptor — really a sculptor —
    • sculptors were yet creative. One does not become a sculptor by
    • fledged artists; one becomes a sculptor by reaching back, with full
    • environment, of the equatorial stream. Hence, when I come to do the
    • comes to expression there in the plastic form.
    • come to the rest of the human body, I can make no progress if I form and
    • when I come to form the chest, I must place myself inside the man and
    • at work on the head, one comes through the inner necessity of artistic
    • “imaginations” again. And if we become productive, it
    • opposition also. What comes from the human being is active there and
    • “within”, we become able to create forms freely. We can
    • that, when we come to study the etheric body — the “imaginative
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: Evil and the Power of Thought
    Matching lines:
    • towards life becomes when he admits into his inner experience this
    • quiet formal, conventional way. He would come on in his rather
    • less and less idea of it just because it comes to seem natural. They
    • radiates into our inner being something which on the one hand becomes
    • decline can be transformed into forces of ascent only if he becomes
    • prevails, when we become aware once more of this human centre of
    • West was overcome only by disclosing to them the whole weight of the
    • man's inner being. “Know thyself” has become a rightful
    • men become materialists — why would they admit only the
    • have come into decadence now — you and these men of Asia will
    • have come into existence if the life of ideas did not arise from a
    • be found even among people who have come from the same milieu. But
    • All this comes
    • gradually spread throughout the West and will become a world culture.
    • men become aware that all economic activities and relations
  • Title: Lecture: The Seeds of Future Worlds
    Matching lines:
    • out inner exercises of the soul, we come, as I have often suggested,
    • carried outside, it becomes evil and wrong. If it is kept within, it
    • consciousness, however, we do come through it. Then men of ancient
    • these worlds. He must do so, if Christianity is again to become a
    • cannot possibly come to an idea of Christ as long as he makes use
    • century. In the 19th and 20th centuries he has become incapable
    • comes to the point when he could say: “The world is permeated
    • world that is given for ordinary consciousness; we come forth into it
    • conception. Thus we come to the point of thinking in a living and
    • external nature, we only built up abstract laws. We come, in other
    • consciousness we can come to the Father God, but no further. It is
    • there to speak of God the Son. That men can come forward with the
    • world, man comes to the Father God. From tradition, he has God the Son.
    • becomes a philosophy and speaks with full justification of a
    • Father God and the Christ, the two ideas become confused and
    • can come to the twofold experience, the experience of the Father and
    • them to find their way into ordinary consciousness; they must become
    • modern science will have to become permeated with conceptions
    • within us. A man is not changed by knowledge: he merely comes to know
    • to become conscious of how into this evil, where matter is destroyed and
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: Exoteric and Esoteric Christianity
    Matching lines:
    • such men knew quite consciously that their souls had come down
    • becomes of the soul when the human being passes though
    • were to become an essential part of human evolution. Intellect,
    • become the Ruler of death and therewith also of the intellect,
    • disciples Christ taught that He had come from a world wherein
    • Gods indeed allowed Ahriman to become part of earthly evolution
    • said that Theology has become ‘unchristian,’
    • which, if he makes it his own, he can overcome the forces of
    • was overcome.
    • has come down from those worlds of which the ancient wisdom tells.
    • Resurrection, is telling us how the Gods have come to experience
    • went on. A teacher had men one who had come into personal contact
    • so firmly by Paul before his vision at Damascus would have become
    • could become error among men, that truth had been turned by men
    • Christ on the Cross. Divine truth must therefore have become
    • error which, in its most extreme form, becomes the error
    • He Who passed through death, having come from the realm of the
  • Title: Lecture: Realism and Nominalism
    Matching lines:
    • should become a lamb if it keeps on eating lamb's flesh.
    • civilization — signifies that humanity has become completely
    • and Comenius currents in German protestantism: — to consider
    • the Christ becomes an independent being in the fulfillment of the
    • man. I become acquainted with the older and with the younger, each
    • reality quite materialistic ideas! Now comes the astral body, again
    • Things become very
  • Title: Lecture: Spiritual Science, a Necessity for the Present Time
    Matching lines:
    • increase the soul's life of feeling, so that we become emancipated
    • St. Paul's words, “Not I, but Christ in me”, will become
    • becomes united with the cosmos: In ancient times, when people forgot
    • become more intensive. It calls for an understanding of spiritually
    • seven. One evening he did not come home. There was a lecture that
    • with insight into such things will frequently come across such
    • so-called dead; it is essential that mankind should become more and
    • a fine country, but no order. Come and make order for tip, Arrange a
    • (disorder will increase), come and make order. — Central Europe
    • things which must be reached, for in future they will say: Come to us
    • things to come, and it is now unfolding forces which are opposed to,
    • heavy feelings. I have shown you what spiritual science may become if
  • Title: Lecture: Fundamentals of the Science of Initiation
    Matching lines:
    • standpoint, in order to come to a knowledge of this bridge. You
    • that which was to become law. It was so that for centuries ahead that
    • which would later on become law was foretold prophetically.
    • developing more and more, it will again come to the point of
    • is necessary to become acquainted with several things which appear
    • become acquainted with the natural science of to-day (I shall now
    • studies all this he may become a materialist, as far as his world
    • conception based on knowledge is concerned. Indeed, he will become a
    • quickly arrive at an opinion, they become materialists if they
    • way in which others have come to their knowledge. The greatness of
    • to watch the way in which our soul comes to these results.
    • he will certainly not become a materialist, but will undoubtedly
    • natural-scientific sphere, men become materialists only because
    • knowledge, will at least become idealists, and probably
    • to hear again and again how man's soul becomes mystical, if we
    • Those who observe natural science, natural research, become
    • part frankly honest and their errors will be overcome. They will only
    • may indeed send his son to the university, if he is to become a
    • you concentrate deeply, if your soul becomes quite mystical, you
  • Title: Lecture: Cosmogony, Freedom, Altruism
    Matching lines:
    • have any real impulse for it. And so it comes that our
    • are seen in the way people have come to regard all events
    • which has come in with the more modern forms of religious
    • not God, why does not Christ, come to the help of this or
    • strength which comes from the impulse of Freedom and
    • view of life. Only when a man comes to recognise himself
    • them. If they become merely an incentive to egoism, then they
    • karma become unethical — anti-ethical — ideas.
    • knowledge — then all knowledge ultimately becomes a
    • become in our age, insofar as it is not merely a utilitarian
    • Freedom has now become in many respects an empty phrase,
    • affairs on our earth impartially, we shall come to the
    • become permeated through and through with the way of thought
    • instance, among the Europeans. They were trying to become
    • come to see, that one element is to be found among one
    • unless people all over the earth come together and set to
    • in every part of it; they have become in their very essence a
    • this of course comes out, has and does come out, in a curious
    • come when one must speak out honestly and straightforwardly.
    • humanity. We must become men of all the worlds, and act from
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: Brunetto Latini
    Matching lines:
    • Divine Comedy
    • Divine Comedy
    • as well. He becomes a University professor; so he has some
    • world, often goes hand-in-hand with what becomes the
    • did not come to himself again in that consciousness which
    • experience the four temperaments. There it becomes clear to
    • have gone through the temperaments, we come to what may be
    • descent into yourself you come into the region of your eyes
    • only, when you have gone through this region, you come into
    • the eye comes into the four elements. But he can likewise
    • eye, through the ear — and comes into the region of the
    • and on, he comes into the region of the seven Planets. He is
    • comes to himself again, but this awakening leads him not into
    • instruction, how he shall come to Philosophy and to
    • super-sensible. Then you can come back again to philosophy,
    • times, when the Initiates tried in another way to come near
    • To come
    • greatest. Then it is that illumination comes over the soul
    • and arid has become what is commonly known as the spiritual
    • And among other things, all the artistic life must come near
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: The Shaping of the Human Form out of Cosmic and Earthly Forces
    Matching lines:
    • is an outcome of the Saturn, Sun and Moon evolutions; whereas
    • study the human head in relation to that. We then come to
    • becomes different according to whether it comes from a
    • embryo destined to become the face, the human being will have
    • is given essentially by the Moon and its activity. This comes
    • and these come from the Earth itself: they do not work on the
    • this process, continued inwardly, becomes metabolism. But
    • move your legs in walking you have always to overcome the
    • man of head is connected with the past and is able to come
    • all this can the head come into being as a higher
    • influence of the Earth, cannot come to completion; he can do
    • comes from the Earth and works in us as muscular force is
    • arise? It comes from the interplay between straight line and
    • strength of the Earth by way of heart and soul becomes moral
    • Moon have by then become spiritual, and must be developed
    • can become head. We may therefore say : A man dies so that in
    • the spiritual world he can become able to bring to expression
    • future. This cannot be completed; he has to die and become
    • without any desire to come to a definite inner decision. They
    • who take it in the right way it becomes as clearly evident as
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: Yuletide and the Christmas Festival
    Matching lines:
    • constantly perceive how the Eternal reveals itself, comes to
    • become for many of those who want to be regarded in the great
    • become a festival of presents, a festival in which little
    • become aware at certain times of the connection with the
    • become inwardly quiescent during the time of approaching
    • withdraws into his own inner world in order to become aware
    • from it, has become more and more closely interwoven with
    • the Christ Impulse, man can overcome the forces that led him
    • has become sinful is rooted in another Ego, a guiltless Ego.
    • death, we come to the moment in our early years when
    • this ideal can be felt by warm human hearts: ‘Become
    • what your Ego is before there is any concept of it! Become
    • had become little more than objects of study for learned
    • itself, in the way it is presented, has become utterly
    • could become for us a living experience. True, in a certain
    • can become aware of the breath of enchantment which filled
    • we cultivate in our anthroposophical centres become in the
    • Being we call Christ Jesus, the new spirit may come to life.
  • Title: Lecture: Buddha
    Matching lines:
    • that man's sojourn on earth may become fruitful if earthly lives are
    • concerned, he had come forth from the spiritual world into which he
    • spiritual world whence he had come forth; he tried to disregard all
    • was enacted in the soul of the last Bodhisattva who was to become
    • that he who was to become Buddha passed through all these experiences
    • therefore he must overcome the world, but the Christian feels
    • to enter into blessedness. Rather must he overcome the forces which
    • to overcome sorrow, sickness and death by my own efforts.” The
    • must be overcome. He must leave this world!” But the Christian
    • world can be overcome by what Christ fulfils in me.”
    • in a temple. Now I know that this body in which I have become Buddha,
    • repeated earthly lives, comes to cry in truth, “Not I, but
    • are really unconscious Buddhists — come into contact with
    • when earthly existence has been conquered and I have overcome all
    • earth has become a corpse — we too can say with Goethe: We
  • Title: Lecture: Hygiene - a Social Problem
    Matching lines:
    • has become abstract, so seldom grasping the social feelings and
    • observation becomes most clearly evident when we turn to a special
    • nineteenth century has been overcome, but this statement does not
    • overcome by a few people here and there. These people realise that
    • people here or there have come to this conclusion does not mean that
    • materialism has been overcome, for it is equally true that when it is
    • essence of the materialism that has gradually come to be the
    • overcome, is to-day in its prime? The essence of this materialism is
    • existence between birth and death is but the outcome of the soul and
    • will come across many mystics and theosophists who love to
    • possible to overcome elements which, on account of the materialistic
    • when he becomes a specialist in the ordinary sense. For the range of
    • become brain or nerve specialists, we should then still be able, in
    • And such insight becomes in
    • those who actually become doctors, have this attitude towards social
    • a healthy organism, have come into contact with defective
    • time before the moment when the defect becomes organically
    • may come to expression in later life in the form of some familiar
    • when we really enter Spiritual Science, when it becomes concrete in
    • of man as the outcome of Spiritual Science — penetrate into the
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: Speech and Song
    Matching lines:
    • civilisation. By speech, human beings come together here on
    • back into pre-historic ages, the more does speech become recitative
    • speech in its present condition, where it has become very far
    • permeated by another activity, namely that which comes about through
    • thinking system which takes hold of speech when speech becomes
    • place of it, a new thing comes forth in the spiritual
    • perception which comes to us in Inspiration. And this new thing
    • for you yourself no longer sing. The World itself becomes cosmic
    • soul strikes into it, and lives in it, so that the sound becomes the
    • sound again in the spiritual world, though shorn of that which comes
    • there it becomes filled with soul. Instead of being shaped and
    • musical element reveals ever more and more as it becomes filled with
    • farther from the earth, he gradually comes to see the planets as well
    • And indeed, all Art comes before man in this sense. It is as though,
    • has come forth.”
    • becomes in him the plastic sculpture of the human frame, and the Soul
  • Title: Lecture: Three Epochs in the Religious Education of Man
    Matching lines:
    • the body that comes into the world through physical birth —
    • from a pre-earthly existence I have come forth. To the stars to the
    • this riddle he asked himself: “What becomes of me after death?
    • human body. The Christ has now become an “extract” of the
    • communion with Christ Himself. Christ, the Divine Being, becomes your
  • Title: Lecture: Concerning Electricity
    Matching lines:
    • to become sensory reality in the same way in which a plant's seed
    • becomes sensory reality, we would almost be looked upon as fools. And
    • if someone were to come along today and ascribe moral impulses to the
    • the moral element comes to the surface, so that the electricity
    • IMMORAL; they are instincts of evil, which must be overcome by the
    • ideas, but in accordance with reality, we would come across the fact
    • of Nature, so that, later on, they take on real shape, become a real
    • extent the modern contemplation of Nature has unawares become a
  • Title: Lecture: The Problem of Jesus and Christ in Earlier Times
    Matching lines:
    • had gradually degenerated, so that, when the Christ did come, people
    • of Alexandria, where those who wished to become Christian teachers
    • preparation — humankind first needed to become acquainted with
    • personal experience, come to feel they had found the Christ. This was
    • human” come to be? Origenes, accordingly, constructed a view
    • Here we come to a very
    • comes the second current, or stream. Whereas the first stream is
    • recognize that it comes from outside the world, as the messenger.
    • allowed to become popular; it was kept entirely in the hands of the
    • become for many theologians. Among the most advanced theologians,
    • teachings of Euken and Harnack come along. Isn't it true that
    • Then we come to the
    • the resurrection comes from there. We are expected to hold to this,
    • “Jesulogians.” At the same time, they come to yet another
    • the Christ. Christ has become an unreal god, and Jesus an unreal man.
    • children, could actually become the one who assumed the position at
    • of what the ether body had become as a result of thinking, feeling,
    • that our ether body has become during earthly life — has become
    • more dry, more “woody,” than it would have become had the
    • point were one becomes a child, because if we look with the right
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: On the Dimensions of Space
    Matching lines:
    • given to him through the senses. It comes out to meet him, as it
    • come to speak of the soul-and-spirit. True, if he is open-minded
    • extended in space. Yet inasmuch as they become an experience in soul
    • have gradually come to this pass; our purely intellectualistic thinking
    • exertion of the will. It comes out more strongly when you try to
    • hands or the crossing of the lines of vision we can thus become aware
    • sensation would never come about. In all the surging waves of feeling
    • does Feeling come about. Feeling never comes about in space, but only
    • and you become the plane in the middle. And when you are the central
    • can really have it, and then we gradually come near the truth that
    • out the third dimension and come down to the two dimensions, we only
    • more away from space. Then, when we go on to Thinking, we come away
    • become strange painters — for we must paint on to a line
    • Will. It has the constant tendency to become pressed together;
    • thereby it becomes a being of Feeling. First we see a cloud of light.
    • become a line. We must conceive this constant process — cloud,
    • Imagine the plane that becomes a line and then a plane again and then
    • in two successive moments. We must become alive and mobile-not by
    • dimensions. They come to a fourth dimension. They pass from the
    • pass in reality from the third to the fourth dimension, we come into
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: What Has Geology to Say About the Origin of the World?
    Matching lines:
    • science if in all earnestness and truthfulness it were obliged to come
    • come into existence and the changes it has undergone in the course of
    • lower parts of the earth's crust, we come to strata which are the
    • by this natural process have become thus entombed, and then, more or
    • come to the conclusion that a certain relationship must be presumed
    • sets of layers having become intermingled, overlaid, upturned,
    • plant-life, and that in the deeper layers we come to fossil remains
    • plant-kingdoms. We then come, as it were, to the lowest layers of the
    • earth's crust, overlaid again and again by others; we come to the
    • other layers had not yet come into existence, we shall have to assume
    • evidence of more highly-developed animal species, until we come
    • surface, form mountains, and thus become visible. The tenets of
    • become attuned to higher contemplations of nature; and as the human
    • loveliness, I say, overcomes the man who wants to open his soul only
    • now become extinct and of whose existence as inhabitants of the earth
    • from our human point of view we call perfect today, we come to ever
    • with clairvoyant vision, we do indeed come to a tellurian epoch in
    • research comes to the period connected by geology with granite, which
    • planetary body, becomes something totally different; as we go further
    • through the air. And then we come to a
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: Thinking and Willing as Two Poles of the Human Soul-Life
    Matching lines:
    • that which is to come, by what lies in the future. Feeling stands mid-way
    • these movements so that they become imbued with meaning. Thus there
    • become aware of these will forces when we pass through death and enter
    • become sheer automata if they do not accustom themselves to
    • that which becomes visible to us in the present. Imagine a meadow
    • then someone had come along and wanted to erase five of these marks,
    • outcome of what is past. And everything that we can grasp by an
    • pictures. But now he comes and introduces law and order into these
    • comes about that we draw forth from our inner being in the form of
    • owing to the fact that it has become part of us ourselves. This
    • immediately become clear to you if you consider without
    • of the present comes to meet us clothed in
    • doing we become aware of the past as it exists in the things present.
    • deeply into such pictures, then one's thinking itself becomes
    • I have just said becomes fraught with special significance when we
    • that Imagination comes to us of itself in so far as the present is
    • development of a higher knowledge to become possible.
    • have become very strong, and there is a danger that they will
    • European humanity, the humanity of present-day civilisation, has become
  • Title: Evolution/Aspect: Lecture 1: Introductory Lecture
    Matching lines:
    • of own section but also many friends of our movement, who come to the
    • who has become Buddha, no longer descends into physical life, can
    • nominated a successor to become Bodhisattva. This next Bodhisattva
    • yet to come, he will descend again and again to the earth, but will
    • to give a logical reason for his opinion. And then comes the question
    • into we may perhaps come upon a very awkward situation, and be
  • Title: Evolution/Aspect: Lecture 2: The Inner Aspects of the Saturn-embodiment of the Earth
    Matching lines:
    • psychology of the 19th century the following expression has come into
    • nourishment we should come at last to an expression of the cosmos, to
    • a vision to which we have to become accustomed. — And above all
    • and at the same time he must be able to overcome this fear by inner
    • Day-Book. It had become clear to Karl Rosenkrantz that this
    • every thought that may come to him, in a sort of condition of dimness
    • than come to the condition of dread, which often is like a giddiness
    • not to be overcome.
    • light, it is quite devoid of sound, but we become acquainted with
    • sea of courage becomes a true objective reality for us.
    • be pictured in thought, becomes through clairvoyance, objective
    • courage. We become acquainted with beings who consist of courage, but
    • is not a sea in which one would come to any surface, but on all sides
    • shall describe how we do not at once come to this: for the present I
    • as far as this we become aware of a remarkable alteration in the
    • Whom we call the Spirits of Will, come the Beings of other
    • only notice that there are other Beings here at play when we become
    • the thought comes: ‘he is really wise, he must have had endless
    • actively radiant. In short, you then become clairvoyantly aware how
    • comes that there is some connection between these Spirits of Will and
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Evolution/Aspect: Lecture 3: The Inner Aspect of the Sun-embodiment of the Earth
    Matching lines:
    • Spirits of Personality, whom we have therefore come to recognise as
    • offer it in sacrifice on the altar of the universe; if this becomes a
    • we have with this spirit that which can come nearer to us for our
    • must be completely free of all self-seeking and must wait what comes
    • have my own opinion. But what he ought to say is: This only comes
    • or illumination, so that we can never expect anything to come to us
    • knowledge reveal itself? How is that which comes to us revealed when
    • feeling of being endowed with grace through the gifts that come to
    • can only make use of the expression: it is that which comes to meet
    • of Wisdom who on the Sun were added to the beings with whom we become
    • but if he were to come nearer he might perhaps see, instead of the
    • may come back into it. What you formed yesterday is received by you
    • the other occurrence in that it occurred later. The giving comes from
    • have to think of what comes from the Spirits of Wisdom as proceeding
    • born! Space comes into existence through the bestowing virtue of the
    • we remember that this word comes across to us from primeval
    • sense again come to life on earth. Just imagine all that has been
    • Who comes forth from the Sacrifice and Who bestows through the
    • a spirit were to come down to the Earth from Mars, while he would not
    • might be told concerning the meaning of the Earth would become clear
  • Title: Evolution/Aspect: Lecture 4: The Inner Aspect of the Moon-embodiment of the Earth (Part 1)
    Matching lines:
    • while a less important act comes from a weaker impulse. And in
    • there the opposite comes to pass. There it is the case that the
    • this life, the more forceful shall we become as regards the activity
    • sacrifices, there comes into being in the ancient Sun something that
    • during the evolution of ancient Sun we come to a severance between
    • have come to them from the virtue of bestowal and all its diffused
    • or air. Resignation as it has now become appears in external Maya as
    • raised. From resignation comes forth water; water is in literal truth
    • which has actually come about through their having done so. Is this
    • possession of it, become independent of the Cherubim, self-reliant
    • become active within it. These beings are ‘they who remained
    • that substance. To make it possible for beings to become thus
    • order that beings of this nature might come into existence, the
    • they become our opponents!’
    • sacrifice and of the bestowing virtue we have come a step further,
    • intuitive visions such as those described, may come to us. On one
    • at a certain stage of evolution, we have just become acquainted,
    • by His Apostles, He who on the earth overcomes death and thus proves
    • Subconscious art has become a thing of the past. The art which
    • the picture becomes, how something like the liquefying of the dammed
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Evolution/Aspect: Lecture 5: The Inner Aspect of the Moon-embodiment of the Earth (Part 2)
    Matching lines:
    • mood is different in degree. We only really become acquainted with
    • even to giving oneself, so to speak. When we come on to the more
    • have no recollection of it, yet it works! It becomes active beneath
    • few grumblings and tears now becomes the suicide of a schoolboy! Thus
    • was what is called ego-nature which comes out in every form? It is
    • torment of it, how it drives a man into a state of mind which becomes
    • The torment of longing can often be overcome by changing the
    • overcome one-sidedness of longing by means of variety, by change and
    • it becomes what is known to man hardly yet as ‘thoughts’
    • grasp what it is that has come into our nature here on the Earth, we
    • this is what must come if the endless flow of pictures is to be
    • earth, in which as we know redemption comes to us through the Mystery
    • life people have become acquainted with all that can satisfy the
    • and had come to long for it, to have a persistent longing for it,
    • intuition than thoughts can grasp or words describe. Come, let us do
    • could only come through the Spirits of Motion, and the urge towards
    • its ultimate satisfaction, only to come on the planet of
    • foundation of things. We see, too, that our era had to come to
  • Title: Evolution/Aspect: Lecture 6: The Inner Aspect of the Earth-embodiment of the Earth
    Matching lines:
    • renunciation, in fact, to those virtues with which we can only become
    • knowledge, must come from Wonder. This is really the case. Any man
    • particular learning, will come to know that a sound way to learning
    • been told should find an echo in himself. He wishes it to become its
    • evolution; to that which comes into existence through the
    • in their proper place. Even when death comes to a man in a concrete
    • We have now come to a
    • sense. Suppose ice forms in a pond; the water then becomes solid. The
    • which during the earth-existence he must become real. In reality
    • physical plane, comes only to those beings who have to acquire
    • physical plane. Thus if anyone comes to have an understanding of
  • Title: Fall/Darkness: Lecture 1: The Driving Force Behind Europe's War
    Matching lines:
    • of our intentions and of the will to come closer and closer
    • which have come to expression in this very building.
    • were drawn out and had become elastic, as if the things we
    • a time may well come, sooner than we may expect, when people
    • understanding of an event that appears to have come in with
    • have to reflect for a long time to come on the events in
    • inclined to think. Something has come to the surface which
    • the West are ill-equipped to understand what wants to come to
    • such order comes; you may think it will be a long time before
    • come until human hearts understand the realm of the spirit.
    • Order can only come when it is understood how this chaos has
    • right. But let this justifiable pessimism become a challenge
    • their histories. Inevitably a time will come when most of
    • speak of the origins of this catastrophe in time to come, we
    • may well laugh at people who say this, but the day will come
    • event has come. And people fail to realize that something is
    • have come to mind.
    • which it comes.
    • an opinion. In fact, it hardly ever comes to their minds that
    • matter where peace comes from, even if it is from the Pope.
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Fall/Darkness: Lecture 2: Humanity's Struggle for Morality
    Matching lines:
    • soul and spirit which comes after death. In practice this
    • place. Sometimes, however, some of this comes through at an
    • an amoral character and has in many respects become downright
    • come in during Earth evolution; it is young and belongs to an
    • everything has merged into one and become mixed up in their
    • are asleep we look down on a body that has become mercurial
    • and salty. The fact that the body becomes mercurial has
    • it becomes salty — well, I think it is not at all
    • night now come together. As they interact, opportunity is
    • become moral. Human beings acquire morality by living here on
    • humanity must inevitably lag behind when it comes to moral
    • to see to it that our social life becomes truly moral.
    • merely look at it the way in which it normally comes to
    • evolution will not progress unless these truths become part
    • become automatons which they could influence like automatic
    • conclusions. Instead, those who come later must let this give
    • come off. I discussed this in the first part of my essay on
    • and the social life, for only there do they come together. It
    • become so much more destructive. By the standards of those
    • we really come to know life.
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Fall/Darkness: Lecture 3: The Search for a Perfect World
    Matching lines:
    • extent that these illusions become powers that rule the
    • illusions come in all shades of meaning; they are coloured by
    • that it becomes a paradise; otherwise the whole world would
    • come when a certain basic characteristic of the present time
    • come when people say: At the beginning of the twentieth
    • must inevitably come up are repulsive to many people today;
    • Furthermore, I come from a border region between Germans and
    • though my family certainly do not come from there — and
    • apparently the fact that I come from there indicates that I
    • the greatest difficulties one can imagine. For when it comes
    • evening that the sun had just come up, nature would soon
    • understanding of the world of the spirit. It must not become
    • to take an extreme case — someone comes to an
    • body. People certainly do come to lectures of this kind,
    • voluptuous pleasure which comes when the ether body and the
    • good at all when it comes to revealing the truths relating to
    • Anthroposophical Society does — anyone who comes to
    • come as a surprise that people who really should not be
    • members but nevertheless do come and hear such things, find
    • nature come to the fore. The potential dangers must be
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Fall/Darkness: Lecture 4: The Elemental Spirits of Birth and Death
    Matching lines:
    • has come for humanity to know certain truths concerning the
    • death and do so in full consciousness, they come to know
    • fly. All this has come to realization in a relatively short
    • led to the aeroplane. Consider everything which has come into
    • work of the gods had to become the work of human beings. This
    • will again become work to be done by humanity. We are only in
    • what will have to come to all human minds. It will
    • of reality when it comes to people having virtues.
    • perfection becomes a weakness. Benevolence will after a time
    • become prejudicial behaviour. And however good the right may
    • Perfection becomes weakness, benevolence uncritical
    • to become used to the idea that progress in civilization will
    • have to live with the fact that a destructive element becomes
    • onwards, this element has to come in again, so that
    • somehow comes even close to anthroposophy. Her latest work, on
    • She does not consider it so necessary for people to come to
    • time. Her thinking is: People will come to know God again
    • something which comes to human beings directly from the world
    • They did not actually become such beasts, but even so, the
  • Title: Fall/Darkness: Lecture 5: Changes in Humanity's Spiritual Make-up
    Matching lines:
    • himself entirely on scientific facts, Suess comes to the
    • know to have come from quite different impulses than the art
    • will no longer become part of the outer physical body to the
    • come from their unconscious physical aspect but out of deeper
    • will be replaced by something which comes from insight into
    • become substantial. And human nature has become more inward.
    • beings of the present time really and truly have become more
    • their own inner being. They do not become aware of their
    • our inner strength to become aware of the essential element
    • — if the relationships that can only come into their
    • it only has come to have meaning in more recent times and it
    • their own destinies. No impulses come to them from
    • connection with the physical has become less close. This,
    • seriously come to realize that during the final epochs of
    • when it comes to taking an inward look at the human being.
    • heads, for it has become inward. If there are thinkers
    • different orders and realms than those which come to
    • still be active in dried-up brains but which no longer come
    • elements had come together. Such a book has in fact been
    • only have come from this individual because he was suffering
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Fall/Darkness: Lecture 6: The New Spirituality
    Matching lines:
    • not reflect on where these ideas come from. The life of
    • life. It is our thoughts. But when it comes to the world of
    • come down through Saturn, Sun and Moon evolution. Humans
    • come into effect which has come down as Moon existence
    • evolution. The outcome was that this whole, more elemental,
    • body condensed to become the rest of the human body, which of
    • head, which is their own, having come from earlier evolution,
    • if their bodies had not become sensuous flesh. It is entirely
    • manifestation of the Elohim has condensed to become
    • the human being has become the image of the gods in the very
    • become their lower nature. Please, do not forget that this is
    • elemental world come to us — they are living thoughts,
    • not abstract, dead ones that come from the head — they
    • eyes or ears, but inspiration comes from the world of the
    • hierarchies and it comes through the whole essential human
    • come up through the whole human being. In earlier times, in
    • it has become much more intimate. Human beings are always
    • association has become possible because in some ways the
    • spirit comes to conscious awareness, it shows itself to be a
    • have come true,
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Fall/Darkness: Lecture 7: Working from Spiritual Reality
    Matching lines:
    • experiment will frequently come to mind for anyone who has a
    • child might as well come and run off swinging all this
    • a number of people when it comes to the historical writings
    • also Greek history, which is written today comes under this
    • what was to come in the fifth post-Atlantean age lived in
    • his insistence that no good would come of being connected
    • become for him? — It became a process which occurs
    • thousands of modern theologians or historians may now come
    • truths have to become known which are not welcome truths. Yet
    • have to become known.
    • not as light as air, this knowledge has not come from looking
    • come to the conclusion: If it looks the way such things
    • enter into human beings or they will become unsure. The
    • seriously come into consideration in this respect.
    • the world must come to see the true nature of the spirit in
    • will be nothing, they will be null and void, unless they come
    • However, once awareness has come, it must not be used in the
    • clairvoyance has become something different today, it is
    • people through the embers in those days has now become more
    • through fire have been transformed and become more
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Fall/Darkness: Lecture 8: Abstraction and Reality
    Matching lines:
    • time we must come to realize the distinction between abstract
    • We now come to
    • or four centuries, and the fact that as such it has become
    • is different, however, when it comes to social and political
    • the social structure. We do not come up against a reality
    • contradictions. Reality itself comes to realization in
    • which comes a little later. It is always the situation that
    • they come to this kind of conclusion. In the realm of dead
    • without reality. We have to come to the true nature of things
    • again, and this is only possible if we come to the spirit. We
    • again become creative and do so out of the spirit. This goes
    • comes from our friends and not only our enemies, so that no
    • which come to mind and really are obvious do have the
    • and it makes a good regulative principle. You will come to
    • come to be a coherent political whole from then onwards.
    • whereas reality comes to quite different conclusions; it lets
    • minds are liable to come up with.
    • the reality of these terrible events and still have not come
    • did come across for a long time, even at the time when war
    • reality become untrue. We must therefore break with the
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Fall/Darkness: Lecture 9: The Battle between Michael and 'The Dragon'
    Matching lines:
    • truths of spiritual development come to mind whenever you
    • an influence for a long time to come — must be sought
    • processes in that world which have come to outer expression
    • dragon. This image has come up again and again in the course
    • something into world evolution, but they are always overcome.
    • property, now they were transplanted to become personal
    • earth at a time when the dragon had been overcome. In the
    • diseases come from a similar source as the materialism which
    • with the fallen Ahriman. They gradually come to love the
    • overcome. The people who do not turn away from the ahrimanic,
    • be in league with everything which has come about through
    • evolution but with material progress. And a time would come
    • and others reckon. Before the time comes when you can simply
    • doubt. But in fact the time will never come, just as it will
    • will come when we must have transformed our materialistic
    • longer be sought. But the individuals who have become so tied
    • Then a time will come when those who cling to the
    • statistical analysis of how many poems have come into
    • the question comes up: ‘Why was a particular newspaper
    • time ago I had to say here that when historians come to
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Fall/Darkness: Lecture 10: The Influence of the Backward Angels
    Matching lines:
    • kinds of ideals, and yet nothing comes of it. There were
    • of people who have naturally come together and become
    • principle comes to expression in different ways in individual
    • powers have come down to earth, we must live with them; they
    • human intellect become extremely powerful if we do not want
    • must gradually come to the realization that everything
    • who had to admit that the prophesy given in a dream had come
    • the world comes to an end, people will read their newspapers
    • of Laplace's theory. All these theories come to nothing as
    • to come, people will be able to look down on the ideas of
    • think how far we have come since then: today we know that
    • come a long way.’ Everyone who thinks like this fails to
    • overcome just as myth has been overcome. Do you think people
    • they not come into existence entirely on their own?
    • direction of life. The breath of life comes into our thinking
    • to them in such a way that the truth comes into what we say.
    • into another person; you come to feel differently, to have
    • foreknowledge of what then was to come, and in our day has
    • come. In those circles it was often said that from the last
    • rooted in falsehood, and their inner feelings would come from
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Fall/Darkness: Lecture 11: Recognizing the Inner Human Being
    Matching lines:
    • become more inward.
    • said that human soul nature will become more inward we must
    • spiritualistic. Then a more spiritualistic stream comes to
    • inward and the material or materialistic one comes to the
    • to face the danger soon to come in the evolution of
    • has long since come for us to say: the children and young
    • people in education and training has entirely come out of
    • current, which has now become an Earth current, can
    • including the Sun current which has become Earth current.
    • their outer life; it must become part of human civilization.
    • laws of nature which people need to know will become an
    • thoughtful and come from the heart. The kind of extract of
    • only come in later years; children must first of all be able
    • ruined by the bias which comes with specialization, the
    • be overcome, when people live with notions that have little
    • experience does not come in a seething and boiling of
    • may become part of our inner feelings and will, and can set
    • can really come alive and the life of ideas be enriched, how
  • Title: Fall/Darkness: Lecture 12: The Spirits of Light and the Spirits of Darkness
    Matching lines:
    • have meant that people would have become spiritual very
    • laws which did, of course, come from human beings but were
    • course, for systems do not come to an abrupt end when there
    • particular, we see teachings come up which rebel against
    • course, come to an abrupt halt any more than it does in the
    • come from the earth but have been brought down from the
    • comes of its own accord.
    • also be torn away from the earth. The earth has become a
    • bound to the soil; the soul has to become independent. All
    • Europeans may become indianized when they go to America, but
  • Title: Fall/Darkness: Lecture 13: The Fallen Spirits' Influence in the World
    Matching lines:
    • what it actually has become in people born after 1879.
    • this was bound to come about gradually after their fall in
    • believe. Our age may be materialistic and want to become even
    • become poets. Speaking of the time when they first began to
    • and more: spirituality will come to human beings because
    • worlds; they could not have come to dwell in human brains and
    • become the general human persuasion; people will not grow so
    • particularly striking example of many things which will come
    • power evolution come to expression in such figures —
    • creation of Mephistopheles. In time to come, humanity will
    • darkness, who invents everything humanity has come to depend
    • time which has come upon us to form an objective opinion on
    • waking will only come when people begin to feel embarrassed
    • humanity has come to accept, and that in terms of world
    • certain sum total of cultural achievements which come from
    • sown before 1879 have not come to fruition, and in connection
  • Title: Fall/Darkness: Lecture 14: Into the Future
    Matching lines:
    • things. How did America come to be rediscovered in such a
    • point had come where certain retarded Angels made the attempt
    • people have become as clever as I have said. All this
    • of light for its impulses will gradually come to an end. The
    • from the cast-down Angels, will come from America.
    • complexity of human beings becomes apparent when you consider
    • Later a time will come when this only goes to the
    • develop quietly, unambitiously and selflessly and only come
    • they become journeymen, and finally masters.
    • forward, so that it comes before the twenty-eighth year; they
    • by people. This has come to an end, however, and people will
    • is strange to see what people sometimes come up with in this
    • but the fact that he did overcome it. In other words, in
    • still above, and then after they had come down, they sought
    • this. Why did modern history come up? Because it is a product
    • an individual who taught criminal law and who tends to come
    • and so on, ‘what has come to pass’.
    • of what really has come to pass and, within limits, of what
    • scenes of what comes to pass at the surface level for
    • become issues in education that people will come to
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: Fall and Redemption
    Matching lines:
    • come as far as grasping the evolution of animals up to the apes, and
    • and our inability to look at the essential being of man thus becomes
    • wanted to say that this thinking can become the impulse for moral
    • which is the ultimate outcome of what otherwise is only moral
    • can become really alive only if we can reverse the path that we
    • can come to us through a real and genuine spiritual-scientific
    • Today the time has come
    • has not yet come to full fruition. Sometimes, in fact, this pride has
    • inwardly through the matter itself, one does not become proud. But
    • et cetera, we do not immediately become paragons of pride. This
    • out, become vegetarian, and proceed to do what their mother did.
    • this way the ideal whose reality can become conscious to the
    • becomes a force in our Society, then, even in people who wish us the
    • this fact and love sectarianism. And so it has come about that even
    • if the Anthroposophical Society wants to become a reality, we
  • Title: Lecture: Man's Fall and Redemption
    Matching lines:
    • thinking is the direct outcome of mediaeval thinking. I have pointed
    • force of thinking, which becomes active when a human being is born or
    • gradually becomes a habit. Think of the more recent evolution of
    • outcome of the misunderstanding relating to the fall of man. This
    • scientist, mankind has now become sleepy, and does not even
    • laws which has become universal beauty. This lies in the word
    • all what he should be. He comes from heaven and I have so portrayed
    • its heavenly meaning. In this way the idea of beauty becomes concrete.
    • matters is that we should become aware of the change in the content of
    • remember that the theoretical knowledge of to-day, which has become
    • scientific research must become permeated with spirituality. But this
    • first decay and become spiritual, in order to change into skull-bones
  • Title: Lecture: Calendar of the Soul
    Matching lines:
    • gradually be realised, but insight will come when understanding has
    • given to all men through all time to come — then He is speaking
    • to reappear in the spring. It might come naturally to him to compare
    • Then comes
    • divine Being who would one day become the Spirit of the Earth. This
    • forces of the Heavens, come down to the Earth in the spring. This
    • interests of our time will gain the day and Easter will become a
    • through which man becomes aware that he lives in the flow of Time,
    • features of Egypto-Chaldean civilisation therefore come into evidence
    • to those mysterious connections through which human destiny can become
    • come when it will be known, for example, how Venus moves, and what species
  • Title: Lecture: The Spirit in the Realm of Plants
    Matching lines:
    • history told as an outcome of research into the spiritual
    • our scientists or other educated contemporaries but also come into
    • resistance that can come especially through the thinking into which
    • cells. They could in no way conceive how someone could still come up
    • cell,’ and so on. Finally it becomes necessary to tear oneself
    • impossible for this piece of tissue to come into existence without
    • spiritual investigator becomes aware that it is generally impossible
    • Here, however, we come
    • nevertheless for the spiritual scientific view. We come to look
    • the depths of the earth are the plants that have become stone. If
    • considered too ridiculous if spiritual science, by its methods, comes
    • analysis originated from the plant. The plant first had to become
    • condition it is a curious fact that the human being becomes
    • unconscious. For the spiritual investigator (we will see how he comes
    • conscious that in sleep the soul becomes one with the universe and is
    • to everything that comes down from the sun and forms itself as it
    • the human being we have come to know as the etheric body or life
    • fly-trap, which has bristles on its leaves. When an insect comes near
    • have come near, surround them with their tentacles so that they
    • a human being the piety or impiety of his soul, so we can come to an
  • Title: On the Mysteries of Ancient and Modern Times: Lecture 1
    Matching lines:
    • where the accepted notion on these matters becomes very
    • other words (for it comes to the same thing) the results that
    • have become magical manipulations, simply by virtue of the
    • too easily have become what is called ‘black
    • elementals. Ahrimanic elemental spirits come into being
    • beings did in antiquity. Only they come into being in a very
    • in reserve) they become mingled with Ahrimanic forces. And
    • thought. (Other things too come into play in this
    • Ahrimanic elemental spirits come into being in our
    • Chemistry and the like; or else they must become truly
    • exists to-day. He who becomes acquainted with the life of the
    • impulses, has also the impulse to overcome every separate and
    • Gods had to overcome those other forces, likewise the Power
    • of the Logos has to overcome the special, separating forces
  • Title: On the Mysteries of Ancient and Modern Times: Lecture 2
    Matching lines:
    • line belongs to the realm of those things which become
    • Thereby the Easter Festival becomes the symbol of cosmic
    • really become in the course of evolution, namely, the Church;
    • all-embracing Wisdom which becomes Teaching for mankind, and
    • fill us in our soul with active impulse. Thus it becomes the
    • social life. The Word itself becomes of social service, And
    • working with us, giving us that which becomes the guiding
    • the mere outcome of human beings “sniffing things
    • research into Nature. Goethe comes hack to this point again
    • almost overcome with pity for poor mankind, when men are
    • develop the Christmas thoughts which will become the true
  • Title: On the Mysteries of Ancient and Modern Times: Lecture 3
    Matching lines:
    • from the ancestors, — that everything comes from the
    • come about that Science on the one hand, by rejecting the
    • super-sensible Man, has become materialistic; while on the
    • Man, has become unscientific, In our time the two are
    • become void of science. Any one who will, can see that it is
    • so. And, that the science of to-day has become void of
    • Natural Science, whenever it claims to become a
    • mere notification of facts, — becomes a science of mere
  • Title: Lecture: The World Development in the Light of Anthroposophy
    Matching lines:
    • by this separation man's inner world becomes his outer world, and
    • what we usually consider as his outer world becomes his inner
    • when we come across such things in the external physical world.
    • knowledge, which has become emancipated from the physical and
    • not change; they do not become less objective, for they are
    • comes out of the physical and etheric bodies becomes more
    • for many people, becomes immensely intensified when we thus
    • destiny in love or in hate, gradually come up, when the spiritual
    • We can perceive, for instance, that the physical body becomes
    • we continue this line of observation we come to the point of
    • Those who become
    • genuine science, he comes to the true boundary, where he may
    • accordance with modern ideas: “But science must not become
    • universe to become an art, for we only learn to know reality by
    • Darwinistic theory comes to a standstill, we perceive that man,
    • remaining organism with comparative independence. And we come to
    • transformed limbs which have become shriveled, as it were, and it
    • and finally we come to the religious world. These worlds belong
    • Anthroposophy thus becomes a moral-religious science.
    • which come to us out of the spiritual darkness of the world
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: The Supersensible in the Human Being and in the Universe
    Matching lines:
    • our life and existence. The times have become difficult. It
    • Nature; an impulse comes to the fore that seeks to have religious
    • that comes from the super-sensible worlds and penetrates into the
    • — so that it differs from that which becomes, in the child
    • human body and, as a consequence, as the outcome of entirely
    • what the human being becomes, to begin with, through his birth,
    • this must have come from an ancient knowledge! It cannot have
    • come from a belief forced upon man! Every religious belief has
    • become a spiritual investigator at the present time, in keeping
    • to become a spiritual investigator, but certain people can become
    • books. But those who wish to become spiritual investigators at
    • the world in an exact manner, and the one who becomes an
    • earnestly be able to admit that we have come far in the
    • organizations and which come to our aid so that we do not need to
    • strengthened and intensified in such a way that they become
    • become spiritual investigators, it is necessary to PRACTICE just
    • laboratory in order to become physicists, or those who practice
    • for years in an astronomical observatory in order to become
    • astronomers. Indeed, it is no easier to become a spiritual
    • investigator than it is to become a physicist or an astronomer.
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: Foundations of Anthroposophy
    Matching lines:
    • come from his son, from the departed son himself.
    • shall see how this is possible) becomes transformed and thus
    • is really able to overcome space and time (mediums always possess
    • our thought to a high degree, so that our way of thinking becomes
    • must become quite familiar with the conditions in which we
    • our thought to a high degree, so that our way of thinking becomes
    • must become quite familiar with the conditions in which we
    • observe carefully. Things must, so to speak, become enigmas and
    • thought to such an extent that it becomes a transformed memory.
    • come to the point of placing before our soul, in the imaginative
    • the super-sensible worlds, must in a certain sphere become
    • the note C sharp and that these are impressions which come to us
    • physical human organism which flares up, comes, so to speak to a
    • wishes to become a spiritual investigator in the anthroposophical
    • earnestly strives to become an anthroposophical investigator
    • life, you must change, you must become different from what you
    • effects of the will, now become transformations within human
    • these become emancipated from the human organization, even as our
    • become an inner power which unites with the emancipated thinking.
    • the body as mere feeling and will, we ordinarily become
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: East and West in the Light of the Christmas Idea
    Matching lines:
    • in the West we should look across to the East; we become more and
    • the Mystery of Golgotha we look back six centuries and come to
    • Instead, there rises up something which comes from man's own
    • ever-growing measure to bear in mind that thought can become a
    • we can come to the resurrection of that divine-spiritual reality
  • Title: Lecture: Man and Cosmos
    Matching lines:
    • perceptions apparently come from another direction, this is an
    • say that the perceptions come from outside; they reach, as it
    • comes from inside. When I look at the table, its impression comes
    • through the representing or thinking power which comes from
    • which the earth, such as it is, would become transparent to sight
    • impressions come, as it were, from the horizontal direction, so
    • representing power; from below come the perceptions of metals
    • is concerned, the physical and etheric bodies become filled with
    • outside. They receive the impressions which come from below and
    • the Ego and the astral body become to a certain extent
    • body for the influences which come from the gold radiations, lies
    • vertically, in a direct way, not through holes. What thus comes
    • becomes a sensory organ able to perceive the inside of the earth,
    • person. All the things which generally come towards you in an
    • human being, may become free. This entails that he should
    • Anthroposophy with one's whole being, then one becomes a true
    • anthroposophical movement absolutely needs to become fruitful,
  • Title: Lecture: Human Freedom and Its Connection with the Mystery of Golgotha
    Matching lines:
    • is then the human being. What is concealed here on earth, becomes
    • since that time, we come across certain definite ideas on the
    • Judgment,” for example, we come across ideas connected with
    • may add all that has still to come. But all this takes place on
    • death, he is overcome by lack of freedom, by the necessity of
    • time we often come across conceptions stating that these pagan
    • before his soul in the form of concepts and become images —
    • religious faith which only lives in freedom, he becomes able to
    • Modern mankind must find it, if it wants to come out of the
  • Title: Lecture: Knowledge Pervaded with the Experience of Love
    Matching lines:
    • thoughts are absolutely correct and have become so perfect,
    • his own life; he himself must become alive. History cannot be
    • that everywhere men had come down to the earth from a prenatal,
    • a divine element had come down with him to the earth. In reality,
    • We come across
    • a return to the archetypal principle of the Father and it comes
    • following question to the universe: Can Man become a God? And the
    • universe replied: God can become Man. This reply was given
    • darkness, can receive the Cosmic Light, after having overcome, as
    • becomes manifest in pure thought; as modern men we then no longer
    • will come to the Holy Spirit that will also enable him to see the
    • require something which comes from the human being and
    • Nature becomes an inwardly living comprehension. But there can be
    • it. They cloak it in all manner of other things and become quite
    • undoubtedly exist in the present time, should come to us led by
    • anthroposophical foundation come truths which call for that inner
  • Title: Lecture: The End of the Dark Age
    Matching lines:
    • creature. He becomes hardened, as it were, within earthly
  • Title: Lecture: The Golden Legend and a German Christmas Play
    Matching lines:
    • We shall feel how much there is that can become strong and powerful
    • comes the day of Adam and Eve. This has its origin in the same
    • become quite different since the Mystery of Golgotha. In the
    • what the Earth has become through Lucifer's entering the Earth
    • through the Luciferic temptation has become different from what it
    • originally was, we then see everything that man has become through
    • the fruit of knowledge which comes to me through my participation in
    • I behold this knowledge it becomes in me something different from
    • what it would have been originally, it becomes something which I must
    • grow out of my Earth deeds which must become different. The tree
    • grows up, the tree which becomes the Cross of earth existence. It
    • becomes something to which man must acquire a new relation, for the
    • must become the stem of the Cross because man must unite himself anew
    • becomes an instrument capable of consciously grasping the Ego. A deep
    • here touch a certain mystery of Spiritual Science that will become
    • does not unite with what comes to man from the Earth-existence, but
    • comes from these. The Ego waits; it waits with all that belongs to it
    • in the spiritual world. Man will have to become conscious of this,
    • and humanity can only become conscious of it because at a certain
    • can say: ‘Suffer the little children to come to Me!’ Not
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: The Christmas Thought and the Secret of the Ego
    Matching lines:
    • how strongly this thought is connected with what must become
    • this meaning holds good for the present as well. It will become clear
    • the earth has since then become united with the entire corporeality
    • of the earth. The earth has become something different since the
    • rather it becomes clear that the human being through all his activity,
    • itself the stamp of what the earth has become through the fact that
    • the tree that has become something different through the Luciferic
    • man's entire earthly existence that has come into humanity's
    • knowledge that has become muse by the fact that I have gained the
    • knowledge, however, it becomes something different for me, something
    • becomes something that I must change if the goal and task of the
    • something that must become different. The tree grows forth, the
    • tree that becomes the Cross of earthly existence, the tree that
    • becomes something to which the human being must gain a new
    • humanity that Adam has become since the temptation. The Tree of
    • Knowledge must become the trunk of the Cross, because the human being
    • members we have come to know as the members of human nature? We know
    • spiritual science that will become more and more clear as time
    • comes from these. The “I” waits, waits with everything
    • (this is meant in a specific sense). Humanity ought to become
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: Zarathustra
    Matching lines:
    • ancient Indian thought. These Indian teachings have come down to us
    • become a single current of culture. When we speak to-day of the
    • The eye had to become insensitive to physical colour, the ear to
    • becomes flatter and flatter. Draw the circle larger and larger, and
    • the arc eventually becomes a straight line; thereafter both lines
    • journey from afar, and ye that come from near at hand, with longing
  • Title: Lecture: Hermes
    Matching lines:
    • children. All you know is the outcome of your own contemplation and
    • The marvellous pictures that have come down to
    • legends of this world of Gods have come down to us and there is
    • understanding of such figures as Osiris and Isis become really
    • The active principle of thought has become the power of ideation in
    • processes. We come from the world of Osiris and Isis; the highest
    • the higher power in man, spread over cosmic space, is overcome by
    • and has passed the stages of preparation, he comes to Osiris. When he
    • of Egypt said: “When man is in the underworld he comes to two
    • come to himself,” realising his spiritual existence, no
    • spiritual super-sensible Power whence he himself had come forth.
    • is the Watcher; it is he who tell us what is to come.” And they
    • gratitude and reverence, saying: “All that I possess comes from
    • does, the heights of modern culture, come into collision with this
    • the so-called barbaric civilisations must be regarded as the outcome
    • conditions at the starting-point of human civilisations and will come
  • Title: Lecture: On the Nature of Butterflies
    Matching lines:
    • butterfly that comes out of this egg. What emerges from this egg is not
    • moisture. Nature comes to the rescue. Such things do not always dawn on
    • becomes quite another kind of creature than it was as an egg. The egg
    • is spun in the pattern of light rays, and when you come across a
    • annihilate, but when it comes about in the right way it transforms the
    • far too much earthly matter. When the content of the caterpillar comes
    • kind of caterpillar which, having become such, has the urge to reach the
    • alters the form of its blood vessels; they become quite different. It
    • becomes lung. Where gills once were, we now have lungs, spun there by
    • may not disturb the microscope. And the thought comes to us: Good
    • spiritual life is being swamped, and the time has now come when we must
    • things lunatics tell you when you come into contact with them. For this
  • Title: Memory and Love
    Matching lines:
    • in the way it comes about on earth in the human soul it has nothing to
    • come to know in our anthroposophical literature as the world of the
    • never become fully aware of ourselves. Hence in our experience between
    • what would become of your independence if in your thoughts you had
    • we come down at all to the physical out of the spiritual world? You may
    • we become old because the forces holding us in connection with the
    • continually become less able to comprehend, to maintain, ourselves
    • within spiritual realms; this capacity becomes increasingly feeble. We
    • have a growing feeling that faintness may overcome us in the spiritual
    • body. The feeling of loneliness finds a refuge in the body and becomes
    • during sleep becomes really clairvoyant, or when the clairvoyant soul
    • We come now
    • have been able to implant in ourselves through love becomes truly
    • has become a pale, almost abstract shadow. That is what our capacity for
    • for what is spiritual — then it takes on flesh and becomes weak.
    • spiritual breathing. Here on earth this breathing process becomes memory
    • elementary. The child has a certain memory, but it becomes an
    • But from the head comes the same faculty that inwardly, in the soul,
    • gives memory, which plays into sound and tone: this comes from above.
    • this you have clear witness in the full inner volume of tone that comes
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Conferencia: La Comunión Espiritual de la Humanidad
    Matching lines:
    • Misterios que poco a poco comenzaron a separar pensamientos
    • comenzando tan temprano como los siglos 8º y 9º AC —
    • interior; ahora comenzaba a sentir que los pensamientos eran como algo
    • se convirtió cuando los hombres comenzaron a considerar sus
    • Gólgota, comenzó a sentir que eran como la sangre en su
    • nuevo año debiera comenzar, como muy pronto, en marzo — como
    • reconoce haber sido un imbécil) comenzar el año en medio del
  • Title: Lecture: The Experiences of Sleep and their Spiritual Background
    Matching lines:
    • dream and suggest how dreams appear to come out of the life of sleep and
    • security which comes from being in contact with the material things of
    • described; nor would he ever in the waking state come to a feeling of
    • continues asleep, he comes into other stages which are not accessible to
    • it comes into this condition of anxiety — that is to say, into a
    • individual beings of soul-and-spirit. The soul comes into a certain
    • anxiety of this stage of sleep has to be somehow met and overcome. In
    • mankind on Earth, the more evident does it become that man had a kind of
    • through its own immediate existence; he has not acquired it, it has come
    • time knew that certain experiences they had in their soul did not come
    • things come together and unite — the power remaining over from the
    • way we come to see more and more clearly how the spiritual lives in the
    • soul becomes altogether different from what it is in the life of
    • From being personal and human our life becomes cosmic during sleep. And
    • day life of soul, these forces require the fresh impulse that comes from
    • power to come out of this anxiety, the power to withstand the tendency
    • soul comes into the realm of anxiety during the time between going to
    • constitute our inner being. Thus during sleep man becomes in very truth
    • through the Earth in a spiritual sense. The metamorphoses which come to
    • understanding of the human being is alone possible when we become
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: Reincarnation and Karma
    Matching lines:
    • it has followed since the 17th century the time will come when
    • will come when some Virchow perhaps will say: There was a time
    • truths come to man without his seeking; the literary supplements
    • not yet come to put forward certain thoughts on this or that point.
    • come from somewhere. Conjectures are made as to how it comes
    • comes along and out of a fact accessible to every one discovers
    • in the opinion of this Apostle of Enlightenment has become
    • miracles. He has come to the following conclusion:— Nature
    • cases? But now Darwin comes and proves to us that plant and
    • comes up very irresistibly when we observe the thoughts of those
    • not really able to come to an Anthroposophical
    • heard from the great Eastern Teachers cannot become
    • of which the lower can become the higher. We find, for example,
    • Kentucky become blind. We understand that dwelling in darkness
    • continue their line of thought that they never come to this
    • the life of the soul. The result of the deed will come from
    • comes and whither he goes; and will disclose to him this
    • that his actions become part of a stream which flows from
    • the spiritual so that it may become the ruling power of your
  • Title: Lecture: Life and Death
    Matching lines:
    • in asking first of all: “What becomes of the oxygen,
    • become a more uncertain one.
    • matter. So lifeless matter now becomes in death the outer
    • becomes lifeless matter; but must seek the cause, the
    • above-mentioned truth also consists in its having become a
    • have to distinguish that which comes from the environment from
    • characterised. The time will come when men will realise that
    • the human being which one can see, as it were, come into
    • core of man's being and what comes to pass in the course of
    • condition; that is to say, it comes into conflict with its
    • come into conflict with what envelops this kernel, with what
    • in relation to the life process. We can say that man becomes
    • For just think, if the muscles could really become fatigued,
    • animal or a man become tired? When their work is not
    • with which a living being may come into relationship through
    • means of it consciousness, the organs concerned becomes
    • become fatigued.
    • which comes about though fatigue, points to the fact, even in
    • that that which comes to a life-process must be foreign to
    • what has become wooden, as it were, what it has itself formed
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: The Elementary Kingdoms
    Matching lines:
    • becomes astrally clairvoyant, he is able to see the etheric
    • into steam it becomes Air. Occultism, here goes
    • still further, for it shows that the air may become still
    • more rarefied — may become thinner still. In this case,
    • how easily one may be tempted at times to become a
    • bones and muscles, it would become still more competition.
    • human being. Other Beings must come to their aid; other
    • to explain the nature of these Beings who become active when
    • Only when man has become so earnest and purified, that he
    • not become for him a sacramental rite. Only then will he be
    • Ego is added to these. For, with the incomes of the Ego, the
    • birds! In these migrations instinct comes to expression.
    • distinct height, should incite him so much the more to become
  • Title: Lecture: 'Goethe's Faust' from the Point of View of Spiritual Science
    Matching lines:
    • successful operation upon a blind person, there comes to him
    • given to the man born blind through the operation. A man becomes
    • then it becomes self-evident and common knowledge of
    • comes from the psycho-spiritual, returns to the
    • sentence: the psycho-spiritual comes from the psycho-spiritual
    • will become the universal possession of humanity.
    • true knowledge of the facts of spiritual science will become
    • comes to expression, at a more mature age, after he arrives
    • the University in Leipzig. He should have become a lawyer,
    • becomes aware of something that has been asleep — like
    • or feeling; something within me becomes active, compelling me to
    • Faust — in the first place to become occupied with
    • he merges with something from which come all things physical,
    • tried to find, but was then immature. Now he is to become
    • comes to man only when he can be re-embodied repeatedly
    • order to ally itself with them. Only then can it become
    • comes into union with the spirit of Helena who now, in the
    • Just as truthfully does he show, what comes to life in our
    • child. But then again come the moments of ordinary life, when
    • world of spirit permanently. But even then come various
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: Birth of the Light
    Matching lines:
    • heads of mankind, three representatives of high magic come to
    • ‘Kings’ in the spiritual sense of the word: magic kings come to
    • kings came to welcome. And so does the Spirit-King of St.
    • yet another figure the Christ-Impulse can come before our
    • the cosmic Christ, we become aware how through the Mystery of
    • become entwined in it — a man who after the Mystery of
    • and how all this works on him before he comes to know the
    • summit of human evolution and paying homage to him there come
    • comes to feel the whole event in Palestine as a family
    • strives after wisdom must inevitably come near to the antagonists
    • world is fashioned and built. Everything that comes about,
    • comes about through the power and the might that is in the
    • comes into being through so much wisdom as this magic building,
    • have a meaning where a contrary power comes into play. But the
    • and every hour of the year compel us to become aware that we
    • it is in the same night as it comes round again and again that
    • souls, through which they can come near each other — not
    • had become of this feeling in Rome, at the time when the
    • Mystery of Golgotha took place? It had become the Saturnalia.
    • angel, knowing: He is coming not from human lands, he comes
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: Galileo, Giordano Bruno, and Goethe
    Matching lines:
    • argumentative thought was to become dominant. Thus, Aristotle
    • about it, the knowledge having come to him from those times
    • Galileo, that great thinker, that it has become possible for
    • knowledge governed by reason, may come much later than the
    • of what was to come. Hence their fierce opposition to the
    • these Beings, come the visible things of Nature as the
    • revelation of. Divine thought. Then come our powers of
    • different spheres of the stars; then comes the sphere of
    • the time had come when the voice of Nature began to make
    • comes into existence at birth, so said Giordano Bruno, the
    • come in direct contact with the stream which connects us with
    • We see in this how the spirit of Giordano Bruno becomes fully
    • Goethe the mood of Giordano Bruno had become his own. It was
    • Nature. In a certain sense, the spirit which had come down
  • Title: Lecture: On the Occasion of Goethe's Birthday
    Matching lines:
    • events, is needful for us, in order that we may become human
    • human knowledge, as they now exist. It has become absolutely
    • all that has become known of late years regarding the
    • to certain facts which have come to light by degrees,
    • different when we come to those sciences which have to deal
    • more with life and the soul. We come in the first place to
    • and more subtle resemblances do not come to light.” And
    • facts which have come to light, to relate the human being to
    • regard to theories. When we come to physiology we find still
    • other phenomena of life, comes within the domain of
    • is really the outcome of a tendency inherent in facts, to
    • wonderful facts that have come to light during the last few
    • they cannot be spiritual powers, nor can they become active.
    • a book which is the outcome of the intellectual life of the
    • Goethe's, to show how necessary it is that we should become
    • “Perhaps one or two may come to hear what I have to
    • conditions of life which are the outcome of our theosophical
    • this wish, my dear theosophical friends, I always welcome you
    • from the heart when you come, and with the same wish I take
  • Title: Lecture: The Errors of Spiritual Investigation
    Matching lines:
    • to be overcome in the soul of the spiritual investigator, but
    • worlds. In this way the soul first comes to Imaginative
    • of herself. Self education must proceed to overcome this
    • mediumship. Then we come to many a sphere where sources of
    • far off goal. One will then come more and more to such
    • work disturbingly, he becomes all the more a capable
    • comes to see how the whole course of life has led one to
    • how another soul has come to regard things from another side.
    • and then to see how each has come to his standpoint, then
    • But without this, one cannot become a real spiritual
    • investigator, one comes to see oneself completely, to see
    • the stripping off of his own personality, he comes to
    • sympathies and antipathies. This comes strongly into
  • Title: Lecture: Factors of Karma, Deficiencies in Psychoanalysis
    Matching lines:
    • position, and many an extraneous factor comes into play at this
    • life — who has become a Cabinet Minister for instance,
    • office. Not until the end of his life does it become possible
    • for Faust to free himself from Mephistopheles. Faust comes to
    • becomes a military commander and conducts wars. But from
    • regions we shall also find what comes from the individual's
    • theologians among Psycho-analysts come to terms with one
    • death when this life is at an end, and to become a potent force
    • at a different stage of maturity than that which comes from the
    • characteristics become consolidated in the growing human being,
    • thus appears in the growing human being comes from his Karma.
    • paralysing the former, come more from the astral body. Through
    • comes from the etheric.) The working of the astral body is
    • about) the physical body — forces which come not
    • ways the four strings play together. The way we come into
  • Title: Lecture: Matter Incidental to the Question of Destiny
    Matching lines:
    • therefore, how he became what he was. How did he become the
    • game, the other said to him: Come with me now to the Cafe, and
    • if I do undertake to become a theatrical Director, I shall
    • I know nothing of him, but hitherto nothing but good has come to me
    • could become Director of the Theatre. But there was also the
    • especially, who come out of the immediate life of the present,
    • realistically, how he comes to commit suicide.
    • is a knock at the door of his bedroom. In comes the convict
    • certain matters, Truth must prevail when it becomes a
    • has gradually become lost to men. Think only of this: in the
    • Again and again, we come up against the subjects of which it is
  • Title: Lecture: Hereditary Impulses and Impulses from Previous Earth Lives
    Matching lines:
    • come to those parts of our subject which deal more with the
    • human being becomes ripe to bring descendants into life. The
    • age of fourteen to sixteen he becomes completely ripe for
    • comes the period from the fourteenth to the twenty-first year,
    • approximate term). Bourgeoisdom has come to
    • become the mincemeat of Bourgeois nonentity. He felt this as a
    • A narrowing of intellect will come, says John Stuart
    • of his own country, declares: England is on the way to become a
    • strength to overcome this Bourgeoisie, — Europe despite
    • its noble ancestry and Christianity will become a modern
    • says, out of deep tragical feeling: The time will come in
    • easily be overcome. But he still sees no hopeful outlook, for
    • Eastern people have become their followers) — have
    • reckoned it for 1914 it would have come out just as well. The
    • Such things should become impossible in future; and to
    • sustaining intelligence and vigour of life which come from
    • impulses which must come from the Eastern World, and,
    • is commonly supposed that he will rule, will not come to
    • thought, the situation might become very dangerous even
    • was living in Blavatsky had been able to come forth
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: The Relation of Man to the Hierarchies
    Matching lines:
    • — man comes down from the super-sensible World into the
    • whence it comes there is absolutely no knowledge of the
    • Archangeloi (Archangels) and Angeloi (Angels). Thereafter comes
    • Thence we come down to man himself. Man, as he now is on
    • this must be borne in mind. Not until we come to the Archangels
    • all has become very slight indeed in modern time. The
    • emphasis of every one on his own God has become more and more
    • creeps in, and by and by man comes to worship not the
    • consciously in the soul. But when we come to man's relation to
    • unconscious outcome of the one-sided devotion to
    • of the Mysteries. Such a person comes to one (I am relating an
    • words by virtue of what the words have become through language.
    • evolution of mankind. The word has become more and more bereft
    • had come to them out of the words. Out of their words, the men
    • words. But the power of thought could only come out of the
    • there. Then did there come that Being, who — if the
    • Angel only comes into relation to the one man, Christ can have
    • in practice. What has become so universal and has attained such
    • to be brought into man in order that he might become what he
    • was destined to become as earthly man. Through many hundreds of
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: The Birth of Christ in the Human Soul
    Matching lines:
    • become trivial in the course of the centuries. And many a song
    • that the Christmas thought will gradually come to be felt in a
    • has as yet become very little aware of the fact that birth and
    • become as little children, ye shall not enter into the Kingdom
    • of Heaven.” “Except ye become as little
    • “Except ye become as little children, ye shall not enter
    • ye shall become as little children,” which we can
    • But, in his centre-most being, man comes out of the spiritual
    • that he reveals even in his earliest years how he has come out
    • birth to death; that this ego becomes more and more powerful
    • ego of man, upon that which comes into a physical
    • that it becomes less and less manifest; and that what develops
    • humanity. Then will the Christmas conception become powerful
    • comes to light in the world — bearing mankind forward,
    • beings come forth equal before the world and God
    • and the Luciferic. And, as it comes to be known how the
    • Most of all must understanding come about, Christian
    • state of sleep the human being must become capable of
    • illuminated by the light which comes from the Christmas
    • “Except ye become as little children ye shall not enter
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: The Mysteries (Die Geheimnisse)
    Matching lines:
    • time after they had become bishops and died their bones had
    • had once come to Cologne, bringing with him three crowns for
    • earth most intensively when the shortest days come, with the
    • become transparent for him. The esoteric Christian felt that
    • come to life in every detail. But if we have learnt a great
    • come to life with the fruits of our former life, with the
    • he comes to a mountain. He journeys up the path at
    • “Die and be re-born” — overcome what you have first been
    • perfection. If you overcome what is given you in the three
    • At last the summit comes within his sight,
    • he becomes aware that in this house not this or that religion
    • and on what mission he has come. He is made welcome and hears
    • to say he overcomes the lower astral nature. The viper is the
    • The portal opes, and he is bidden welcome
    • At last an aged brother cries: Oh welcome,
    • Thou comest as a stranger, yet to share
    • Had he been here, with hearty welcome's warmth
    • Dared not to drink, o'ercome by solemn fear.
    • But he who overcomes himself has gained
    • This man who had overcome himself, that is, who had
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Mission/Folk-Souls (1970): 1. Angels, Folk Spirits, Time Spirits: their part in the Evolution of Mankind.
    Matching lines:
    • body into Manas or Spirit Self, so that it becomes something
    • the human stage. Strange as this may seem, it will become perfectly
    • man becomes conscious in his astral body, i.e. outside his physical
    • are able to sit together in this hall, people who have come here from
    • brought them together here? They come from the spheres of activity of
  • Title: Mission/Folk-Souls (1970): 2. Normal and abnormal Archangels and Time Spirits.
    Matching lines:
    • life. It becomes virtually an empty phrase; in face of the stern
    • normally become Spirits of Personality during our Earth-existence,
  • Title: Mission/Folk-Souls (1970): 3. The inner Life of the Folk Spirits. Formation of the Races.
    Matching lines:
    • the human ego first becomes conscious.
    • the first time in the Intellectual Soul and only becomes fully
    • it becomes a part of his life.
    • from outside and which the Intellectual Soul elaborates. Then we come
    • supple, to be growing) and developing. In old age they become flaccid
    • Then comes the time when he withdraws from the particular national
    • transferred to this portion what have become the vital interests of
    • of Form work in conjunction with those Beings whom we have come to
  • Title: Mission/Folk-Souls (1970): 4. The Evolution of Races and Civilization.
    Matching lines:
    • has become a more material being than he would otherwise have been.
    • twenty to twenty-one). Having come down to Earth at this age he would
    • would not have become Earth-bound to the extent that he is today. If
    • consequence man has become more dependent upon the Earth than he
    • would otherwise have been; he has become dependent on the locality
    • he becomes dependent upon the locality of his birth, he unites with
    • north, south, east or west. But because he has become dependent on
    • described, he becomes Earth-bound, he becomes closely associated
    • plains is different from that in the mountains. Man therefore becomes
    • He becomes wholly identified with his native soil through his close
    • relationships will become
    • the human organism so that man becomes dependent upon the soil of a
    • we continue this line (see diagram) still further westward we come to
    • gradually being overcome. The first steps in this direction were
    • westward, the less productive civilization becomes. As civilization
    • civilization becomes externalized; it is no longer vitalized by the
    • becomes progressively more rigid and senile, and slowly declines.
  • Title: Mission/Folk-Souls (1970): 5. Manifestation of the Hierarchies in the Elements of Nature.
    Matching lines:
    • of human evolution. This, however, will only become apparent to us
    • become solidified. Waves of semi-fluid consistency were then thrown
    • living creatures here on Earth. It comes from the Spirits of Wisdom.
    • could become our present Earth. If you refer to my books
    • mission. In this way the Trinity becomes a Quaternary: the latter
    • is such that the inmost being of man becomes the substance of Love
    • to become visible amongst those spiritual Beings weaving and surging
    • first to become visible on the astral plane, even before the normal
  • Title: Mission/Folk-Souls (1970): 6. The Five Root Races of Mankind.
    Matching lines:
    • Universe towards the centre of the Earth. Man does not become aware
    • as “man in the second third of his life” would become a
    • being, his general make-up, would come into existence in that
    • from which the individual races spread outward. We then come to Asia,
    • standpoint you will become aware of the five centres where the
    • become realized in a special manner; then Saturn withdrew into
    • who to us speaks truth. Yes, from the lips of the Great Spirit comes
  • Title: Mission/Folk-Souls (1970): 7. Advance of Folk Spirits to the Rank of Time Spirits.
    Matching lines:
    • come from the Semitic people. The other peoples are inclined to
    • Archai-being, a Spirit of Personality. After he had become a Time
    • its guiding Time Spirit in order that he might become the leader of
    • a single Archangel-being and were destined to come gradually under
    • the guidance of many different Archangels in order to become
    • These potentialities will be able to become an important element in
  • Title: Mission/Folk-Souls (1970): 8. The Five Post-Atlantean Civilizations.
    Matching lines:
    • certain natural clairvoyance which he had to overcome. This was
    • and Archangels on the human souls had become a matter of complete
    • then come to the Chaldean peoples. They were already aware of the
    • West, but the spiritual culture of the West — unless they come
    • what we have come to know as the divine-spiritual Beings immediately
    • course of his soul's evolution, he could become the guiding
    • information that has come down to us. It is important to have a right
    • the astral, his inner life becomes integrated, how the inner answers,
    • and void comes forth again out of Pralaya where the kingdoms of
    • however, come from an entirely different realm from those we find
  • Title: Mission/Folk-Souls (1970): 9. Loki - Hodur and Baldur - Twilight of the Gods.
    Matching lines:
    • order to become merged in Brahma and to find Atman within oneself. In
    • to become a free and independent being, to be fired with enthusiasm
    • himself to become aware of the good powers which are present there:
    • Anthroposophical Society. What you will come to understand more and
    • step, has the perspective of man become limited to the picture of the
    • death of Baldur, had become true for the majority of men. There were,
    • again become visible, he owed to the fact that man felt his sojourn
    • override that which comes from the Gods and will, in its turn, be
    • overcome. This was their vision of Ragnarok, the Twilight of the
    • he overcomes even that power by which Odin is at first overcome. In
  • Title: Mission/Folk-Souls (1970): 10. The Mission of Individual Peoples and Cultures in the Past, Present and Future.
    Matching lines:
    • establishment of parliamentary forms of government at once becomes
    • thus becomes totally different from the Western European conceptions
  • Title: Mission/Folk-Souls (1970): 11. Nerthus, Freyja and Gerda.
    Matching lines:
    • survived in all that has come down to us in the older sagas and
    • planetary heights and who, during the Atlantean epoch, had come back
    • specially fitted to receive them. A time will come when individuals
    • that which St. Paul saw in etheric clairvoyance as a mystery to come,
    • manifestation of Christ, a manifestation which must come when human
    • which is to come. Mankind is now ready for freedom and self-knowledge
    • become a most valuable revelation for mankind. Everything that may
    • I now come to a theme which I have already touched upon. I have
    • overcome by the flaming sword of Earth-born Surtur.
    • clairvoyance. Vidar who has been silent until now will overcome the
    • called upon to interpret from the signs of the times what is to come
    • the future. We endeavour to ascertain what is to come. We do not rely
    • comes from the lips of those who ought to know who Christ is.
    • people assembled here. Those, not of Norse extraction, who have come
    • Spiritual Science should become a kind of basic attitude permeating
    • that it may become the common property of all mankind and may be
    • realized in all aspects of our earthly life. Let us try to come to an
    • of Vidar, the Aesir who has been silent until now, he will become the
    • come from, whether from near or far, may we always meet together in
  • Title: Lecture: Wonders of the World: Lecture 1
    Matching lines:
    • ancient Mystery. If we trace it back to its origin, we come to
    • had come for me to bring my spiritual work into connection with what
    • can only come to a true opinion if we let the necessities of life
    • become a ‘waste land’, the great, the overwhelming need
    • have come about through centuries of development. The signs of
    • future — a future which has become our own present. He thus
    • place of this ancient clairvoyance another culture will become more
    • of the ancient Iphigenia-figure; the other pole comes with the
    • its fruitfulness. In the next few days, when we come to talk about
    • the human body, becomes purified, becomes spirit — as the
    • archetypal mother, out of whom what is born elementally becomes
    • course of human development have become what they are today. When
    • Demeter current and the Eros current, will in the future become more
    • performances of this important work in the way which should come
    • as amateurish, but it is the beginning of something which is to come,
    • this spirit I welcome you at the outset of this cycle of lectures,
  • Title: Lecture: Wonders of the World: Lecture 2
    Matching lines:
    • capable, when it comes under the influence of this intellectual
    • to come to know again from our modern viewpoint the same living
    • whole wondrous action comes alive for you in the Pluto scene of the
    • faculty of clairvoyance. And because this organism of ours has become
    • forces within human nature comes about as a result of the
    • fruit from the Earth, so also is what comes from Demeter active
    • comment. That is where our laws come from today, and a man would
    • but to gods who had come down to men and who had in the Mysteries
    • organisation of the human body, they had to become less active; man
    • had to be alienated from the direct influence of Demeter, to become
    • when it eliminates the Eros forces, as it does when it becomes older,
    • when it becomes shrivelled and wrinkled. This profound truth is
    • these three sheaths. These three have all become different in the
    • present day, we see that through having become denser it has come
    • particular have become quite different. In olden times what we call
    • of human nature, man in his inmost being has become subject, so far
    • of the world. We do not come to know the world merely by looking at it.
    • we have astral bodies. But these thoughts and images become conscious
    • change which has come about in the astral body.
    • can become for us living feeling if we permeate ourselves with the
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: Wonders of the World: Lecture 3
    Matching lines:
    • upon the tidings of the Mysteries which have come down to us from
    • when we become aware of the currents of air in the wind, then we no
    • become visible in an unobtrusive way even to physical eyes, should be
    • only slowly become convinced again — a truth which I will try
    • knew something and which men will come to know again through
    • become active within, so outside us in the cosmos those forces are
    • ordinary physics has not yet come anywhere near such truths,
    • become intellectual knowledge, but was elemental feeling, there arose
    • human ether body. It comes if one says, ‘I am now eliminating
    • body of his, then there comes to him a spiritualised form of taste
    • it can only be compared with the sensation which overcomes us in
    • there comes a feeling of oppression rather like breathlessness. Hence
    • man. It does not all come into human consciousness. The
  • Title: Lecture: Wonders of the World: Lecture 4
    Matching lines:
    • come into the sphere of Poseidon, and the forces of the astral body
    • such a remarkable way in the Mystery of Eleusis, will only become
    • which we still get a faint echo in the Vedas, we come to the great
    • voice of the Holy Rishis will come to pass in great glory and
    • spirituality with the greatest intensity could not become incarnated
    • that we shall come to understand more closely; they enabled Him to
    • astral spheres have become permeated through and through by Him. This
    • Anyone who becomes clairvoyant in the
    • in order later to come to the next incorporation of the Earth, which
    • certain circumstances even in time to come these Beings may incarnate
    • make them free and independent for evolution that is to come in the
    • dwelt upon the Earth that humanity will become mature enough to
    • consciousness comes to know just what the star of Venus is by
    • the bodies of the gods has become star. Looking up into the starry
    • our time comes from the Spirits who hinder, who hold progress back.
    • could in the future incarnate in the flesh is a thought which comes
  • Title: Lecture: Wonders of the World: Lecture 5
    Matching lines:
    • that text, that epigrammatic utterance, which has come down to us
    • has not yet understood how evolution comes about, what is its whole
    • meaning. For a modern consciousness it is somewhat difficult to come
    • acknowledge: ‘As I observe this soul, it becomes larger and
    • In that book we come to recognise that as long as the clairvoyant, or so
    • soul. If you take all that into consideration, you will come to
    • come about specifically upon Earth. We know of course that man first
    • not become creators of the ego-consciousness. In this respect they
    • consciousness, which has now become subconscious, man looked outward
    • could come about that each one of your souls, now in your physical
    • bodies, were to leave them, were to become outspread in the widths of
    • their respective bodies again ... what would become of this unity?
    • soul-forces anchored in the astral body. These soul-forces have come
    • often represented as jealous. Jealousy can only come about where
    • from this isolation? Whence comes it that, although men's egos
    • through acquiring intellectual knowledge? Whence comes it that the
    • enable man to overcome this egotism, concentrated solely upon his
    • certain extent be overcome, that they can be released from the body.
    • Humanity will only become able to understand this tremendous truth in
    • come over from the Moon evolution, and from this union comes the man
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: Wonders of the World: Lecture 6
    Matching lines:
    • was yesterday? Why does anything become, why does not
    • date we are more perfect than we were earlier, it has come about
    • a fulness about it which comes nearer to expressing the truth than
    • than this being overcome by shame.
    • that it is also dependent upon forces which come from quite another
    • come about in human evolution as the achievement of time. But in
    • spiritual world, and has become a quite different being, a being
    • saga. Dionysos had to come from another direction from that of the
    • tragedy, a tragedy which would immediately come about if man,
    • come about if there were no egos in them, if their bodies were under
    • be so fashioned as would inevitably come about under the sole
    • which comes to us from Greek thought. That is what man would look
    • because he was to become the ego's first teacher.
    • skeletons such as men have today. The human body has become more
    • We must come to feel
    • it ignores the wondrous script of spiritual geology which comes
  • Title: Lecture: Wonders of the World: Lecture 7
    Matching lines:
    • own time we can come to know through Spiritual, or Occult Science; and
    • we have certainly seen how much of what we come to know today in quite
    • everything of which one can become conscious through a deeper insight
    • become instructed as to what cognition really is. For the study of
    • look to supply the answer to the question of how knowledge comes
    • astral body and ego, it can come to no viable theory of knowledge.
    • thinking. Knowledge does not come of itself. The human being has to
    • knowledge comes about as a result of work carried out by the brain.
    • mirror, that is where I am.’ He would soon become convinced
    • organisation. What becomes evident through the work of the brain is
    • this activity may become evident to the human being himself, in order
    • we see when as earthly men we become aware of what actually goes on
    • necessity a complex activity takes place in order that it can become
    • earthly man could come into existence, there had to be a preparation.
    • to become the reflecting apparatus for what the human being really
    • usually passes unnoticed. These challenges will have to become ruder
    • soul. It comes about when this very knowledge leads us on to
    • know oneself, one can come to know nothing but this process of
    • developing the passion which must come into play when the soul is
    • (to be born). When a man comes into the world today he is said ‘to
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: Wonders of the World: Lecture 8
    Matching lines:
    • Ordeals are what come upon a man whenever he tries to enter upon the
    • them full play, that he inevitably becomes impressed by the exoteric
    • our souls to be wasted. We come to realise that deep down in every
    • him out of their own body, their own substance. We come to feel:
    • which it feels as yet to be inadequate is bound to become ever
    • he was centuries ago on Earth. Then we come to a sentence which is
    • really not to be taken lightly. We come to the saying that knowledge
    • repay. And then there comes to us a thought which might well rob us
    • another side. We cannot come to know occult facts by pinning
    • age we come to still earlier periods of Earth evolution. But at the
    • physical body could come into existence, but they were not yet in
    • originating from the ether body has become since the time of Lemuria;
    • outcome of the Saturn, Sun and Moon evolutions; from among these we
    • becomes visible in the solution, so in a higher sense something of
    • would have come to an end as far as Earth evolution is concerned, a
    • not only that the forces which had come over from Saturn, Sun and
    • was once etheric and had become physical, is once more dissolved, is
    • again, again becomes visible.
    • dissolution comes about, how the Earth-impulses enter into the
    • streams continuously out of our heart — our heart, the outcome
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: Wonders of the World: Lecture 9
    Matching lines:
    • organisation. The complex human form has come into existence because
    • these forces, which come to expression pre-eminently in the formation
    • bull forces, so that they all become part of the original Phantom,
    • plumage is formed from without, and a feather can only come into
    • cannot become feather, because in the case of animals and men forces
    • one could say that every feather has the tendency to become a hair,
    • the feather from all sides; and every hair has the tendency to become
    • a feather, but does not become a feather because the forces which
    • then the human form as we have it today comes into being before us.
    • pictorial image, one of the great symbols which have come down to us
    • which were there as the outcome of earlier evolution, this new
    • become because it had been prepared for upon the Old Sun.
    • the ancient Sun planet come to life again, repeating in the present
    • materialistic science will one day come to learn once more the
    • come to understand the Mystery of Palestine.
    • looks closely at these currents it becomes clear that they contain
    • instrument is an organ in which part of the current which comes from
    • us from the cosmos, and the astrality in the human body which comes
    • is what is meant by the halo, that is what becomes visible to the
    • knowledge of the outer world comes about. Everything that we know of
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: Wonders of the World: Lecture 10
    Matching lines:
    • materialistic phase. And unless meanwhile man has become much more
    • has undergone many changes. Man has become very different. Far
    • come to consciousness as our thoughts about the world. But in ancient
    • Why has that come
    • to develop his present ego-consciousness. He has had to become
    • ego. To enable man to become strong as regards his ego-consciousness
    • for objective knowledge of the world our souls had to become weak,
    • there comes over him the feeling: ‘How hopelessly cut off from
    • into space the thinner our ideas become, and we find ourselves at
    • with the Goethean phrase, ‘to become one with the whole world,
    • to enlarge oneself to become a world’, then we must say:
    • then we do not come to a vacuum, we come rather to a condensed
    • wax strong and powerful, their will-nature comes to the fore. Whereas
    • but give way to them. Again and again we become gripped by a will of
    • order that at last man should come into existence. So when in the
    • esoteric life a man delves into his own inner being, he is overcome
    • comes from speaking, not speaking from the speech-organ. That is what
    • because when we press out into cosmic space we come into a region
    • or representations of the real gods; thus we come into a world which
    • which his ideas can attain, he himself can only come to
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: The Mission of Raphael in the Light of Spiritual Science
    Matching lines:
    • spiritual history of man. On closer observation it becomes evident that
    • brightly and then disappears again, becomes a member of the whole spiritual
    • All that the Greeks not only created but experienced as the outcome of
    • of the human soul were thereafter to become inward, to take
    • order that he might become conscious of the riddles of existence, but
    • The Marriage of the Virgin comes The Entombment; four
    • of the world of sense, and it then becomes part of history itself.
    • in the midst of an age when Christendom had, as it were, become heathenized
    • perfect; it does not come forth as a consuming and shattering element
    • takes a track under a mountain and is not seen until it once again comes
    • before Greek culture could become visible in this particular form, and
    • had conceived of in forms only, has now become inward; we see the inner
    • to come, because humanity is one complete organism. Thus Raphael's creations
    • life becomes our guide as we passed through the epochs of earthly existence.
    • time must come when Raphael's work will have long since faded and passed
    • a man for Raphael has become one of the basic elements in higher development
  • Title: Lecture: About Horses That Can Count and Calculate
    Matching lines:
    • a most complicated thing, and we shall come across extraordinary phenomena.
    • the tens, etc. In this way a whole system of reckoning becomes inwardly
    • so, he becomes incorporated within the mathematical automaton of the
    • become aware so strongly of the way in which the mathematical automaton
    • up to the point of being able to express something; the rest will come
  • Title: Lecture: The National Epics With Especial Attention to the Kalevala
    Matching lines:
    • epics of Homer, which have become the epics of Greece; of the legends
    • and military principles which come into consideration in the conduct
    • this national epic, the more clear does it become to us that we cannot
    • more remarkable do things become if we take in addition the Northern
    • increase till they become monstrous! And yet it is peculiar that while
    • become perfectly familiar with it.
    • That the humanity of the present day has come in the last hundreds and
    • use of intellect and reason. Man has become more independent by the
    • was experienced inwardly in the soul. Then indeed we come back to a
    • for when he is overcome, Kriemhilde remains behind; the treasure of
    • still be united, but which has withdrawn from man, which has become
    • consideration of the national epics becomes specially interesting when we
    • of it we come even to-day, when we inwardly detach it from the physical
    • sense body, into that condition of perception whereby we become aware
    • of super-sensible facts. We become aware of two kinds of super-sensible
    • we become aware of the super-sensible when we begin to know that we no
    • body in a living, active manner. And then we become aware of the following:
    • We become aware that what
    • perceive how the etheric body becomes a special, individual, egotistical
    • a complete familiarity with the physical body has it become possible
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Four Seasons/Archangels: Lecture I: The Michael Imagination
    Matching lines:
    • humanity, and these tests will become harder still. Many old forms of
    • which comes to pass all that manifests as wind and weather in the
    • souls. A man first observes it quite externally: when spring comes he
    • come to flower, how life everywhere springs up out of the soil. All
    • highest level. And then, when autumn comes, it withers and fades
    • away; and when winter comes it dies into the lap of the earth.
    • nature-beings who spend the winter there. Then, when spring comes,
    • but now, as spring advances and especially when summer comes on, they
    • When high summer has come, then out there in the periphery of the
    • fixed stars, and so on. When autumn comes, they turn towards the
    • earth. As they approach the earth, they become subject more and more
    • like a sensational novel but so that what it imparts becomes the
    • prepare our souls to become receptive to the activities that go on
    • comes with winter. And if during high summer we rise inwardly, in a
    • away of nature in our own inner being. For if a man becomes more
    • this only in the form it takes in nature; if he were to come only to
    • the events of autumn and winter draw on, when Michaelmas comes, he
    • draws near. This will come about if man can experience not only an
    • will come to realise how he has been living through a waking-sleep of
    • beings, and he will become aware of what this really
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Four Seasons/Archangels: Lecture II: The Christmas Imagination
    Matching lines:
    • atmosphere where the watery element comes to an end. Hence if we are
    • bringing Imagination and Inspiration to bear on it, one comes to
    • this warmth, which comes into the air
    • now we turn towards the inner part of the Earth, we come to the
    • season is sulphurised. Then we come at Michaelmas to the time when
    • become part of the being of the atmosphere.
    • something else comes to the fore during the deep winter season.
    • draws on, this combustion process comes to an end.
    • form; but the outcome of every combustion process is ash. And in
    • addition to the salt-formation, which comes from quite another
    • that in deep winter it becomes really a cosmic body, expressing
    • say, were to become an anatomist and were to study a bone, it would
    • acid, lime and so forth. But our flea anatomist would never come to
    • still be working on a miniature scale. The flea would never come to
    • permeated with spirituality. In winter the Earth does indeed become
    • of this the Earth in mid-winter is enabled not only to become rigid
    • however, would become a
    • itself everything seeks to become spherical (dark red); in this upper
    • disintegrate it, so that everything might become a flat
    • this were to come about, the Earth's
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Four Seasons/Archangels: Lecture III: The Easter Imagination
    Matching lines:
    • failure to distinguish between them comes from the standpoint
    • especially when March comes, the limestone becomes — we may say
    • but the remarkable thing is that it becomes full of eager desire. It
    • surely by now the Ahrimanic beings must have become clever enough to
    • the realm of the plants, and there it comes under the attraction of
    • able to become etheric beings, whereas they are now only astral
    • March comes on. They hope to change the whole Earth into a delicate
    • man in his whole organism would become more and more like the living
    • become more and more calcified. In this way he would transmute his
    • idea, would become a living Earth-being.
    • come to if under the influence of Ahriman he were to take up the
    • living limestone and thereby become gradually one with the
    • extreme. The other extreme is what man would come to if the Luciferic
    • camel and then like something else. When March comes, he sees in the
    • which tends always to loosen man from the Earth, and it has become an
    • look back in time, we come to something accomplished by the
    • him, so that he becomes a crude materialist, thinking and
    • natural processes, such as the timing of births, have come under
    • free from the Ahrimanic and takes no heed of it, having overcome it,
    • also how the Christ overcomes the force that seeks to draw the upper
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Four Seasons/Archangels: Lecture IV: The St. John Imagination
    Matching lines:
    • becomes constantly more active, more satisfied inwardly, and
    • feeling for it, he becomes one with all that is growing and
    • objective spirituality comes towards him from out of Nature's
    • comes to oneself and asks — How is it that these
    • the figure of Raphael comes before us. He comes in dramatic guise, as
    • there comes before us — to describe it in human terms, which
    • described must come in: the elemental spirits of the Earth must soar
    • feeling comes: You clouds of summer, radiant with Intelligence, in
    • this gold-woven, silver-sparkling raiment? It comes from that which
    • seeking to become the living growth of the following year.
    • come to the time of sprouting, springing life, we can no longer speak
    • human measure. Then you will come to feel that all this is a kind of
    • impression of the countenance and gaze of Uriel will come before you.
    • we come to perceive
    • conscience, which at the present time has become uncommonly feeble.
    • energy and so on. I have to speak in pictures that will come to life
    • Imagination will come to meet us. For the St. John Imagination is
    • Spirit-Father of everything around us. And now we behold the outcome
    • foundation of active spiritual being. The Heights become Mysteries,
    • the Depths become Mysteries, and man himself becomes a Mystery within
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Four Seasons/Archangels: Lecture V: The Working Together of the Four Archangels
    Matching lines:
    • which may come to us from the content of these pictures, then at the
    • same time there will come to us much that has been experienced
    • the book of Nostradamus, comes upon the sign of the Macrocosm:
    • processes become different directly they enter into the human
    • not true. Whatever enters the human being becomes different
    • the forces which come to us directly from above
    • the Earth, his forces stream up through the Earth and come to rest in
    • illuminating us so that we become possessors of human wisdom.
    • he comes to know how Raphael is active in human breathing.
    • education: the breathing system comes specially into activity
    • when at last we come to Michael, we have
    • his forces penetrate up through the Earth and live in all that comes
    • as we come round again to spring, up
    • staff of Mercury which now in the airy heights has become
    • let us take the words which have come down through the ages like
    • human nutrition, and there they become healing forces. Gabriel hands
    • on the nourishment to Raphael, and it then becomes a means of
    • human organism is interwoven with the secret of breathing, it becomes
    • undergo in the nutritive system itself: then we come to recognise the
    • on further there, they become not only a means of quenching hunger
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Fifth Gospel (1950): Lecture I
    Matching lines:
    • it — that in times to come the concept or idea of Christ
    • us turn our thought to the times before Christianity had come
    • will consider what has actually come to pass. This, of course,
    • science which since the time of Copernicus has become an
    • outcome of the Christian impulse. To maintain that these
    • contained in it. In other words, if Darwinian thought becomes
    • concepts that have become ingrained in us, to leave aside
    • past and gone, and the time has come when men must
  • Title: Fifth Gospel (1950): Lecture II
    Matching lines:
    • he comes into contact do not notice at all that he is in a
    • warming the Cosmos, as if this primal force of Love had come
    • men themselves in whom the transformation had come about,
    • within them a new understanding of what had, it is true, come
    • own and yet to come, they will find more understanding than is
    • pass into shadow, while the group-souls become radiant. All
    • when the Mystery of Golgotha took place. And then comes an
    • before one that what one should read comes out of the
    • of necessity to read something that mankind must come to know.
    • eclipse. And the external event becomes a symbolic expression
    • then there actually comes before the clairvoyant
    • And now comes a second mighty sign, whereby again there is
    • lived through it all but only now did they become
    • had come to them as their spiritual Teacher and had instructed
    • as it has now become — we must feel ourselves as those in
    • that times will come when it will be possible to speak of these
    • we are all of us children of the age. But a time will come in
    • mind, such a time will come. For this reason it is a certain
    • preparation. And although I have had to overcome a certain
    • speak of having overcome reluctance, please take this exactly
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Fifth Gospel (1950): Lecture III
    Matching lines:
    • Power which Christ Himself had now come to be. And here we have
    • worlds beyond the earth, from super-earthly spheres He had come
    • A higher, non-earthly Being comes down into the earth-sphere
    • power to become the spiritual guardian of his people, whose
    • activity of a single people. And just as one who was to become
    • experiences, so too, he who was to become a Sun-Hero must pass
    • for men to rise up to Christ, Christ had now come down to the
    • Apostles. And the Apostles, in a certain respect, had become
    • outcome? It was the outcome of infinite suffering —
    • Things have come to such a pass that in the simplest matters
    • experience comes to us, we know that the suffering has its
    • For just think what has been the outcome of it all in the
    • gist of it. Perhaps in time to come the world will be
    • life been as Renan describes it! But in times to come it will
    • be recognised that such a description becomes null and void in
    • being — that is to say, what comes to manifestation in
    • the physical body of a man. What man becomes on earth reflects
    • unceasing pain becomes aware that the body is steadily
    • stage the Christ had become Man, had become human, had
    • same measure did the Christ become Man. The miraculous,
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Fifth Gospel (1950): Lecture IV
    Matching lines:
    • to come the voice of the same Spirit who had inspired the
    • had in many respects actually come to the point of taking the
    • blessing of the god might come upon them. While this was
    • the occasion I have described. When Jesus of Nazareth had come
    • Nazareth had become one who gazed deeply into the mysteries of
    • knowledge that is wisdom, but had in a certain sense become an
    • these gifts. The Essene Order, therefore, had come within the
    • of the wisdom that had come to flower in the soul of Jesus of
    • fulfilled to the uttermost, men would all have to become
    • with the Essene Order had come about in quite a different way
    • deeply into the soul — they become part of the soul's
    • these experiences had come to Jesus of Nazareth, mutual
  • Title: Fifth Gospel (1950): Lecture V
    Matching lines:
    • come over him. The first fruit of this wisdom had been
    • change had come about in him. And now he often felt: Ah! how
    • community of the Essenes and had there become acquainted with a
    • were to come to-day — so said Jesus of Nazareth —
    • respect — Hillel, come out, come out quickly! Hillel
    • called out gruffly: Hillel, come out, I have something to ask
    • gruffly for the third time: Hillel, come out, I have something
    • Hillel that he is like an ancient prophet who has come again.
    • does not come from Judaism alone. And in fact Hillel was born
    • possible nor is it meet for all men to become Essenes. Hillel
    • she felt as if her very being had become one with his. And
    • aware of something like the climax of the change that had come
    • Zarathustra-Ego. Thus the spirit of the other mother had come
    • just come down to the Earth. To begin with, He was drawn to the
    • harm will come to thee! Ahriman said: I will keep thee from
    • bread alone, but by the spiritual forces which come from the
    • first time come to earth could not yet know. He did not know
    • what had become old and withered in humanity. He was
    • already been among them. They had come to know His gentle,
    • to speak of the man who as Jesus of Nazareth had come among
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: The (Four) Great Virtues
    Matching lines:
    • it becomes particularly holy to us at such a moment as this. Through
    • from those sources from which knowledge of the spirit comes to us, it
    • can be said that these souls have become faithful fellow-workers with
    • way there comes the moment after death when the soul feels: that
    • at those who have become attached to our spiritual movement here, and
    • spiritual movement, of which we are to become part, has to bring a
    • death. Among the many things which should come about through our
    • Mystery wisdom has become so remote and so chaotic.
    • comes to man of its own accord; still less can it in the ordinary
    • Saturn, Sun and Moon and have come into our lives as a heritage,
    • part. Hands are on the way to become what the brain is already. In
    • through more stages of evolution. The hands are on the way to become
    • similar to the brain, for the whole man is on the way to become a
    • skull which looks like a tree. When we have become wise, when we have
    • become wisdom, we find ourselves in fact under a ‘tree,’
    • how a man who has become especially wise stretches out the organs of
    • in German a good expression for a man who refuses to become wise. We
    • who seeks to become wise makes the effort to carry over the work
    • incarnations. The wiser we become, the more we bring over from
    • become wise, so that we leave barren the wisdom developed in earlier
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Tension Between East and West: Lecture 1: Natural Science
    Matching lines:
    • we may say — science has increasingly come to dominate
    • modern man that we come up against two paradoxes, as I should
    • Under these conditions, what has become of human thinking? It
    • has actually become the servant, the mere tool of research.
    • Thought as such has really nothing to contribute when it comes
    • into with the world. It has become a purely formal aid for
    • science approach thinking? that we come up
    • processes themselves. It thus becomes paradoxical to
    • become seriously involved with the research methods both
    • What it comes to is this: taking our stand on the ground of
    • come down to later epochs in a thoroughly decadent and
    • process of respiration. Ordinary respiration does not become
    • content itself becomes a matter of complete indifference, and
    • come to know what once had a semblance nature in us — as
    • become conscious of an external world rhythm. If I may express
    • becomes a vitalized thinking. This is the significant
    • processes in the animal. Because our thought has now become a
    • example becomes for vital thinking an experience about total
    • life. In vital thinking, accordingly, we come to know that, if
    • transform all its other organs. Thought becomes vital simply
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Tension Between East and West: Lecture 2: Psychology
    Matching lines:
    • the riddles of existence touch the human soul, they become not only
    • great problems in life, but life itself. They become the happiness
    • experience of happiness or sorrow he becomes fit or unfit for life.
    • question of the fate of his soul becomes for him a
    • plethora of phenomena and experiences. And these become
    • experiences obtrude so much that they become even conscious,
    • us dejected, so that at no point can we properly come to
    • unconscious awareness of it affects his soul, man is overcome
    • into our body; we inform our organs of will with it and become
    • it informs our muscles, and how finally there comes about what
    • varied attempts have certainly been made to overcome this
    • spring from them. In this way, experimental psychology has come
    • is here that the other enigma of the soul comes in. However
    • come a moment in life when we say to ourselves: When I was a
    • world, and to become a capable being. Out of the
    • today, and by which I orientate myself in life and become a
    • then become clairvoyant powers in the sense in which I spoke
    • have previously called dead and abstract thinking, becomes
    • dead organism suddenly come to life. And although this vital
    • not become; for it could not provide us with a firmly
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Tension Between East and West: Lecture 3: East and West in History
    Matching lines:
    • forces that may come to the surface at any point, and may throw
    • come more and more to be what I would call symptomatological.
    • them; but they cannot possibly become memories for him in the
    • become memories.
    • experience inwardly on seeing our thoughts become
    • spiritual vision: It is complete, it has now become part of
    • situation in which we only become sufficiently attentive when
    • my lectures, other features will become apparent. Today, I
    • first become ripe. We cannot of our own volition do
    • that has come of age in human civilization since the days of
    • inevitably becomes a part of us; we refine what we absorb with
    • language as part of our common heritage until it becomes a
    • equilibrium becomes increasingly unstable and the
    • towards living things. And as the equilibrium becomes more
    • comprehension of living things, we also come closer to what was
    • with Aristotle — does thought become separated from
    • abilities. What you were to become as a scientist you achieved
    • suffering which we have to overcome in order that our whole
    • self may become a sense-organ or spiritual organ; and we
    • Europe. But when we become at home in his mind and in what he
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Tension Between East and West: Lecture 4: Spiritual Geography
    Matching lines:
    • symbolically by saying that light comes from the East.
    • his philosophy of life (which has since come down to his
    • comes to us from the Orient. In other respects again, we are
    • embodiment of universal spirituality; it becomes just as
    • experiences. From them, we retain thought-images, which become
    • reverse comes about: in empty consciousness, as a result of
    • have developed; the world about us becomes spiritual, just as
    • really are within us will become for us a replica in the
    • of this spiritual world exist in our own organs. We come to
    • life I have outlined. This philosophy has become old and
    • moved in these spheres will have come across the phenomenon I
    • not yet come (it is more than twenty years ago now): to
    • overcome even in science; yet it has a wide following
    • actuality, the life of man's soul becomes an image of it. The
    • gradually becomes a mere image, to be recognized as a
    • the impulse to do so must come from us. The same is true of
    • element, becomes for us an impulse of freedom. It is a
    • meaning of the world had to become “ideology” for
    • that has become generally familiar today and that is also
    • who have become disciples of Buddha, have looked at the body
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Tension Between East and West: Lecture 5: Cosmic Memory
    Matching lines:
    • soon as we become aware of the need to consider man as a
    • become active — that part of us which is beyond clear and
    • once again, human knowledge is limited when it comes to looking
    • come from outside. He cannot therefore be so constituted that
    • our humanity, that we should there come up against the concepts
    • it can become capable of developing further and creating that
    • is this? It is because at this point there must come into
    • on our being as it becomes a living thing.
    • that comes of love. In super-sensible cognition, the self is
    • moves forward to the spiritual sphere, and we now come up
    • extent that the whole man becomes a kind of sense-organ, or
    • rather spirit-organ — becomes, that is, as transparent in
    • dim. Our entire human nature must come to be like this, on the
    • spiritual plane. Our entire being, soul and spirit, must become
    • to be a very concrete one. We come to know the place of the
    • become entirely valueless on that account. For the truth in
    • this way we come to know man, and to say to ourselves: what the
    • when we really come to know this inner organism, this is what
    • him. With equal justification, we shall come to regard the
    • surges and creates in man the liquid being. We shall come to
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Tension Between East and West: Lecture 6: Individual and Society
    Matching lines:
    • does he become conscious of his freedom. To all mental
    • into areas where the instincts have become uncertain. We thus
    • have become more mature. Only now do we understand it and bring
    • their words that comes from life itself, from experience of the
    • These powers of cognition become conscious as man develops into
    • the spiritual organism or “sense-organ” he becomes
    • not theory but life may also come out in the skill and tact of
    • four centuries intellectualism has come of age, so much
    • becomes a natural scientist, what he absorbs impels his spirit
    • Modern man lacks such inspiration, however, when he comes to
    • and concepts only in order that they may become as vital within
    • become apparent to people when many of those who, only a
  • Title: Tension Between East and West: Lecture 7: The Individual Spirit and the Social Structure
    Matching lines:
    • certain autocracy becomes apparent, a system of administration
    • affairs he has to manage. This comes out most clearly when we
    • political system. The individual who comes to the affairs of
    • phenomenon that has become particularly important in very
    • Decadent as it has become in the East, everything that can
    • What they were actually asserting we again become capable of
    • super-sensible worlds, we come to know what I expounded in my
    • become — in the Greek sense, it is true — wise men,
    • itself in social configurations. The priest gradually becomes
    • Darius and Xerxes. There comes to the fore a mode of thinking
    • becomes the logos of the Occident; and from the
    • legal one becomes increasingly predominant.
    • we come to modern times. We can say: in earlier periods,
    • this point, however, we become aware of something that must
    • element has become more independent; and that now, in the
    • human activity have come to the fore, they have come into
    • here, where so much has come together and may be studied,
    • thinking to come to terms properly, for reasons I have
    • history now co-exist. They have now become shuffled
    • even if — and here comes the tail-piece characteristic of
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Tension Between East and West: Lecture 8: The Problem (Asia-Europe)
    Matching lines:
    • statement as striking precisely because it comes from Herman
    • When we come to examine the basic character of spiritual life
    • Light comes from the East. What is most striking of all,
    • usually interpreted. He means in fact, as we come to perceive,
    • overcome by fear; and that a purification or catharsis
    • is no longer overcome by fear when he has to go outside himself
    • individuals who could become leaders in the social sphere. Only
    • emphasized as significant when we come to describe the source
    • can experience this once again when we come across views that
    • become available, simply through the temper of soul that
    • war, you will gradually come to see that labour as such cannot
    • man and man, so that what the other man needs becomes part of
    • individual profession. Once this social system comes into being
    • their own profession uninteresting. It may have become so,
    • perhaps. There must come a time, once more, when every detail
    • of life becomes of interest. Whereas formerly what was
  • Title: Tension Between East and West: Lecture 9: Prospects of its Solution (Europe-America)
    Matching lines:
    • have become so clever, if I may so express it, that it is
    • to come close to his real self.
    • become possible to discover man within the social order —
    • his work-people, so that he comes close to them by really
    • sixteenth century onwards, there have increasingly come into
    • needs. Mankind has had to become resigned about
    • hankerings of this kind, it has come about — as
    • as human beings. Man can come to know man only when, looking
    • when the worker comes straight from the machine.
    • but by attempting to come close to man. Then, you will see
    • instincts and the like become spiritualized, and you feel
    • is exactly the same. And that is how you come to realize that
    • world-wide social rapprochement is to come about.
    • This will come about if we can create a rapprochement
    • Nothing can come to fruition which has not first been cast into
  • Title: Tension Between East and West: Lecture 10: From Monolithic to Threefold Unity
    Matching lines:
    • become conscious of the direction in which mankind is really
    • decades, we become aware that in fact the essentials of the
    • decomposition. And man owes a great deal to them. To overcome
    • invention or discovery come about? then you have to look into
    • life, you will come to see that, because spiritual life has its
    • become increasingly apparent in recent decades. It is the
    • out of the depths of its being, to become more and more
    • them and becomes an empty form. And then they say: This empty
    • you,” and that they will then come to some agreement
    • reason; and the “historical law” that has come into
    • that a life may come about that shall infuse the meaning of
    • economic life, what may come about cannot be determined by the
    • something that will have to become practical wisdom, that truly
    • that inform the social structures; economic associations come
    • becomes increasingly abstract. What mankind acquires in one
    • our age, where common sense is so commonplace, men can come
    • regulations, even they would no doubt come up with something
    • develops are all right when they are the outcome of
    • itself the germ of what are later to become forces of decline.
    • abstractness that has become increasingly apparent in
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: Pythic, Prophetic and Spiritual-Scientific Clairvoyance
    Matching lines:
    • thereby become aware you were following your nerve-paths, and the etheric
    • would experience this inner self-enjoyment. But man, as he has become,
    • bliss in people when they become clairvoyant in this way, that is when
    • breath, as the sun's rays come to us. Therefore what now on earth is
    • has now fallen from him what was outside him on the old Moon has become
    • must recede when it has reached a certain point. It will then come to
    • for me: This also will come in time, for it is a necessity of evolution.
    • his physical body. The longing for one's physical body becomes ever
    • Perceptions become dim because desire for the physical body pervades
    • this life of desire becomes so strong during sleep, that man not merely
    • he becomes greedy to such an extent that he partially seizes on this
    • future, can come neither by enjoying what penetrates our body from within
    • we come to what we can call: the clairvoyance of spiritual
    • are members of our souls, so man must become, as it were, a thought,
    • now saying might become very definitely the subject of your further
    • one may perhaps become proud and haughty. When this is the case opinions
  • Title: Lecture: Pythic, Prophetic and Spiritual-Scientific Clairvoyance
    Matching lines:
    • and would thereby become aware that you were following your
    • he has become, may not have this enjoyment, and the secret of why
    • when they become clairvoyant in this way, that is, when they
    • breath, as the sun's rays come to us. Therefore what now on earth
    • outside him on the old Moon has become inward, as the circulation
    • has reached a certain point. It will then come to pass that when
    • is finished for me.” This also will come in time, for it is a
    • physical body becomes ever greater and greater in the state of
    • cloud, the life of thought is dimmed. Perceptions become dim
    • desire becomes so strong during sleep that man not merely develops
    • becomes greedy to such an extent that he partially seizes on this
    • towards the future, can come neither by enjoying what penetrates
    • we come to what we can call the Clairvoyance of Spiritual
    • thoughts are members of our souls, so man must become, as it were,
    • very definitely become the subject of your further meditations, for
    • clairvoyance — because of this one may perhaps become proud and
  • Title: St. Augustine
    Matching lines:
    • views:« only those who come later can see these. One must
    • say that it is always reserved for those who come
    • absolute dogmas. We must be quite clear that those who come
    • comes when one is truly conscious of what one experiences
    • Man.” To-day we must admit: The belief that one can come
    • whole Macrocosm, you come to something else. You come to that
    • “Death is suffering.” It becomes an axiom with the
    • Buddha, that suffering must be overcome, A means must be found
    • which Buddha turns, in order to come to something which for
    • away from the corpse; and then comes the Christ-symbol, the
    • one does not come to understand this life of Birth in the
    • age is has, however, become important, far more important than
    • life. Consciousness has become more important than life,
    • Sun, from which comes the living into Death and not the life of
    • earthly development which has now become the most important
    • thing was to recognise the origin of Life, it has now become
    • Inner Being, does man come to see the Spiritual Reality
    • added to this inner experience does man come to a really firm
    • simply a germ, will become a fruit which animates our next
    • a reality like the external world. We should never become free.
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: The Social Question and Theosophy
    Matching lines:
    • especially for people who have connected themselves and come to
    • the related thought of the separation of labor and income.”
    • immediately become clear for everyone, arise out of a mere idea
    • has come up with theories that are impotent regarding life. The
    • to think at all, and just as no one can become a mathematician
    • life today has come to be. One who looks more closely at life
    • to mind again and again. In Prussia, someone who has an income
    • how many people in Prussia have an income of less than 800 or
    • income. Take England. Only those who have an income over
    • income? It is what we give them for what they do for us. We are
    • mouth for nourishment, where it comes from, only then will you
    • and this is because in large measure they have come to
    • centuries—have come to these demands. At this point the
    • Theosophical world conception comes in with practical
    • this. In a certain way everything that is to come about in the
    • grave closes over us we will all be and become equal. What the
    • perspective of the macrocosm we come to tremendous implications
    • some influence. Then it becomes practical, then it is
    • circumstances. The human being has come to this because he has
    • being becomes what the environment makes of him, that
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Architectural Forms
    Matching lines:
    • have become for it an absolute necessity; they have become a
    • philosophy. A great tide in art can only come from a profound
    • With this hasty survey, certainly inexact, we come to modern
    • And we see how there comes about, under this influence, the
    • wish to reduce itself ad absurdum new impulses must come
    • And the sounds of life come welling
    • mankind, and have come to the following conclusion —
  • Title: Goethe's Secret Revelation: Lecture I
    Matching lines:
    • thought has become so important for a large part of our modern
    • himself on the other hand up to the point where he comes into touch
    • ‘Lord Jesus, come and be our Guest.’ The picture lives not only in
    • picture — ‘Lord Jesus, come and be our Guest.’ In
    • all raised from the floor on a dais, and now when you had come in
    • with the emotional thought ‘Lord Jesus, come and be our
    • come remarkable forms — Will-o'-the-Wisps. They want to be
    • being comes along to them — the Green Snake, who crawls in
    • therefore devours them and becomes, by thus taking the golden
    • pieces into her own body, more and more luminous. As she comes to
    • Now the Snake and the Will-o'-the-Wisps come together, the
    • the Snake moreover if she could not inform them how to come
    • wanted to come to the Beautiful Lily. If we could only find a
    • ‘Whence comest thou?’
    • Lamp. He is asked why he comes at that moment, whereupon he says
    • he may also come in with his wonderworking Lamp.
    • And now come the most significant words of the whole
    • Now we come to a very significant point in the story. As
    • become black and smaller. ‘Now it only looks like it,’
    • might become a fact. The hand will gradually dwindle and finally
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Goethe's Secret Revelation: Lecture II
    Matching lines:
    • what is to become our knowledge is continually dependent on our
    • state to his present position, and that we must come to a deeper
    • otherwise that which is objective would become clouded, and that
    • show how concerned the theory of the soul is to overcome the
    • is asked where we should come to if not only what the eyes see and
    • become objective. The man who has not yet developed in himself by
    • basis of knowledge (not the feeling as it is, but as it can become by
    • a man it becomes gradually clear that there are things deeper than
    • that man must overcome certain things if he wishes to receive these
    • Green Snake? The Snake, after taking it, becomes internally luminous!
    • abstraction with something they come across as soul-power, this is,
    • lack something which must be present when it comes to the real
    • one direction or another, it becomes harmful. This abstraction leads
    • in what the Will-o'-the-Wisps represent. What they contain can become
    • another way, will become extremely fruitful in the human soul. When
    • through the rocks, are absorbed by the Snake which thereby becomes
    • would become an empty picture, killing all life, as the gold, thrown
    • soul, however, does not itself become capable of crossing into the
    • the mineral, vegetable and animal kingdoms. But now comes the fourth
    • someone wished to cross; but now she will become a permanent bridge,
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Goethe's Secret Revelation: Lecture III
    Matching lines:
    • for a human life to become fruitful for the rest of humanity in a
    • more beautiful, harmonious way, or indeed to become fruitful in a
    • longing lying deep in his soul and inner life which had become
    • who to a certain degree, had become unshackled and who had a very
    • a world which had long become rooted within him. A world of which
    • And now Faust's personality becomes a being placed between two
    • world which drags him down. Faust becomes a being placed
    • seen as a man doubting all knowledge, he now comes before us as one
    • his own inner experience. The time will come when Goethe's Faust
    • fire which should have come from the foundation and source of life
    • that has come down to us from the past from those who declare that
    • which is not the outcome of mockery and scorn Goethe learnt to know
    • So Goethe comes before us with, on the one side, faculty
    • significance and had become a living problem for poets, especially
    • the bench, and wishes to hear no more of Theology, as he has become
    • ripen and bear fruit very much later, in years to come. We see too
    • pictures, without even a guess of what they will become in the
    • general life and stream of the world man comes to be and increases.
    • stage of existence. But all know what comes to pass: Faust does not
    • become for the people of the North. In Italy he became particularly
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Goethe's Secret Revelation: Lecture IV
    Matching lines:
    • comes. Therefore, in the scene where at the beginning of Part
    • some meaning, becomes for Faust the expression of the fact that one
    • is transfigured in the night, as it at first becomes clairvoyant in
    • clairvoyant human being comes into the spiritual world. At first it
    • come over anyone who really knows these things and does not merely
    • knows already where to look for it, whence it comes, when it
    • the tie is formed, when the spirit comes into the physical world.
    • comes into being, assisted as it were by the spiritual world. Much
    • The Homunculus wishes to find out from them how one can come to be,
    • body is formed by degrees round him. Finally comes the moment of
    • world, he loses his qualities, the ego becomes his
    • eludes him yet again. He has become capable of living in the
    • and storerooms where lie the old helmets, come those beings
    • certain way into the spiritual world, comes to man and tries to
    • overcome, Goethe points out through Mephistopheles in such a way
    • overcome this personal egoism, can really reach the last stage,
    • overcome. And again we see from a spiritual point of view deep,
    • Faust has become a selfless man up to a point. He has
    • four Grey Women. They come up near to him. Three of them, Want,
    • with him into it any trace of egoism, Care comes and reveals itself
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: World History: Lecture I: Evolution of the Soul and of Memory
    Matching lines:
    • help us to become more intimately conscious of the nature and
    • How has it come about through the long course of evolution?’
    • For it cannot be denied that the present only becomes
    • fancies, and that man has only really become clever in the
    • Cosmic universe; the activities that come forth from herself
    • Cosmic Universe; he had become one with the Cosmos. And this
    • earth, he had become one with it with his head. To-day he
    • have now come to the time when, not from any conscious, subtle
    • again a heritage come down from the time when rhythmic memory
    • the beat of the human heart. Then we come to a still more
  • Title: World History: Lecture II: Mysteries of 'Asia'
    Matching lines:
    • There below was this realm that for us has become the earthly
    • the language that has become current with us in
    • now comes the fourth realm where human beings live, the realm
    • were to come among them with your consciousness of the
    • continually active within us — and are overcome
    • I cannot endure it. My consciousness will not become reflective
    • had already become decadent. The younger nation went out
    • lightning could become manifest.
    • as Divine will. And the Initiate, who saw the lightning come
    • come into a right relation with what they felt and experienced
  • Title: World History: Lecture III: Asiatic Mysteries of Ephesus, Gilgamesh and Eabani
    Matching lines:
    • of thought and feeling that has come about in the course of
    • him, penetrate him and become part of him. In that earlier age,
    • his soul and spirit and becomes — if I may put it so
    • the other individuality who had now also come to that city we
    • impulses whereby man himself is able to come into a certain
    • whereby he might be able to come to an experience concerning
    • have we become what we are? What share have we had in the
    • evolution of the Earth? We have become what we are through the
    • embodiments, saw approaching them, that which later has become
    • could become living Ideas in them, a far-spread vision, showing
    • later did it sink down into the soil and become what is known
  • Title: World History: Lecture IV: Atlantean Wisdom in the Mysteries of Hibernia, Gilgamish and Eabani at Ephesus, Logos Mysteries of Artemis at Ephesus
    Matching lines:
    • its course. If one seeks to come further in the direction of
    • I then said before we can come to a clear and full
    • Mysteries was that the pupil should learn to become aware in
    • come thus to a time in his life when he despairs of Being and
    • Cosmos, then he must become in his whole being a sense-organ,
    • Hibernia, and continued so to come until the first centuries of
    • the region of speech, comes into vibration and vibrates in
    • And the pupil of Ephesus, when he spoke, felt an insight come
    • still akin to the old understanding of all that had come to
    • Springtime comes, you go out into the woods. You come to
    • in Spring spiritual flower-children come forth from the calices
    • Alexander comes to the very gates of Paradise. Translated
    • Aristotle and Alexander. Even externally the tragedy comes to
    • the writings of Aristotle have come into Western Europe, and
    • plants, animals and human beings come forth to new life on the
    • Theophrastus did not let the writings come westwards that
  • Title: World History: Lecture V: Mysteries of the East, West, and of Ephesus
    Matching lines:
    • has come about through the breathing of human beings, we can
    • from himself this plant-world. Imagine that you were to become
    • comes from the Earth. But the whole plant-nature as such has
    • his way rightly and come to his true place on the Earth by
    • put quite simply in a few words. The human being comes hither
    • not come into consideration; for, as I said yesterday, they
    • becomes the plant-world separates off from man, the Earth
    • he had pushed it away from him, in order that he might become
    • the Mysteries had changed and the time was come when man began
    • appear in the Mysteries, and men would come thither to be
    • opportunity should come again when those Divinities should once
    • overcome. You have had to leave it behind. You must look back
    • become Man. To feel oneself one with the Macrocosm: this was an
    • for in the East generally the Mysteries had already become
    • was in Alexander the Great had come into close contact with the
    • however has Sophocles come forward when man begins to tear
    • now we come to one of those historical events of which people
    • had come to them in Ephesus. We might say that the whole of
    • come again into contact with the Mystery of Ephesus, bearing
    • Ephesus was finally put out the light that had come over from
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: World History: Lecture VI: Mysteries of the Ancient Near East Enter Europe
    Matching lines:
    • I had to describe the different worlds that come under consideration
    • Present-day mankind would never have come into being if Asia
    • now comes a new period. It is in the early dawn of this new
    • have now come to the period when the man of the West, beginning
    • transition from what comes earlier to what comes later. The
    • Soul-world one were to come thence into the physical world. In
    • on oral tradition. Later it comes to rely rather on external
    • end of the seventies, did there come, as it were, a new call to
    • become sub-human, he simply cannot maintain himself on the
    • they were and come into Middle and Southern Europe. Men would,
    • Alexander. Only later in a diluted form did they come over into
    • and a number more, to receive that which had come thither by many
    • in meditation — only in the 19th century has it come
    • movements of man — something is born that then comes
    • this part into the head, and there becomes insight and
    • wisdom that had come to new life in such men as Basil Valentine
    • to come, that so they might endure until such time as new
    • who have come here for this Christmas Meeting, — I
    • do not believe, my dear friends, that this can come to pass in
  • Title: World History: Lecture VII: The Fifteenth Century and the Transition from Mind-Soul to Spiritual-Soul
    Matching lines:
    • nature of the Universe. They knew that we can only come to a
    • perhaps come and show you a piece of coal, a piece of black
    • to these physical forces of the Earth, the forces that come
    • come from the whole environment of the Earth, from the far
    • in complicate combination. And so the atomist comes to see in
    • animal comes to birth from it, arising, that is, purely through
    • split up and destroyed, it comes under the influence of the
    • that is, into cosmic dust and thereby fitted to become exposed
    • comes into being as an image of the whole Universe.
    • adapted to the whole cosmic ether. It comes to the assistance
    • the shape of the cells. They are like this and here comes
    • aid of silicic acid. There you have forces that come from the
    • that is capable of reproduction comes to birth a minute image
    • the forces that come from the centre of the Earth and the
    • forces that come in from every direction from the circumference
    • through some circumstance become too strongly affected by the
    • will in consequence become diseased, for a certain harmony and
    • reverse may also happen. The etheric forces may become too
    • ceases to be albumen in any sense, becomes entirely mineral in
    • action; in the human organism they become different from what
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: World History: Lecture VIII: The Burning of the Ephesian Temple and the Goetheanum
    Matching lines:
    • there is a word, — a word that has come down to us
    • Among the many and diverse words that have come down to us from
    • when we come to our own time, then that which in earlier ages
    • will come when your physical body will be received by the Earth
    • would come to them, to one in one way, to another in another;
    • They found a way to foster what had come down to them from
    • ready to become the bearer of the renewal of spiritual life, in
  • Title: World History: Lecture IX: World History in the Light of Anthroposophy
    Matching lines:
    • this kind, one becomes attentive to the fact that something is
    • responsibility comes to one. The souls approaching the Guardian
    • what a man has become through them in modern civilisation
    • these ideas he can enter the spiritual world but not come forth
    • man to enter the spiritual world but he can only come out of it
    • incarnations, the Earth will become barbaric. Human beings will
    • individual who becomes a doctor to-day really longs for
    • later on perhaps, they will come to us, and because they have
    • come to Anthroposophy!
    • passed the ruins during the Meeting will have become aware of
    • following thought will have become a reality to them: Spiritual
    • come into being in the future, for the blessing of mankind,
    • will come into being through our activity and devotion. And the
    • become aware of and avow your obedience to this voice from the
    • our thoughts to this work and become conscious of the
    • vigorous, light-filled Anthroposophical Society will come into
    • become for us a festival of consecration not only of a year's
    • Comes to being
    • In Christ, Death becomes Life.
    • That good may become
  • Title: Purpose of the Goetheanum and Anthroposophy
    Matching lines:
    • Anthroposophy has been able to come into being through a logic
    • gratitude for what has come into the world through Goethe.
    • anything to become fixed in the minds of the public,
    • of the dream, While remaining in the dream, we can come to no
    • the sense-world comes knowledge about the dream?
    • good, there comes today from the soul-depths a living knowledge
    • How, then, do representations come about? and how is the
    • an aliveness which one must first come to know before an
    • opinion can be formed about it. But when anyone does come to
    • continue to use becomes stronger; in exactly the same way the
    • way, streams into thinking that has thus become active.
    • more in this way comes at last — it may be even years
    • way I have described, we finally come to the point where we
    • that when we draw from this deeper level, we come to concepts
    • contributed to the experience, what has come out of himself. In
    • can really speak of a time-body, for a man becomes aware
    • flowing movement. Only now does he come to know what an etheric
    • is solved — for the warmth and enthusiasm come not from
    • obliterating them again, something comes over the soul that I
    • thought-life, by means of which he comes to self-knowledge in
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Goethe, Comte and Bentham
    Matching lines:
    • astral body and the ego, do not really come to the consciousness of
    • man by day; in his waking condition there only comes to his
    • could thus become conscious through his sleeping condition, he
    • and Astral body; and that he cannot become conscious that all the
    • This feeling of inner freedom is what comes clearest of all to man's
    • consciousness by day; and it comes to man by day when he is awake,
    • into the whole human stream of evolution, (and which comes from the
    • becomes clear to us that in the 5th Post Atlantean epoch man
    • is something of which men would become aware, if he were intensely
    • connection with the Beings of the third Hierarchy. That comes from
    • to-day constitutes our ideals will become Nature in the next epoch.
    • given for the Ideals of modern humanity to become the external
    • by men in olden times, and of which they still knew, there come
    • There must come the concept of Truth of Anthroposophy; a concept
    • Saint-Simon, because gradually Saint-Simon had become too mystical;
    • soil of this Ahrimanic Science; and yet they become mystics!
    • out of which humanity comes. The great Being, the last person in
  • Title: Whitsuntide in the Course of the Year
    Matching lines:
    • more complete consciousness appear. We become conscious to
    • that we come to feel man's renewed connection with the cosmos
    • initiation we become conscious of what is all the time being
    • alive, and the more conscious we become the more do we insert
    • make winter within us if we wish to become conscious. Thus we
    • Earth-spirit, then we come to the following conclusion - that
    • The moment the soul goes forth, the body becomes the world, a
    • physical world without destroying nature, so we cannot become
    • death; were not physical death to come about, in the
    • realised how the budding and sprouting that comes forth with
    • recede. But this will become clear to us, my dear friends,
    • hear that to become spiritual the trees must first decay,
    • unless a deepening comes about in the world through spiritual
    • anthroposophist must become conscious of this new thing.
    • was in olden times, what it must again become — a
    • comes, when the Earth-spirit sleeps, we must find the strength
  • Title: Meditation and Concentration
    Matching lines:
    • distinguished. People who strive to come to a perception of
    • to become free in
    • experiences become tinged with colour and sound, for the
    • The colour will then become paler — and if we extend it
    • still further, the colour will become ever paler and paler,
    • yellow here (at the extremity,) it would become a strong,
    • opulent mid-day meal, and become clairvoyant, but clairvoyant
    • can become, and how one should hold oneself far removed from
    • connected with the results of head-clairvoyance. Man becomes
    • thought's own life. Each thought becomes a being. One thought
    • As soon as we develop body free thoughts, each thought becomes
    • becomes the stage for the activities of the higher
    • Spiritual science has come. As human beings under the
    • the spiritual world, that a spiritual age would come after a
    • against what is to enter humanity. Spiritual forces come down
    • had come ‘The time has come’: this saying from
  • Title: Tree of Knowledge and the Christmas Tree
    Matching lines:
    • has come into humanity.
    • beings and objects. He then becomes a being shut up within
    • obtained once for all; rather does goodness come only through
    • The spirit-self will only come into prominence in the sixth age of
    • comes into relationship with them. All this is brought about
    • apathy: in this direction we become immoral. Thus we see that
    • comes from the fire when we light a stove, so it is true that
    • interest in humanity and the world comes when we study
    • Moon, and the meaning of Karma and so on. It really comes
    • knowledge comes something which in a radical manner must be
    • friends for a long time and then suddenly there comes a
    • shall gradually disappear and that man shall become
    • what man once possessed as instinctive wisdom may now become
    • the word truth, for as we have now become more
    • has everywhere become a quality of the age; it is impossible
    • gradually come about in our life of thought. The speed of
    • that comes with a materialistic age, is opposed to truth. In
    • Christ-impulse, has become the special virtue of the
    • will become feeling. Through the Mystery of Golgotha Christ
    • significant statement of love, and this statement must become
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Karma of Vocation: Lecture I
    Matching lines:
    • Goethe's father had come to Frankfurt in the seventeenth
    • hands, as if playing mythological roles, become soul-endowed,
    • independent figures. They become Thumbling, Pointerling — I
    • become entangled in varied situations through which he
    • that period. Early on, he becomes a self-sustained personality,
    • this regard, he was able to become acquainted with men then in
    • universal nature. Earlier in Frankfurt he had become acquainted
    • activities, however, always come about in such a way that he
    • himself completely therein. Then he becomes involved in another
    • South Germany, he becomes involved in the peasant uprising. All
    • cultured world surrounding Goethe. People had become bound, as
    • it were, to what had come about since the sixteenth century. In
    • figure of Werther he concealed to such a degree as to come near
    • captured by his environment. We often become acquainted with
    • comes into form as the unit, this he allowed to work upon
    • of logic. In neither is he free. He becomes free when he enjoys
    • the air pump and have become a famous professor.” He says quite
    • services for humanity and not have become such a debauched
    • that leads to and must come to birth in the future evolution of
  • Title: Karma of Vocation: Lecture II
    Matching lines:
    • observation of human life we have not yet come to reject this
    • Most certainly, this trait must have come from an original
    • the elevation and spiritual permeation of humanity — have come
    • would have become entirely different human beings if only small
    • appear at once — we shall come back to this later — but, when
    • from this. There comes about in Goethe's complex nature a
    • childhood continues to progress. Then something comes from
    • course of his life, how he becomes an utterly different person
    • that a third impulse, which comes as if from without — but
    • disposed, come about through the fact that the etheric body is,
    • the capacity to become permeated with super-sensible concepts.
    • spiritually, it becomes possible for us to sense the profound
    • Goethe now comes to Strassburg
    • become something quite different in Goethe because the same
    • Sesenheim and Goethe comes to meet him, not in the same
    • something quite different — how does it come about that he
    • inheritance that they tried to prove he had become
    • feeling. Such a person comes to the point of saying to himself
    • The word “Dumpfheit,” an inner feeling of numbness, comes into
    • non-working persons living on their private incomes who are
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Karma of Vocation: Lecture III
    Matching lines:
    • that may become a profound riddle in the evolution of humanity.
    • people will come to know what I am here pointing out on the
    • relationship while awake. Here we can only ask how it comes
    • consider how man has come to be, that his ego has taken its
    • Then an entirely different relationship comes about during the
    • isolated pedestal. But such an effect can never come about
    • person comes into looser relationships with his brain
    • it mean to say that a more intimate relationship comes about
    • connect with the spinal cord and ganglionic systems, must come
    • come into the world through man alone, but recognize that
    • Experiences become conceptions. Ordinary experiences become the
    • become the conceptions, the mental images, that Goethe poured
    • other people become, in a certain sense, dream-forms of life
    • Faust, what would we come to? What would the world then
    • come to? Strange as it may seem but so it is, the world would
    • come to a stop and would make no further progress! The moment
    • their youth were trained like Schiller to become doctors had
    • It would come to a standstill were all men to dream as I have
    • have reached a point where an especially paradoxical fact comes
    • awake during this kind of work because what really comes into
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Karma of Vocation: Lecture IV
    Matching lines:
    • increasingly become different in the future. But a sort of
    • increasingly important it will become to conceive of it as a
    • have become more specialized and that not so many centuries ago
    • already come to pass in the various branches of human activity
    • of the recent fifth post-Atlantean period have become
    • become specialists.
    • will soon become one of the weightiest of family problems;
    • according to which children must be allowed to become what
    • man himself; it becomes more objective. Through this
    • suitable to come from puppets' lips.
    • very fact that this life becomes detached from human interests,
    • degree. But they will have become elemental beings of the third
    • becomes the external sheath for elemental beings who thereby
    • connection. What we produce in our vocational life can become
    • Something absolutely new, of course, does not come into
    • who usually talk most stupidly about what must come about. This
    • respected. The time is yet to come when the feeling will
    • important that we come to see more clearly how in earlier times
    • increasingly become disengaged from man's emotional life and
    • vocational life must become something different from what it
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Karma of Vocation: Lecture V
    Matching lines:
    • mentioned, has become, let us say, a minister or councilor of
    • come to pass in spite of so-called public opinion and its hero
    • his life. He comes now to the King's palace and produces paper
    • come into existence through the help of Mephistopheles. He even
    • becomes a commander-in-chief and conducts wars, but in the
    • and if the person comes to understand the matter, then things
    • discovered and the person can come to an understanding of it
    • bestial slime at the bottom of the soul,” all come from the
    • it does not come from the soul's depths in a conscious way
    • possess a different stage of maturity from what comes from the
    • that comes the very next night, but it also serves as a
    • individual life comes into being according to the measure in
    • come into consideration here, and to these we must turn our
    • however, only insofar as they come to expression in the posture
    • group of forces gives him form; these come more from the
    • each other, much comes to expression that has to do with the
    • we must also consider the physical body. With it, what comes
  • Title: Karma of Vocation: Lecture VI
    Matching lines:
    • comes from cruelty, a quite definite characteristic that is
    • everywhere. We do not come to understand this period when we
    • with the theater and whoever was to become the director had to
    • tell how an exotic young lady comes to the jurist accompanied
    • say, become totally enmeshed with his individual being, if not
    • mistake when they become involved in such things. But it also
    • will increasingly come to the fore because they set important
    • world symptomatically. This will become increasingly necessary;
    • Nowadays one comes upon particular fields everywhere of which
  • Title: Karma of Vocation: Lecture VII
    Matching lines:
    • we shall still come to the parts of our lectures that have more
    • climate, nationality, etc. At that time, humans become mature,
    • the scientific point of view that they become fully mature
    • with something living within his soul that comes directly from
    • relationship to life. Since, however, human beings must become
    • come to light. It must become possible for a person to consider
    • development of the spirit of the time will become increasingly
    • important, and the human soul will have to become increasingly
    • which is still only a goal since it has come less clearly to
    • life would become ever more the “pressed caviar” of bourgeois
    • what has come about earlier in China as the goal toward which
    • Chinese entity in which men will become the “pressed caviar” of
    • bourgeois nullities. A constriction of the intellect will come,
    • giving it the force needed to overcome the bourgeois, Europe,
    • become another China. These words were spoken in 1864!
    • feeling of tragedy, saying that a time will come in Europe when
    • overcome. Yet, he saw no way of escape. He felt that
    • Christianity had also become shallow, flattened out by
    • men of the East have also become their adherents — have taken
    • frequently meets with marked opposition that comes from dark
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Karma of Vocation: Lecture VIII
    Matching lines:
    • many private lessons so that he had an excellent income. He
    • and ashes and knew that they must have come from the burning of
    • grace's letter was heartily welcome, first, because it lets me
    • everybody, to share any small talent that had come into my
    • release me from this obligation without ending my income; in
    • income here, I will tell you that the compensation for my
    • of heredity. What comes later must be referred to another point
    • now is: What did each of them become? What course did their
    • the other, to all kinds of swindles. Whatever comes from
    • can readily foresee what will come about. Those who are
    • people with their new method will have come up with their
    • become acquainted with the materialistic impulses dominating
    • world with open eyes. What will become of the world if the
    • that of the human being. Then comes a passage that is quoted
    • felt myself overcome immediately by an inner barrenness. I
    • shopkeepers did not come out of their shops to smash everything
    • evening I had become empty, void of feeling, and cruel, and I
    • order to value the world correctly, in order to come to the
    • we become ugly through everything that surrounds us — streets,
    • come to its ultimate consequence. After all, the reason such a
  • Title: Karma of Vocation: Lecture IX
    Matching lines:
    • archangels and angels — then comes man, the animal kingdom,
    • have come all the way down to man. In his earthly existence
    • human being comes to worship his own god, that is to say, his
    • human beings with those gods who are common to all has become
    • god has become most conspicuous. Humanity has been fragmented
    • come about by virtue of our correct or incorrect conception. As
    • gradually comes about that the individual reveres not the
    • deeply significant light. But our characterization must become
    • question may arise as to how, indeed, the soul comes to a path
    • have come to in a natural way from many considerations.
    • mysteries. Such a person — and I am telling you facts — comes
    • what they have become through language. Indeed, in words we
    • come from words only if they were of the character I have
    • today was first made applicable in 1719 by Newcomen
    • to become what he ought as an earthly human being. For many
    • become manifest when we learn rightly to read what is often
    • a balance that can be created only if humanity again comes to
  • Title: Karma of Vocation: Lecture X
    Matching lines:
    • is that the human being has come over from earlier worlds and
    • period between death and a new birth, this etheric body comes
    • nature, from without. He had to come into touch with human
    • come to a most important differentiation, which can be taken
    • every human being something supramundane in his nature comes to
    • such as a Roman Caesar comes to be worshipped as a god, he
    • question will come to us if we fix our attention on the
    • come about after the time in which the Mystery of Golgotha
    • that comes from the exusiai, the spirits of form. In other
    • abyss if men had come to believe that the moon was really the
    • Lucifer. Something had to come that the human being could take
    • come so that through an avowal of Him the human being might
    • but since that time — everything has become quite different.
    • those sins that have come into the world through human
    • have come about has been removed from it through the entrance
    • throughout the earth. It is thus that Christ becomes the One
    • when what is unholy service today becomes holy; that is,
    • when the symbolic sacrament of the altar will become the
    • will then come to the knowledge that, everywhere in life,
    • becomes acquainted with everything: contemporary chemical
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Mysteries of the Sun: Lecture I
    Matching lines:
    • is working anywhere nowadays it will become increasingly
    • element' comes into human evolution. The Greeks, for
    • allowing it to become known. Throughout the further course of
    • its origin to Christianity having come down into all that was
    • Christ-Mystery. By this, the Church has become an institution
    • Christ-Mystery. This is something that today must become ever
    • the time of testing has come, the time of trial, when we have
    • remarkable it is what conflict today comes to the surface
    • all comes from God. As we now have Soviet rule that is from
    • everything is from God, Bolshevism as well must come from
    • thoroughly overcome. Nothing meets us with more persistence
    • is true, is it not, that the world conception that has become
    • come or when it is already half way through its term? What
    • its seed in man alone. The Christ had to come to man out of
    • the cosmos. Since the Mystery of Golgotha the time has come
    • increasingly only in man; and the men who were to come after
    • however, come near the Christ-Mystery if one does not connect
    • one. I am referring to how constantly people come to one
    • years of age, your head becomes so that out of itself nothing
  • Title: Mysteries of the Sun: Lecture II
    Matching lines:
    • certainly not so as soon as we come to the middle man, the
    • over into the Venus age. By the time the Venus age has come
    • in us as as extremity man will become head in our next
    • place. They go around outside, they come into relation with
    • consciousness had become so strong that gradually this
    • through consciousness, that becomes more clairvoyant, what
    • becomes conscious during sleep. What today man has as waking
    • of consciousness have become more less veiled since the
    • should very much welcome it if such knotty points were met
    • difficult conception to which, however, I have to come.
    • would see the reverse of what comes to you as smell, you
    • becomes outer and the outer inner. Here you now have in your
    • perceptible. The other senses do not come into man's
  • Title: Mysteries of the Sun: Lecture III
    Matching lines:
    • of life could prevail — he would become aware of
    • ever diminishing fullness, we can come to empty space; and we
    • become empty and in certain parts more than empty, that this
    • come to what naturally is only seen near man but projects
    • death comes the physical body falls away, and man withdraws
    • comes into a certain relation with the soul-world and then
    • with the physical body and then they become free. Becoming
    • itself becomes hollowed out and the life of the spirit coming
    • throughout earthly time to come to correct concepts of these
    • future become more and more so, for us to perceive that these
    • will come an objection that evidently sits heavily on your
    • semblance. The physicist ought to say when he comes to
    • matter: here I come to the thoughts of the spirits of wisdom,
    • when we begin to think about the reality we come to the
    • my arms and legs, hands and feet begins there and comes to
    • arms and legs, hands and feet become the head of my next
    • when we gradually come nearer to these ideas and concepts (in
    • become confused and hazy to people. Thus there has come to
    • longer. Everything now becomes quite abstract with the
    • You can come upon it today in materialistic books on science.
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Threefold Order II: Lecture 1: Influence of the human will upon the course of economic life
    Matching lines:
    • that spiritual science must come in and rectify errors; and
    • see in the spiritual world will become thereby distorted,
    • 1906, and come there to a year of favourable conjuncture. And
    • mind with all sorts of nebulous notions, and becomes in the
    • Carl Marx's ‘Capital,’ — should have become
    • here, certainly, there is something besides, which comes into
    • condition of things such as had come about towards the year
    • have become established, those people who care to take
    • come about, that such a thing is possible? It has come about
    • came about through money having become what I might call an
    • to-day it has already become somewhat fabulous, when one
    • in a sufficient income to satisfy personal needs. And it
    • comes then to be a question of Capital and Wages, and how
    • has become altogether divorced from realities; it has run into
    • in the future. — It has gradually come to be the custom in question
    • ‘returns’. And when one comes to examine the way in
    • consumption gradually becomes anarchic; it runs wild; and one
    • natural science, one comes gradually quite away from all
    • able to come in, and to show the great connections; because
    • education which comes from Spiritual Science, then all the
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Threefold Order II: Lecture 2: On Propaganda of the Threefold Social Order
    Matching lines:
    • actual needs of the time, people should now come and demand,
    • Yet what can we only tell ourselves to-day? People still come
    • moment these Majority Socialists come into power, another
    • were to come into power, a new party again would form in
    • opposition, — the Communists. And if these were to come
    • where the crash is still to come. There one may see, on the
    • well; but they fancy, that some miracle will come about, and
    • will still find people to come quite willingly, and work
    • the masses anything could possibly come, except what we
    • would also inevitably come to grief, if the general kind of
    • think everything un-understandable which comes from the real
    • descend to a lower level when it comes to writing, —
    • at last to say, ‘A new day will have to come, with new
    • these horrible old parties; something quite new must come to
    • that have been pumped into their heads, to come from their
    • numbers and numbers of other people, who come to one and say:
    • Order — of our paper — flung away and come to
    • nothing! And why did they come to nothing? The Threefold
    • business-life; and then people come and ask one: ‘How,
    • things; and the more this comes to be recognised, so much
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Reincarnation and Immortality: Lecture I: Free Will, Immortality
    Matching lines:
    • positive nor negative comment here, people have tried to come
    • allow our mental images to come and go as they please. On the
    • being simply the outcome of his physical functions, it has
    • that cannot come from the body. Sometimes it is the right
    • freedom does not come into it. — This is the other
    • No one can become a scientist of spirit in the right way who is
    • something indefinite, can ever become a scientist of spirit.
    • we also become conscious of gradually following an inner
    • visions, for these ordinary visions come from the body. They
    • between imaginations and visions can, it is true, become a
    • his body, but he can never become a scientist of spirit. We are
    • consciously present when they come into existence. These forces
    • the important factor, for by these means the soul becomes
    • pictures only to strengthen his ego that thereby becomes
    • pictures. The latter is overcome, so that although we live in
    • to enter the spiritual world comes about. This is what I call
    • The world of pictures becomes transparent, and the outer
    • about such matters can come only from those who have never
    • happens when we go to sleep: our normal perceptions become
    • unclear and sink away, then we become unconscious. This sinking
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Reincarnation and Immortality: Lecture II: The Historical Evolution of Humanity
    Matching lines:
    • sorts of differences but in which it would become
    • kind of prophecy. Immediately after Schiller had come to
    • Then there comes a time which is sharply differentiated from
    • from all sides, even in the primitive art that has come down to
    • personality, that becomes the decisive factor. This lasts until
    • which a higher kind of understanding becomes particularly
    • constantly comes to mind when we study Lamprecht's view of
    • become clear in further lectures. For the moment I would only
    • when it comes to discovering the virtual factor in
    • something that did not come into being through the work of
    • evolution of humanity in the light of history. And one comes to
    • that it is because the American nation has come into being on
    • the inner soul life of man comes to expression in a quite
    • decay. We find the part of life that becomes dead in historical
    • quite sure that these people will come to decisions which will
    • consciousness. And here I must come back to something that I
    • unconscious comes to be revealed.
    • want comes about, how your mental images lead to movement in
    • then learn to see history as it really is, we become aware of
    • evolution of humanity, which are not forces of decay. They come
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Reincarnation and Immortality: Lecture III: The Supersensible Being of Man
    Matching lines:
    • man really is and come to a point where this is possible. This
    • doubts become of finding in it a gateway into the world
    • where the real being of man is. In fact, at last we become
    • particular way so it becomes quite a different power in the
    • undertaken in order that the thinking becomes a different power
    • it were, outside itself and become this new power in the soul.
    • actually achieved when this comes about. You can find a more
    • the super-sensible worlds. It comes about by strengthening the
    • using our ordinary thinking we do not become conscious of the
    • become apparent as we proceed. What we notice is what has
    • of thinking that becomes memory.
    • so that something finally remains? This comes about by
    • become more skilled, our hands become more alive so that we not
    • thoughts he will come to observe not the thoughts but the
    • does not come about in ordinary life and science, that he
    • come about? Well, it shows us that the inner activity, which
    • of the nature of memory but comes about in another way. This is
    • whole mood of our soul life has become different under the
    • what it has thought, we very soon become aware how our own
    • experiences come to us as if from outside us, in the way that
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Reincarnation and Immortality: Lecture IV: Nature of Anthroposophy
    Matching lines:
    • human beings — in such a way that it comes to meet the
    • Anthroposophy had to come to meet varied social and
    • come to the conviction that this research has its limits. It
    • use of the senses and at once becomes empty, vague and
    • world can come about in this way. Anthroposophy has to see
    • danger which must be overcome if the eternal in man and in the
    • the soul, and it comes up again, intentionally or
    • second danger. It has to overcome the dangers which arise
    • the spiritual is NOT to be achieved and in this way comes to a
    • contact with external things; we only become conscious because
    • research works in a direction through which it can become fully
    • certain pathological conditions. What comes about in visions
    • which he becomes susceptible to suggestion, the powers of his
    • from hallucinations and visions becomes more dependent upon his
    • Something comes about in this way which is different in
    • misunderstanding. If a man becomes subject to
    • hallucinations and visions, or if he becomes open to
    • concentration, one becomes able to say at a certain point of
    • the moment has come in which the soul can live independently in
    • development, that one comes to know in perception this
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Reincarnation and Immortality: Lecture V: Mystery of the Human Being
    Matching lines:
    • viewpoint it happens to come, usually construct their own
    • it becomes quite clear that however far we are able to go by
    • world becomes no more explicable than it already is to
    • Naegeli, had to say. He expressed his view, which has become
    • materialistic Darwinism, has in the course of his life come to
    • This is what I wanted to say, to start with. I shall come back
    • perceptive consciousness, where he becomes a part of a real,
    • conviction that becomes more compelling as one immerses one's
    • people and will become a common conviction with all the
    • this clear and obvious, that this will become more and more the
    • with our will become a part of the outer world. It is what
    • will have to become a basic conviction of a future outlook and
    • will indeed become so, because it is bound to follow from a
    • And a transformation can come about by working arduously
    • will come when Goethe's Theory of Color will be vindicated by a
    • become any different from anyone else. But if he is to receive
    • consciousness has been completely brought to rest and becomes
    • like a calm sea. They should then become active in the life of
    • expectancy that we bring about at the right moment. We become
    • after years does there come back what we have perceived in the
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Eurhythmy (Introduction to a performance)
    Matching lines:
    • That which comes into expression in speech, in song, in
    • will become ever more and more perfect, and will one day take
  • Title: Differentation of Primeval Wisdom into East, Middle, West
    Matching lines:
    • lectures you will have seen how man comes to a kind of
    • Otherwise we always come to an unreal, a mere abstract grasp
    • humanity in our present age has to come right away. From
    • external knowledge, their external cognition, will become
    • how did it become ever more and more differentiated? We must
    • the world, from the West there will come none but economic
    • prevail in the West. From the East there would come over what
    • permeates the world, the East will gradually become
    • developing its own economic thinking. The East would come
    • permeation of the East does come about, it will not take
    • little in the hope that better times may come, and so
    • ethical truths, of moral truths, has come from the
    • of the East, and this comes to us when such people as
    • principle of utility comes into consideration.
    • great contrast, of which humanity should become aware,
    • So it has come about that this way of thinking, which is
    • (Königsbergerise) it, and it then becomes Kantian. That
    • happened; and from Kant there comes this beautiful saying:
    • becomes Aesthetic in Goethe, on his Italian journey, in the
    • also in the thought structure of truth. One must come to say,
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: The Real Being of Man
    Matching lines:
    • a sort of illusion before us; and we only come to the truth
    • birth and death we may become too allied to the Earth; we
    • impulse to become too much related to the earthly powers,
    • develop too strongly the impulse to become too closely
    • wait for a later age to become that which they were intended
    • to become, they could not wait for the development of what
    • down in the world, and thus become something which here on
    • become foreign to our Earthly existence. We are now
    • world, we can come in to an incarnation in which we cannot
    • impulse which will come to mankind in this way. That means,
    • understand that what is finally to become of our Earth is not
    • concerning what the Earth is to become, when we know the
    • individualized. It may thus become a common being, an
    • becomes too strong, we become too closely related to physical
    • humanity. But it is absolutely possible for man to become so
    • become — no longer one great organism with unified common
    • of the human beings. The Earth will become that which man
    • become the inclination of humanity.
    • decision — either to become Spiritual
    • has come to humanity, and humanity must resolve to find that
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Necessity for Spiritual Knowledge: Lecture 1
    Matching lines:
    • my “Appeal to the Cultural World” has come into his
    • have laughed me out of court; nothing would have come of it
    • what spiritual angle they come. And there is still a great
    • we can come to a really new social form only by recognising
    • comes the present materialistic spirit? Who is responsible
    • this poor science of the world but to become material,
    • come to recognition of the spirit through developed
    • something about the spiritual world — before we come to
    • evolution has come to stop. We do not face the future so that
    • easily becomes atheism, this necessary waiting of the
    • interest in him. He therefore easily becomes an enemy of
    • come to an end, for example, in the evolving human being? In
    • is a desire merely to develop the physical body nothing comes
    • account must be taken not merely of what comes from physical
    • evolution through heredity, for nothing more can come from
    • of confronting a soul. Gifts of the body have come to an end,
    • has become necessary through the development of modern
    • But if anyone comes along and speaks about social affairs
    • becomes Christian because in every third line Christ's name
    • pains to speak in this way, people come and say: Oh, but he
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Necessity for Spiritual Knowledge: Lecture 1 (alternate translation)
    Matching lines:
    • come to the absolutely firm conviction that in the very
    • understand and grasp it. It is an understanding which comes
    • realm of the Spirit comes that which is spoken? Men of the
    • this materialistic culture is being overcome, that is an
    • into the social order can any true reconstruction come about.
    • Whence comes the materialistic spirit of the present day?
    • not speak of the Spirit? This has come about again as a
    • taken seriously. To-day men must not want to come to
    • which have come over from ancient times. Between them there
    • religious avowal) that he comes to a realisation of the
    • of human evolution wherein man has become a different being
    • science, we try to find out why this is so, we have to come
    • this reason too he so easily becomes an opponent of all
    • in man. Hence it must become possible for us to confront the
    • evolution has ceased and nothing will come by merely
    • nothing more comes out of that now; one must take into
    • Lutheran view of Christ has no reality nowadays and becomes
    • must not be lightly uttered. But when someone comes and
    • was really the outcome of a kind of priggishness, an
    • since the last third of the 19th century, it has become
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Necessity for Spiritual Knowledge: Lecture 2
    Matching lines:
    • physical means that such an investigation can only come to
    • continually comes forth again. If you look at a cloud, or
    • being born. Out of what comes from the past, there develops
    • continual dying and coming to birth becomes objective to us,
    • found midway between these two poles. Everything becomes more
    • then cosmic space becomes a very different thing to the
    • Kepler, and Newton. It becomes something that is inwardly
    • conception or world picture has come into existence during
    • 13th, and 14th years are told that lightning comes from
    • so that it comes to this — the only thing that is present
    • one of the most essential cultural tasks,to overcome that
    • anyone who comes near the forces which are actually operative
    • and becomes aware of the fact that physical space is only an
    • people at our Universities and High Schools become what they
    • pedagogy it is possible to become a good teacher. Now even in
    • is brought into the question of correct feeding, it comes in
    • consciousness, may come to pass in our epoch — in order
    • not produce this; it will only come through the development
    • influenced by their environment. Then the child becomes an
    • adult; the concepts become more abstract, the experiences
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Man and Nature: Intellect in Man and Nature Bereft of the Gods
    Matching lines:
    • these become abstract and shadowy. This has been the tendency
    • have experiences that have become a mere series of pictures.
    • century man's life of soul has gradually come to the point of
    • inevitable consequence is that this destiny itself becomes
    • the Human-Divine principle now within his being will become
    • only become concrete and real when we receive the impulse of
    • choice — a choice which has become a matter of greater
    • become illusions, and these illusions are distorted into all
    • outcome of Spiritual Science. But it is precisely here that
    • grasp of thought. This is quite true, for whence comes the
    • become aware is similar to ‘having weight,’ and
    • People have become blind and deaf to these things. Man is
  • Title: The Physical-Superphysical: Its Realisation Through Art
    Matching lines:
    • reveal, through art, the super-physical,. But it becomes very
    • become true art. And it can well be said that it reflects a
    • days — come very near the creations of present-day
    • become vision. We offer the soul, as it were from outside,
    • nor do they come to know that irresistible desire for that is
    • being killed, overcome, by this human life, this human soul.
    • does not come to expression in the human being but is killed
    • without something lower being overcome by what is higher. The
    • reverse can also be true; the higher can be overcome by the
    • to re-discover what has thus actually been overcome — and
    • reaching what has been overcome and then freed from
    • it becomes artistic perception.
    • upon us so that it becomes head, we get something in
    • well how in nature one life is constantly being overcome, and
    • become a whole but has not become so in nature herself.
    • tendency, and held in check by higher life, first comes to
    • become reconciled. It becomes necessary to atone artistically
    • constricted form which, in its turn, is overcome by the
    • human form becomes powerful — as indeed it is in life
    • the life of the reason, which develops and comes to
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: The Sources of Artistic Imagination and the Sources of Supersensible Knowledge
    Matching lines:
    • come across artists realise the fear, very prevalent among;
    • visions that come to him, it is legitimate to speak of
    • condition, he cannot eliminate certain impressions which come
    • standpoint of super-sensible knowledge, becomes a domain
    • ordinary way. Impulses of will come to expression in the
    • no element whatever of the bodily organisation. Then comes
    • experiences that come from music in the realm of
    • consciousness; the seer feels as though he has become one
    • through language or other instruments of his art, what comes
    • perception. From without inwards, he comes to the point where
    • different sides. That is the way in which the seer comes into
    • which a man becomes aware of another Ego, the Ego of another
    • who say that a man becomes aware of another Ego or soul only
    • we have become accustomed, when we see a bodily structure
    • colouring in the human dissolve, as it were become
    • secret of flesh-colour, as the seer realises when he comes to
    • than ordinary reddening — which becomes outstreaming
    • degeneration takes place when, in prose, speech becomes
    • ignore the impression that comes to him from a work of art?
    • that in present as our body. The body becomes something new,
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: Human Knowledge and Its Significance for Man and the Cosmos
    Matching lines:
    • become intelligible to us.
    • times will come when their souls will be incarnated again and when knowledge
    • under a delusion. Times will come when knowledge, and knowledge alone
    • of the head, will become the head of the next incarnation, after we
    • body transformed in such a way that they can become a head in the next
    • mistake. A grain of wheat comes into existence in the whole sphere of
    • make it possible for a new wheat plant to come into existence.
    • next incarnation. This is the remarkable connection which becomes clear
    • the Gods, must, as it were, become an act of divine worship. All the
    • can become the means of nourishing higher Spiritual Beings. Our concepts
    • become food for these higher Spiritual Beings. In other words, we must
  • Title: Anthroposophical Ethics ... St. Francis, Lecture III
    Matching lines:
    • has come into humanity.
    • beings and objects. He then becomes a being shut up within
    • obtained once for all; rather does goodness come only through
    • The spirit-self will only come into prominence in the sixth age of
    • comes into relationship with them. All this is brought about
    • apathy: in this direction we become immoral. Thus we see that
    • comes from the fire when we light a stove, so it is true that
    • interest in humanity and the world comes when we study
    • Moon, and the meaning of Karma and so on. It really comes
    • knowledge comes something which in a radical manner must be
    • friends for a long time and then suddenly there comes a
    • shall gradually disappear and that man shall become
    • what man once possessed as instinctive wisdom may now become
    • the word truth, for as we have now become more
    • has everywhere become a quality of the age; it is impossible
    • gradually come about in our life of thought. The speed of
    • that comes with a materialistic age, is opposed to truth. In
    • Christ-impulse, has become the special virtue of the
    • will become feeling. Through the Mystery of Golgotha Christ
    • significant statement of love, and this statement must become
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Teachings of Christ the Resurrected
    Matching lines:
    • feeling had already become so vital that they felt the life
    • aside many of the concepts which today have simply become
    • Much of the Mystery of Golgotha has become known to human
    • gradually become so dense, the death forces in it have become
    • to become fully acquainted with all that relates to
    • of Golgotha, it has come today to the point of time where human
    • Teacher Who had come to His initiated disciples in a form
  • Title: Christianity in the Evolutionary Course of Modern Mankind
    Matching lines:
    • beginning as elementary truths becomes modified — we
    • various phenomena of our existence will already have become clearer,
    • Hebrew people had originally come to expression; and if at any
    • in that world. We come to understand history only when we are
    • What we have just been discussing becomes
    • farther, we come, let us say, into the period between the 11th
    • feelings and for all that he did, — that fact becomes
    • phenomena of that time will become luminous and clear to you,
    • spiritual-scientific field we come to understand more and more
    • What has become of scholasticism, if we consider it, not as to
    • itself has come more and more into
    • Christ Himself. And by what means must this come to pass? By a
    • times the Christ and Christianity must become the perspective
    • prepared itself for what it is to become. In the early
    • since the ego can in any case become egotistic — but
    • Christianity has become Ego. As it is true that this
  • Title: Eternal Soul of Man in the Light of Anthroposophy
    Matching lines:
    • general do we come to speak of the dreams that arise out of the
    • when awake? We come to an assessment of the dream world only by
    • the fact that we wake up, and by awakening we come to an
    • the dream's reality. We could never come within the dream to
    • through, and we would come only to the thoughts that are not
    • that it is actually possible for the human being to come to
    • the soul — where he has already come once — he can
    • continue to develop himself when he becomes an adult. Now it
    • awakening of which I have spoken can come about, but one must
    • always this that comes to us: what the thing mainly is when it
    • rather that everything comes out of us.
    • this brain gradually becomes, and so on.
    • has to come back to them time and again.
    • imagine then that we come to the deep, silent solitude of the
    • itself in silence our soul comes to silence. — But you
    • had come to the time-person, he had already rid himself of the
    • consciousness that has come in the deep silence of the soul.
    • has driven the power of knowledge so far that we have come to
    • become acquainted with this deprivation, in which there occurs,
    • physical-sensory world. Then this love itself gradually becomes
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Supersensible Knowledge: Lecture I: The Significance of Supersensible Knowledge Today
    Matching lines:
    • of spiritual investigation will become apparent. These
    • prejudice comes from religious quarters. There are people
    • fallow, they become burning questions weighing on the human
    • same fundamental truth. From these lectures it will become
    • them. Far from wanting to become another religion, spiritual
    • also become understandable. The true value of the ancient
    • tolerance in regard to religious views has come about in
    • of evidence of that today, and it will become even more
    • comes to questions about the meaning of life or mankind's
    • fully justified, as anyone will acknowledge who becomes
    • from the ways and customs that over the centuries have become
    • opinion is powerless. What must come about is proper
    • can come about only through cooperation. The age one lives in
    • supersensible realm so that they become effective in the
    • arrangements will give way to new ones and people will become
    • such conferences it becomes apparent that modern physical
    • forms, while the old forms that have become influenced by
    • civilization comes into being, the primary constituent is
    • never have come into existence had they not originated from
    • can be said that when a civilization comes into being, we
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Supersensible Knowledge: Lecture II: Blood is a Very Special Fluid
    Matching lines:
    • change must come about in our modern understanding and
    • means that a person's soul impulses come to expression on the
    • but more valuable by far, once it is overcome, is the pain
    • approach, has come to the same conclusion. A book well worth
    • question. These are all problems that become understandable
    • category. This problem has become even more pressing since
    • people to assimilate a strange culture? Can a savage become
    • civilized? What here comes under consideration are vital and
    • discussed, all these things come under scrutiny.
    • development does formation of blood and blood vessels become
    • some of the basic ideas of spiritual science. You will come
    • and that this “above” comes to expression in the
    • stage becomes a developed nervous system.
    • becomes a microcosm that dimly senses within itself the whole
    • individualizing comes about that which expresses itself as
    • become individualized, so will the human being's first
    • is, the physical body, become individualized. In present day
    • formless substances come together in the human body, that the
    • the astral body the outer world is reflected and becomes
    • world becomes inner world, so does this inner world become
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Supersensible Knowledge: Lecture III: The Origin of Suffering
    Matching lines:
    • that come under scrutiny. In all world views since ancient
    • appears like an unwelcome intruder; it destroys, in the midst
    • exist, that unspeakable pain can come about in a life without
    • one–not however with what inspires comedy — that
    • himself, allowing his soul to become ever more encompassing.
    • that, as a human being comes before us in the physical world,
    • Where does spirit come from? That can never be the question,
    • rather, Where does matter come from? Spiritual research shows
    • ice. As ice can become water once more, so can spirit emerge
    • matter, has become solidified. Thus, we see that the astral
    • apart, it continually holds them together. Thus, life becomes
    • comes about because there are plants that close their leaves
    • Consciousness arises from life; it can only come into being
    • that dies outwardly cannot become conscious. Consciousness
    • itself and overcome it. As a perceptive person once remarked:
    • connection is recognized, the existence of pain becomes
    • process of destruction occurs; if great enough, the outcome
    • recognized, many things become comprehensible, for example,
    • that consciousness comes into existence through pain, that a
    • do you become aware of your inner organs? You go through life
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Supersensible Knowledge: Lecture IV: The Origin of Evil
    Matching lines:
    • soul to become free of the senses; something occurs in an
    • task once the soul becomes free of the body? Here we touch on
    • higher stage of evolution, they become the leaders and guides
    • themselves passed through. When a person has become
    • long ages to become as perfect and as wise as the physical
    • conflict, but love will overcome the conflict and transform
    • nectar and ambrosia, both words meaning love. Love comes into
    • with the result that what should remain impersonal becomes
    • Lucifer, human self-consciousness would never have become
    • have become reality without Lucifer, but not freedom. In
    • self-love has developed and widened to become love of all,
    • evil will be overcome. Evil and freedom stem from the same
    • Lucifer comes from the old planet; his task on this one is
  • Title: Supersensible Knowledge: Lecture VI: Education in the Light of Spiritual Science
    Matching lines:
    • the astral body. Like the ether body, it becomes visible when
    • maternal organism, from which they become independent only
    • birth. That means that the ether body is born and becomes
    • the ether body before it has become completely independent.
    • person it becomes the bearer of his enduring traits such as
    • indicate when it becomes right to exert influence on the
    • child's bodily faculties develop; they become independent and
    • physical body has become free to interact with the external
    • becomes free, as did the physical body at physical birth. Now
    • become forces of strength in later life. It is immensely
    • beings were spiritual beings and had come down to earth from
    • spirit. That is true also when it comes to play. The old kind
    • becomes independent. With the awakening feelings for the
  • Title: Supersensible Knowledge: Lecture V: Illness and Death
    Matching lines:
    • strictly speaking, only these organs that come into being
    • fruits, the outcome of earlier lives. These fruits are
    • ether body. This comes to expression as a gradual loss of
    • things attain a permanent character, they become a feature of
    • body is to become free so that it can emerge and participate
    • one, the poison becomes an integral part of the organism.
    • processes similar to the one described, we have become immune
    • himself the bearer of healing forces. He becomes strong
    • the harmless substances contained in the body have become so
    • continuously exposed to substances that could become harmful,
    • upon our capacity to become ill. Thus, health is conditioned
    • by illness. The outcome, the gift bestowed upon us by
    • illness, is greater strength. When the illness is overcome,
    • death become comprehensible. It is this comprehension
    • these things becomes wisdom of life.
    • transformed, fructifies life and becomes a source of healing.
  • Title: Supersensible Knowledge: Lecture VII: Education and Spiritual Science
    Matching lines:
    • development, and must have become not merely learned, but
    • inwardly transformed. The day will come when a teacher will
    • portrayed; former epochs must come to life. The school must
  • Title: Supersensible Knowledge: Lecture VIII: Insanity in the Light of Spiritual Science
    Matching lines:
    • terms only point to symptoms. No one can become insane by
    • religious person becomes mentally ill, his religious ideas
    • become distorted. Had he been steeped in materialistic ideas,
    • then they would have become distorted. The cause of mental
    • from a materialistic viewpoint to come to any conclusive
    • purified parts become ever larger. The “I” also
    • incarnates, the stronger becomes his character and his moral
    • condensed water; as ice can be melted to become water, so can
    • there are irregularities, he becomes aware of them in such a
    • conscious of what comes to us from outside, not of what goes
    • becomes conscious of itself, and feelings of hopes, wishes
    • their true form, but if they become projected outwards due to
    • bring about the accord with the physical environment becomes
    • disturbed, becomes conscious of itself, it leads to idiocy. A
    • human being can become what is called “demented”
    • the “above and the “below” only becomes
    • becomes apparent. The form of mental illness that results
    • comes to expression, for the young person suffers from
    • “weak-mindedness or imbecility.” It does not come
    • find no harmony with the “below” it becomes
  • Title: Supersensible Knowledge: Lecture IX: Wisdom and Health
    Matching lines:
    • science must become a personal quest. The striving human
    • spiritual knowledge becomes a personal quest.
    • become decision and action. Someone who is knowledgeable
    • knows how to apply knowledge so that it becomes reality is
    • become an inner force. Through his contemplation and exact
    • plant-image that can come to life within us; from it
    • but could exist. In someone who has become a sage laws are
    • raised to become imagination.
    • required of human beings. The soul must become active, as the
    • becomes such a picture, then this wisdom becomes in all
    • acting from outside has become individualized in humans.
    • individual soul whose influence comes from within. The price
    • error, they can transform so that it becomes wisdom once
    • more. What is already in existence must, as it were, become
    • recast within human beings, must become color-filled,
    • the astral body of which it becomes a part, whereas
    • thus become creative. Their health-giving effect acts
    • being that becomes ill; only people take the spirit into
    • knowledge, they cannot help. The doctor who comes with
    • When this wisdom has reached its climax it will have become
  • Title: Supersensible Knowledge: Lecture X: Stages in Man's Development in the Light of Spiritual Science
    Matching lines:
    • an organ, a tool; and self-knowledge becomes ever greater the
    • more this self can forget itself and become aware of the
    • needed to create a building, as the bricks do not come
    • Then comes the
    • life. The tableau becomes indistinct and dissolves, but the
    • general, though they may become modified in various ways. In
    • because the child's fantasy becomes active in providing what
    • Organs; they become strong, as a muscle becomes strong when
    • line of descent develop and become established during the
    • part. Emulation of relatives widens to become emulation of
    • become defined, now when the child's life widens beyond the
    • individual, become characteristic. At this time the etheric
    • ether body. This influence should come from people who,
    • organs should now become stronger and increase in size.
    • qualities that must be so deeply imprinted that they become
    • the astral body become free, that is, become open to external
    • comes to expression as high ideals, beautiful hopes and
    • twenty-third year does this come to an end; then a person is
    • earlier age. Now a person matures; the time has come when
    • definite, too conclusive; they should not become consolidated
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Supersensible Knowledge: Lecture XI: Who are the Rosicrucians?
    Matching lines:
    • written about Rosicrucianism is true, one could only come to
    • nature. What comes into consideration here is too often
    • human nature was different from what it was to become a few
    • methods are developed whereby he becomes the instrument able
    • humanity's whole outlook. It will for long centuries to come
    • overcome, it is all too easy to fall into error when striving
    • facts. Here we are concerned with thinking that has become
    • desires permeate the lower organs, a person will become as
    • become independent. Space becomes a world of color and sound in
    • able to breathe today. So how does it come about that they
    • of the changed breath has become great enough. This will take
    • seventh stage is within reach. Knowledge now becomes feeling;
    • roses” — what this expresses — has become one's
  • Title: Supersensible Knowledge: Lecture XII: Richard Wagner and Mysticism
    Matching lines:
    • many deluding images that come to block his path and slow his
    • these things comes to expression when he says: “I name
    • out to become world-substance that they then shaped and
    • to become an individual, a personality, had to leave the old
    • itself. Only in this way could man become a free being, but
    • that human beings could become more and more conscious. He
    • have to become a prominent factor of life.
    • evolution. An Ashasverus is someone that has become stuck
    • matter, with external aspects of life, and becomes stuck in
    • to ever greater perfection. He becomes entangled in matter
    • must come under the influence of a soul that is chaste and
    • by material life and one that has become entangled in it.
    • dance, not as it has become, but the dance that once
    • import. Only when inner impulses have become external action,
    • have become part of space and time, can they be conveyed
    • become articulate, strove to permeate the whole world and envelop
    • the aspect of those inner sensations that come to external
    • some action taking place on the stage, we should become aware
    • to have come from the dense mist of ancient Atlantis. Through
    • Nibelungs, who have become egoistic, of the human being that
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Supersensible Knowledge: Lecture XIII: The Bible and Wisdom
    Matching lines:
    • comes up against what appear to be insoluble contradictions.
    • could come. People saw the Bible as dealing with great world
    • modern person becomes critical when faced with contradictions
    • did these documents come to be appreciated. Reverence for the
    • investigation does not bear this out. Looking back we come to
    • which they have become accustomed are not in a position to
    • our being, our spirituality. What builds our body comes from
    • substances that surround us; likewise our inner being comes
    • that is all about him. However, for that to come about
    • did not know before; through our will we become capable of
    • seed that has already become a plant. If we never forget that
    • higher stages of development and we become aware that our
    • become reality, though as yet it is only slightly indicated.
    • becomes a “beggar of the spirit”; he feels
    • ideal; through what he is, is revealed what we shall become.
    • a definite method if one wishes to become an astronomer,
    • without guidance; that would be like wishing to become a
    • experience a certain life if they were to become initiates. Their
    • that when we come to this fourth member, then the
    • insignificant, will become by far the most important. The
  • Title: An Impulse for the Future
    Matching lines:
    • which, after the soul's sleep has been overcome can unfold with life;
    • falls, harden or become corrupt, others show that they are strong and
    • a human will which has become free of selfishness. He repeated these
    • things. With every futile attempt the conditions and relations become
    • once be made to realize something that comes from the super-sensible
    • that they come on their own.
    • come into being a Keeper of the Keeper of the Seal will be necessary:
    • must be assured in that the will to be a member should not come from
    • applicable. You will see though, if something like this should come
    • come into being – then really through recognition of the
    • be like a living tree. Never should what it is to become be
    • become one with nature. Various other things sought a peaceful
    • overcome such blood [national] ties, but every now and again
    • certain impossible symptoms had become apparent in our Society it was
  • Title: Article/Lecture: West-East Aphorisms
    Matching lines:
    • becomes the physical basis of his existence. But rhythm courses into the
    • into man, and how man thus becomes a living soul. The man of the present
    • way to find himself in the world. If the Western man should wish to become
    • a Yogi, he would have to become a refined egoist, for Nature has already
    • life of the West come to existence. A complete human being like Goethe
    • the Spirit at work in his ideology, then will understanding come about
    • the Eastern man comes to feel the rays of the sun in the shimmer of his
    • course of civilization toward the West, trade first becomes an independent
    • farther toward the West, production in industry becomes an independent
    • down to man. in the West, it has become the human word. It must find the
  • Title: Contrasting World-conceptions of East and West
    Matching lines:
    • metabolic organs and the extremities do not become separated so
    • would not be able to perceive this heritage which comes to him
    • is gradually drawing near, and which will become a reality in a
    • end. That is why our European civilisation has become so
    • character (or have become tangible) through the human
    • for instance, the thought comes to him, “Now I will raise
    • deeds. At the same time it will come about that he will no
    • become- delusively perceptible to the senses and which are
  • Title: The Mystery of Golgotha
    Matching lines:
    • we come to the Earth, to the Lemurian race which lived upon a
    • walk, to speak and to become independent.
    • come from a common source. From the Moon-Spirits man had
    • received the Spirit-Self and this enabled him to become an
    • prophecy: “When the Son of Man shall Come in his glory”
    • into the human beings, when all shall have become brothers)
    • Come, ye blessed of my Father, inherit the kingdom prepared for
    • Christianised men, by men who have become divine through
    • experience he felt that he had become a new man and he obtained
    • One will come, Who will bring the Kingdoms of Heaven down to
    • the true Light that lighteth every man was to come into the
    • I spoke. After me cometh one who existed before me. For he is
    • lived in the bosom of the Cosmic Father hath become our guide in
    • forth a son — the Holy Ghost shall come upon thee and the
    • on Self might come to an end, All individual forms of egoism
    • before. This has become possible because by shedding His blood,
  • Title: Year's Course as a Symbol for the Great Cosmic Year
    Matching lines:
    • earth, becomes clearly evident if we study the consciousness of
    • vegetable kingdom becomes aware of the secrets of the stars, it
    • soul? If we go back still further, we come to the development
    • will come when we shall not only use the physical body, but
    • From that time comes the lost wisdom (we spoke of this a few.
    • of the earth, during a cosmic New Year. Then it comes to us in
    • which closes the small cycle of twelve months becomes a symbol
    • course of one year, can only be grasped if it becomes a symbol
  • Title: Spiritual Relations in the Configuration of the Human Organism: Lecture I
    Matching lines:
    • comes about from seeing the surrounding. Yet it is not so. We do have,
    • absolutely clear about this: what first comes into consideration in
    • organism. With the eye, there comes into consideration (just see for
    • once the complicated way in which the eye comes into consideration)
    • way in the ego and astral body and those which come to meet these as
    • (arrows from below to above) another force comes forth, which continuously
    • that is, they want to become salt. So that we continuously have a tendency
    • organism from without towards the inner that should become a statue,
    • place through the encounter of the astral with the etheric, that comes
    • with the etheric body comes to meet the plastic formative forces, dissolves
    • but they become dependent, they are not themselves any more, who remember
    • things, but the things take hold of them, one becomes an automaton.
    • the inner current comes and extinguishes this presently, so that, at
    • present no rigid form can come about. Since, at present, it cannot become
    • diagram 3, right) Then it comes back in again with awakening (left),
    • which cannot be dissolved in there anymore, becomes the basis for memory-representation,
    • is so much strength existing, that it comes in a fourth time and can
    • head and imparts to it the four times slower beat. That which comes
    • subjective phenomena will come about, that people with sick kidneys
    • through by inner body warmth, what then meets with that which comes
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Spiritual Relations in the Configuration of the Human Organism: Lecture II
    Matching lines:
    • they can satisfy and become human, so to say, inside our organism.
    • never could become through outer proceedings what they become inside
    • though originally it might come out of the organic has been driven so
    • Far, that it has become dead, we have taken up something already dead.
    • food at first must become dead in us and then must be revived again.
    • the nourishment inside us, must come from us. And this happens on the
    • the kidneys are helped by what comes forth from the head.
    • Here the force of the head must come and meet, so that the frontal surface
    • the forces and that from the head then the forces come and restrain,
    • thing. Otherwise we would have to become angels again, if nitrogen were
    • go out from the head, while from the kidney-system come the radiations)
    • the kidneys, and become active only there. So every substance has its
    • activity that is spiritual, but become “spleeny”. In reverse,
    • for the whole of evolution, it seems — then we come to a time
    • activity of the liver has become that which is most important for the
    • One has to come back again
    • to such matters; otherwise on one side science will always come to a
    • and a completely different music of civilization comes about.
    • of the 12th, 13th, and 14th centuries an attitude comes about in Europe,
    • by the conviction, that one becomes heavy through the activity of the
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Spiritual Relations in the Configuration of the Human Organism: Lecture III
    Matching lines:
    • after a certain time had passed, the so-called Dark Age will come to
    • of the old wise men and takes them seriously, one indeed comes to realize
    • Age had lasted for some time, a Light Age would come again. It would
    • a person had become ill in the sense we understand, but one spoke about
    • assume now, that a human being had become ill of something we would
    • of this type of illness. One then said to oneself: this person has become
    • in such a case one said: this person has become too dependent upon the
    • to overcome these forces (Yellow). In this way one imparted forces to
    • light comes from the plant kingdom. This we do not take up at all any
    • “trimmings,” as it were. For us, the trimmings have become
    • skin seemed to become somewhat dry. He even sensed something like his
    • was still something else than it was to become later, mainly in the
    • But all that is there in the animal and plant kingdom becomes something
    • inner organism, through inner organic functions, overcome the illness.
    • as one says — could normally still be overcome, quickly goes over
    • into something one cannot overcome any more. Then one is simply sick.
    • has to come and give help through a process of healing. So once one
    • means overcome it. If finally I push a rusty nail into myself and my
    • earth only if it is continuously stimulated to overcome the forces of
    • the forces inwardly which can overcome this food. We eat to bring forth
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Necessity and Freedom: Lecture I: The Past Shows Us a Picture of Necessity
    Matching lines:
    • we presupposed that what happens in the future will also come
    • infinity, our thinking becomes confused. The problem arising
    • you will have come very close to a circle. You will no longer
    • way there are many things in the world people could become
    • necessity. But the compelling force of this argument comes from
    • they come to the overhanging rock it breaks loose, falls
    • course of time we have become accustomed to knowing that we
    • This awareness can come to them in two different ways. You may
    • afterwards he comes to you and says — or it may be
    • possibly have happened otherwise. I will gradually come to the
    • must become familiar with the fact that underlying our
    • compelled to come down to the earth from the cosmos
    • be proved. It is important that people come to realize
    • conclusiveness, but that there a kind of vision comes into its
    • today (we shall come to speak of this fact in its particular
  • Title: Necessity and Freedom: Lecture II: The Legend of the Prague Clock
    Matching lines:
    • plane, therefore it has become accustomed to dealing with those
    • nodding both to the rich man, who has become dependent on
    • comes to making it a principle of life, wouldn't it? Someone
    • mentally confused then, we are bound to become confused in our
    • is the only way to come to any certainty about cause and
    • the outcome is to seduce the victims to dastardly crimes, and
    • had himself become a school teacher and passed on this nonsense
    • become teachers and remembered something of this verdict on
    • considered great in centuries to come, whereas people who have
    • become good. So we must avoid Lucifer and Ahriman, avoid them
    • has become part of your whole thinking, resides in you, and
    • sun, and moon has come to us in the same way as our childhood
    • behind becomes necessity. If we were to see what is taking
    • it, it remains in our soul, where it becomes an activity of the
    • are necessities for us. But our current thoughts will become
    • it has become nature. What the gods thought during
    • There they become the beginning of a natural world. But
    • they remain in us. Yet when the Jupiter existence comes, they
    • will come forth. And what we are thinking today, in fact all
  • Title: Necessity and Freedom: Lecture III: Three Teachers with Different Attitudes
    Matching lines:
    • no worse. Yet other people had come to the conclusion over the
    • third teacher's class had come out the worst.
    • proper school administration, had himself become a school
    • The outcome could not possibly have been any different at the
    • teachers, with a few exceptions naturally, had all become
    • a certain way the third teacher also saw what would come about,
    • lines of what comes first and what comes later. I would like to
    • looking for the chain of causes before we come to the
    • we come to something else that has to be considered. The
    • when it comes to the problem of freedom and necessity. This is
    • morning comes when the second fellow does not want to get up.
    • of two parts that come together from two different
    • physical nature comes through the line of heredity,
    • physical plane comes through the line of heredity from one
    • individual being originating in the spiritual world comes from
    • beings come together. And in fact we can only judge the matter
    • doubtlessly have become a good mailman. He would have easily
    • the second man would not have become aware of them. We cannot
    • action and human knowledge that all our knowledge comes to us
    • then that they can enter into us and become one with us.
  • Title: Necessity and Freedom: Lecture IV: The Roman World and the Teutonic Tribes
    Matching lines:
    • become aware that there are deep reasons behind what I already
    • is essential that we become aware that the deciding factors
    • things. It is essential that we become aware that into the
    • necessity, and we must become familiar with the thought that
    • ball would first of all have to become unconscious in order
    • only now becomes a matter of knowledge. It comes up into
    • perpetrator becomes aware that he allowed his consciousness to
    • and has not become an eye that can completely eliminate itself
    • have come to the point of being able to let it enter the stream
    • become free when they achieve the possibility of drawing
    • even expressly stated that impulses of free will come from the
    • By leaving Goethe out, we still come to Faust as though
    • important part. Things that come from the gods can always be
    • have come about at that time. He would not have been able to
    • impulses can come in. In the cultural period in which
    • something new can come.
    • the highest order that require a space must come at a
    • of our inner qualities the period in which we come into the
    • and Faust, take their turns, and then comes Goethe who creates
    • being what could become tangible in his work. That is to
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Necessity and Freedom: Lecture V: The "I" is Found on the Physical Plane in Acts of Will
    Matching lines:
    • become so well acquainted with. We consider man as a synthesis
    • “I” to you, you would never come to the conclusion
    • and that we come to the point of naming it actually tell us
    • is a further mystery. For you can become conscious of your
    • will we actually become conscious of ourselves. But of
    • the matter so much that it ought to have become second nature
    • beings have come to the point where they see the outer world
    • such a way that he believes the colors to be the outcome of a
    • the physicists dream of today will come true. At present they
    • these colors.” Outer nature will become more and
    • slightest awareness of the impulses that come to expression in
    • but will have to learn it until it becomes a habit. The mere
    • that what comes later is prepared beforehand know that
    • experiences, the first one being that people have to become
    • People will also become aware that they are able to grasp moral
    • become aware once more of the aura, and on the other hand,
    • What will be the outcome? The modern physicist or physiologist
    • the author of this book, this lecture. This is what comes of
    • way that they become enthusiastic, fired up, they are
    • of himself. The dreamers come along and say, “We examine
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Social Question as a Problem: Lecture I: The Inner Experience of Language
    Matching lines:
    • born in recent times, since 1912–13, say, come from
    • discarnate souls, must become increasingly closer, because
    • concrete. It must again become an aim of mankind to think
    • gradually become accustomed to accepting the words as a sort
    • is meant in order to come to terms with the book at all. The
    • insert it again in one's revision; for people have become
    • further consideration it all becomes very abstract because
    • spirit self . . . and here “spirit” comes in
    • the matter can come to no concrete conception of it at all.
    • seventh year, to the change of teeth, the physical body comes
    • itself has become younger and younger — how we are now
    • school must come to the help of what is a great task of
    • understand”. They would become concrete if you would
    • People must become more mobile inwardly, that is, they must
    • words that we shell come back to imaginative conception
    • reality that the senses bring him. But he simply comes
    • more pictorial speech becomes. And that is just the reason
    • words comes to expression. And men can find their way back to
    • become pictures again. Only in this way can we fulfil the
    • and spiritual activities have come under state control in the
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Social Question as a Problem: Lecture II: The Inner Experience of Language
    Matching lines:
    • in the social life comes ultimately from what people think
    • consciousness soul this becomes increasingly individual.
    • People become more and more different in their thinking,
    • catastrophe will become immeasurably greater. For one cannot
    • become an essential part of our schooling.
    • evolution to come in the post-Atlantean period of human
    • cultivates the Imagination from which must come the common
    • common is what must come.
    • will be felt as gifts that come down to the folk genius
    • recently become international, men have with a certain
    • Nowadays he who has acquired several languages becomes a
    • become barren, and mankind would be able to evolve hardly
    • comes to his speech from outside. In the inward experience of
    • Everything that goes on between men as men comes into
    • language does not come into it. At the present time this way
    • they understand each other. Today it comes to few to listen
    • write, but only as men do who feared what comes from the
    • note this communicating by means of speech comes from other
    • informative in language which alone comes into consideration
    • I described, comes to expression in what a child carried into
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Goetheanism as an Impulse for Man's Transformation - Lecture I: The Difference Between Man and Animal
    Matching lines:
    • judgement comes about merely because one refuses to go into the sources
    • considerations today, I will take an example that may be said to have come
    • very one-sidedly. But it comes from a man — and this can be seen
    • we come to a very remarkable passage. He says; “A fearful destiny
    • be very dangerous were it to come about too rapidly. And this danger
    • when it comes to saying: In what do these wise ideas consist that are
    • fall back on any kind of deluded ideas that have become mere fine words.
    • and are then overcome by fear and anxiety when they should turn to it.
    • in feeling and ask yourself: where does it come from historically? If you
    • help saying that fundamentally it comes from the way in which Christianity
    • Catholic men you will find, in all passages where a certain point comes
    • that he is catching hold of concepts but is unable regally to come to
    • when you come to the philosophical literature of the Catholic Clerics.
    • is the point that always comes into evidence when there is question
    • for in the meantime I have never come across this Revision of Logic.
    • present time men actually become quite frightening when they begin to
    • one day had to hear that the comets which consist of nucleus and tail
    • longer be denied that comets are also heavenly bodies, the Catholic
    • be applied to comets; but they first gave way only where the nucleus
    • actually hold good for anyone who will not become a spiritual scientist
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Goetheanism as an Impulse for Man's Transformation - Lecture II: St. John of the Cross
    Matching lines:
    • the questions concerning a world-conception seriously should come to
    • of those from whom the objections come, to go deeply into the truth;
    • Science, as this would come from a modern believer.
    • working in him the practice of certain virtues becomes easy which otherwise
    • Now St. John of the Cross says: “The time has come (he is referring
    • by which man comes to terms with the things of the physical plane that
    • for the attainment of vision) man with his soul comes to a kind of barrenness
    • and aridity. By this he really comes to that participation in the divine,
    • up outer perceptions through his senses, the soul can become passive,
    • the soul of itself does nothing further. Thereby God becomes the principal
    • night of the senses. To go through it the soul must become free of itself
    • of the soul and the divine will, become one.”
    • about what is dead, must come to see that scientific observations make
    • of time becomes capable of abandoning these conceptions, particularly
    • bemuse the time has come—formerly only for the few, now for all
    • or unconsciously passes by the Guardian of the Threshold. There he comes
    • the divine hierarchies. There he comes to know how Ahriman and Lucifer
    • Man today is not prepared to approach directly with his soul what comes
    • Orders, who say: Man as a rule is not sufficiently mature to come to
    • when carried out by men today, for they are obsolete, they have become
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Goetheanism as an Impulse for Man's Transformation - Lecture III: Clairvoyant Vision Looks at Mineral, Plant, Animal, Man
    Matching lines:
    • side on what becomes so enigmatical if looked at from the points of
    • view holding good at present. Now I have told you that man can come
    • actually to become as man of the earth; then he continues on, and now
    • man. And in the visible human kingdom there is played out what comes
    • to him. And when people believe they can succeed in doing so this comes
    • pressing on so that they come to this change. I am speaking in Imaginations,
    • would come near to perceiving the world in this ghostly fashion. Even
    • the world comes from the will.
    • not come into our consciousness at all as something properly solid.
    • to the insensitive men of today as sophistry, must gradually become
    • look at the external world to become conscious of himself. In the mineral
    • have come from the spiritual world through birth. I have entered this
    • these beings are lacking. And if one comes down through birth, these
    • smell, would become half dead in the world one has entered. Before birth
    • The Soul's Awakening, scene 6) we become clear that something
    • by man between death and a new birth, comes upon them too abruptly.
    • And even this comes to an end when we pass the gate of death. Science
    • images of the age of the consciousness soul. This comes before him as
    • though he were saying to himself: Now that I come to see (this happens
    • in the subconscious, for it is there he comes to doubt immortality)
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Goetheanism as an Impulse for Man's Transformation - Lecture 4: Human Qualities Which Oppose Antroposophy
    Matching lines:
    • will become increasingly so for all men, to learn to understand the
    • far man can become ripe to look into the spiritual world himself is
    • do not become aware of the infinite and important number of experiences
    • more closely. It may be asked what actually comes to expression in this
    • of Spiritual Science as if it were a red hot coal. You come to a region
    • you need not twist round what I say. Nobody can come to spiritual experience
    • brought me these exhilarating moments of joy. But all that I know comes
    • from my pain, my knowledge comes from my suffering. Everyone who has
    • social questions can come only from the spiritual understanding of world
    • was sent to sleep wakes up, and it becomes clear what is holding sway
    • to become clear about this mother love, and then ask whether this mother
    • become one family. That is perfectly right, my dear friends, but just
    • of their soul—if this becomes direct experience, just as we experience
    • and we know how to distinguish in him between the man and what has overcome
    • today instinctively, but must become conscious that the development
    • paid to such a matter the spiritual horizon becomes wider. And this
    • come to any kind of understanding, for the actual methods of anthroposophical
    • say when it comes to the external conditions of life. You see, those
    • it is persecuted, how many come to hate it who were formerly keen adherents,
    • time. Such hostility very frequently becomes particularly strong, however,
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Goetheanism as an Impulse for Man's Transformation - Lecture 5: Paganism, Hebraism, and the Greek Spirit, Hellenism
    Matching lines:
    • this understanding. And because of this a man comes to a living understanding
    • side. We penetrate to the inner side by trying to become clear how this
    • ancient times by the way which man out of his own bodily nature becomes
    • there is no doubt it becomes impossible to bring the events of nature
    • the Jahve God, is obliged to play a part in what man has become in earthly
    • mankind had not come to the point of having done with these two main
    • having yet come to a conception of himself. At the time the Mystery
    • For when such a thing comes about there arises one of those events when
    • left as it did to the right. The agent towards the left comes about
    • that has come into earthly evolution, spread out over the lands of Judaism,
    • neither did Christianity take deep root in Greece, and when we come
    • sought to come on, to press on to man.
    • come to a comparatively high point. They absorbed into their still primitive
    • impulse, conceptions could only come to the people with the Christ impulse.
    • a way that He to come to had to standstill in face of the Conceptual
    • height this Graeco-Latin culture has come by the time the great—one
    • theory he comes to his grandiose outlook on nature, an outlook that
    • the idea will come to you: here in the soul of a man is living a new
    • understanding of the Mystery of Golgotha that had perforce to come.
    • We come to an understanding
  • Title: Goetheanism as an Impulse for Man's Transformation - Lecture 6: Goetheanism as an Impulse for Man's Transformation
    Matching lines:
    • to come up and down here—I believe that from the keenness with
    • standing-by, in all the help given her, how fond they had become of
    • content, of the Christ impulse that has come into the world through
    • belongs to the revelation of the Christ impulse. To come to a right
    • did not become free in the chaotic condition that it does today in sleep;
    • in the course of history. Something different had to come and the different
    • must the event of Golgotha become for this intellect that is above all
    • to Nature, must in honesty gradually come to own that he does not understand
    • was repeated. Yet in Goetheanism man still had not come to the point
    • well studied if one comes to a real understanding of the personality,
    • in mid-Europe from which it has streamed. There will come a time when
    • in what has for centuries come from Central Europe.
    • from this turning a fact becomes clear—it may be believed or not,
    • will then be the first beginnings of understanding that we have to overcome
    • consider what has come from Herman Grimm's pen about Goethe as the best
    • Indeed Herman Grimm, had it come his way, would have even gone to great
    • hints of what Goethe was hankering after, which however would not come
    • has become ever more impossible for Latin culture as well as for the
    • has become ever more impossible out of mere intellectuality to school
    • deed. Quite certainly the time has not come for Goetheanism to be able
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Regarding Higher Worlds
    Matching lines:
    • you have become learned in theory. It doesn't really come to
    • world view comes ever closer, and the world of feeling makes it
    • These revelations become absorbed just like facts on the
    • them, from one moment to the next become another, because the
    • to that being. It comes as an extraordinary surprise when some
    • person becomes polluted. From these thickenings exude evil
    • a way that folds are created, sections become slack and hang as
    • here, has an individual soul which comes to meet us — a soul
    • intelligence in such a flight of birds. Various birds come from
    • when we come to grips with it completely. Don't believe that
    • of conclusion is that of the astral. The plant would not come
    • being gradually becomes that which is being touched, not
    • one approaches, comes closer and merges with it. A third comes,
    • cooperation and hence becomes glowing and penetrated by
    • Thus if you are not thoroughly prepared it can become dangerous
    • astral world. Here you become aware, when you have developed
    • world become ever clearer and more distinct to observation and
    • dissolve into it if no other feeling nuance comes to the fore.
    • the physical world and hence this world becomes ever more
  • Title: Goethe's Relationship to his 'Faust'
    Matching lines:
    • to his “Faust.” One could easily come to the
    • gradually into our soul, that it becomes larger than all which
    • approach the spirit of revelation, and so we come to that which
    • that which is so emotionally inter-mixed does not come from
    • conclude in the illusion of a Mephistophelean danger comes down
    • which becomes a visionary life when it turns ill.
    • illusion in world knowledge. What does it come to when one
    • lives in our soul. We couldn't become wise or clever through
    • What did this knowledge of nature become? It was much spoken
    • Here self knowledge could come to its full right. However, now
    • In a wonderful, clear way they come to meet us. We then see how
    • lively reality. Now comes that towards which Goethe strives for
    • They had to become so blended together that they become one.
    • at the close overcome what he as younger man had rejected:
    • knowledge, through this he can overcome Mephistopheles. It is a
    • “Faust” has become no lesser work of art. It is
    • come, because when you really understand yourself, you have to
  • Title: What is Self-knowledge?
    Matching lines:
    • striving, but falsely understood, can become extremely
    • easily come to the conclusion that self-knowledge is something
    • cycle, that the human “I” can only become self
    • we, come to understand that which lives in the physical body
    • self-knowledge the ascent becomes just as dangerous as it
    • becomes firstly possible through genuine self-knowledge. This
    • measure with which to orientate himself. This measure becomes
    • — No self-knowledge which draws you into being overcome
    • abilities and here we come to a certain connection which is an
    • the human being here also doesn't come far when he or she
    • around us, how it becomes inclusive in relation to the physical
    • body. We become spiritually larger within, through spreading
    • feelings. For the clairvoyant awareness it becomes gradually
    • the aura spreading, enlarging, as we become refined and more
    • become liberated in their feeling and will impulses from
    • become independent from his talents and abilities. This healing
    • perceive how the aura becomes agile and vibrates. We will at
    • we come to the third important area. We reach, through
    • planning comes in direct opposition with the direction of his
    • should become more profound, seek God within, will hardly
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: The Building at Dornach (Bn/GA 289): Lecture I: The Goetheanum
    Matching lines:
    • of seeing it, may become acquainted with it. The very way in which this
    • tendencies of the present, which with their various programmes come
    • of mankind. The life of modern humanity has become simply intellectual;
    • it has become so because for centuries modern humanity has hardly received
    • the duality of that which is revealed and of that which comes to meet
    • sort of intuitive thought-form is necessary. We shall have to become
    • persons of artistic natures who happened to come among us were often
    • Now in this building we may say that this has been definitely overcome
    • but has only become different in the course of its metamorphosis; it
    • the case that metamorphosis comes about through that which in the one
    • feeling the form and in so doing, of arousing the mood that may come
    • how you come in or out there, and how you go up the stairs, meeting
    • that comes when one intuitively feels the supporting strength, which
  • Title: The Building at Dornach (Bn/GA 289): Lecture II: Bau Lecture II
    Matching lines:
    • When we come from the
    • that which is to come after. Through the entire development here neither
    • see as we continue that things become more and more complicated. That
    • and how the architrave motif becomes extremely complicated as it develops
    • as a composition that has not come into being as an isolated idea.
    • evolution has come into being in modern times owing to this mistake.
    • stage has been achieved there come; a return to the simple and the complicated
    • it becomes apparent to you what is organic and growing and in this way
    • relationship (or connection) in which you come with the living principle
    • comes the simple, in so far as this simple form builds itself up on
    • to what kind, of representation we must progress if we would come to
    • conceptions cannot suffice for life. From this comes the present conception
    • which the mind can act a pretty play had to come to an end. In our time
    • We must overcome all that pertains to day-dreaming, we must overcome
    • to-day when they are confronted with Art tend to become a little dreamy
    • with this kind of sleeping consciousness come into this Building and
    • thing with which we are concerned is to become wider awake than we are
    • to be profoundly stirred and become more awake and aware than we are
    • and it is from this sleep that our principle misfortunes come. That
    • Eurhythmics should not be overcome in the struggle he has to wage continually
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: The Building at Dornach (Bn/GA 289): Lecture III: Lecture 3
    Matching lines:
    • expression, yet the time has come when a spiritualization of our cosmic
    • would come to expression. And we do not fully perceive this interchange
    • of the world to come extent, there is a reversed order, as compared
    • the feeling: Thou makest thyself indeed free, but in so doing thou comest
    • no counterpart in the composition. Therefore, before we come to this
    • civilisation comes into this figure. Thus you see the actual human history
    • is just what must be overcome. There are many more elementary impressions
    • their living relationship to each other. The inspiration that come from
    • In our attempt to show form we come to figures which are no longer human-like
    • softening, which arises when the blood gains the upper hand, comes from
    • we shall come to the understanding of the Christ. It is just the task
    • come forth from that which is on the wall itself.
    • to-day without taking up the impulses which come to us from this knowledge
    • come firstly, in which it will be possible not to have to approach closed
  • Title: Problem of Faust: Lecture I: The Problem of Faust
    Matching lines:
    • that has come to an end. He can look back only on ruins. To
    • indeed of many centuries to come. Hence we see Goethe's Faust
    • touching on such a question we come at the same time to one
    • away, the new has not yet come. Then arise such moods as may
    • he refuses the people's homage. An old peasant comes forward
    • all that he has become spiritualised. Faust cannot remain
    • of the spirit that comes to him from theories, from
    • parchments, from books, ma calls the mood that has come over
    • A blissful warmth in every limb comes o'er you;
    • the distance a poodle comes leaping towards Faust and Wagner.
    • The strangers' welcome be. He thought his lord to
    • whom Faust has to overcome, and he is associated with him
    • just in order that he may overcome him, having been given him
    • the head, but he realises how reason can become living
    • seeks to come nearer that towards which he is being pressed
    • depths concealed in it become evident. All the temptations I
    • there as the Christ, he overcomes the opposing spirit. He
    • become much more than a travelling student with all a
    • trying to show Faust's other ego, so that he may come to know
    • that men are not trying to come to the new spiritual research
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Problem of Faust: Lecture II: The Romantic Walpurgis-Night
    Matching lines:
    • own satisfaction how it comes about that, two days after the
    • difficulty of understanding can never be overcome unless we
    • reverence, that you should come with me at a fixed time next
    • comes next lost to the Will-o'-the-wisps:
    • Far-off times, comes faintly ringing.”
    • assigns what comes next Mephistopheles: it belongs, of
    • voice comes:
    • “Which way, comest thou
    • Come with us, come, from the
    • come to the Brocken as witches in the present — for
    • beings to appear among the witch-souls. And then comes a
    • half-witch comes slowly trotting up the mountain. Here then
    • overcome time, that has remained behind in time. Many of the
    • naturally become rather — painful. It is all very well
    • what comes to light when those experienced in such matters
    • trivialities. And then Faust becomes impatient, for he had
    • “See where yon snail comes
    • come to a lively club. We are still in the spiritual world,
    • of course, and they come to this lively club. Goethe
    • should not these souls so come out of their bodies that they
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Problem of Faust: Lecture III: Goethe's Feeling for the Concrete.
    Matching lines:
    • may become conscious of his divine spiritual origin. Fichte
    • ancient Greece but through it becomes paralyzed.
    • also comes to life. Thus, in this sense we have essentially
    • become what we now see? Is it possible that in him Goethe was
    • begin with he has no qualms; they will come later. He is not
    • created the whole world. It had become an idée
    • this man the striving after the Absolute has become the
    • sense, but she must become more substantial.
    • ahrimanic impulses given when something actually comes into
    • Wagner come from the old “Faust” then still in
    • Homunculus comes into being. But he does come into being, is
    • instructions. And Homunculus does in fact immediately become
    • traversing the rounds of nature Helen becomes, externally on
    • this, Goethe comes very near true Occultism, that through
    • that are powerless to come to any understanding of real-life.
    • expression, to ‘become young’ meant to ‘be
    • dear friends, we might say: If only the time might come when
    • rises to Goethe's level — should try to become clear as
    • What becomes of me when you all go away?”
    • become universal and historic. Thus it has become possible
  • Title: Problem of Faust: Lecture IV: Faust and the "Mothers"
    Matching lines:
    • to indicate. It comes indeed out of Goethe's immediate soul
    • meditation. The cause comes from without. It is
    • come to the sphere that can be called the sphere of action in
    • from which our sense-world is drawn. And Faust is to become
    • is consummated. The man who is about to become physical
    • the human cell. These forces however do not come from the
    • uneasiness; in a certain way it becomes dangerous for him
    • that he would, become free from Mephistopheles. The other
    • intellect become clouded. Mephistopheles really puts himself
    • its source down to its mouth always comes over again from the
    • question of rejuvenating water does not come into
    • these forces has already become so duting the fifth
    • consciousness to become present in their minds. Remember what
    • into historic processes. And at the end you come to what I
  • Title: Problem of Faust: Lecture V: Faust and the Problem of Evil
    Matching lines:
    • with which the individuals living in these epochs must come
    • things have become rather vague and obliterated in our time.
    • as will become the wrestlings of the fifth post-Atlantean
    • peculiar to man that he can only come to terms with the
    • Graeco-Latin epoch must also become impulses of human beings
    • comes together with Helena.
    • the Witches' Kitchen Scene we have an Idea that has become
    • transformed into Imagination; it is Feeling that has become
    • Feeling that has become Imagination.
    • Phantasmagoria’ is Willing that has become
    • legend is well known; the other has also become known, for
    • all things esoteric become exoteric by-and-by. The exoteric
    • not to the reality come to her ears, and in the last resort
    • impulses of human evolution must become sharp and clear
    • Whence comes
    • Helena comes from the stars; but she guides the impulses
  • Title: Problem of Faust: Lecture VI: The Helena Saga and the Riddle of Freedom
    Matching lines:
    • overcome the powers of Evil, partly to transmute them into
    • Electricity itself, Evil comes over the Earth.
    • that, and cannot become abstractly pious all at once. On the
    • would become his father's murderer and live in incest with
    • home-country; otherwise thou wilt become thy father's
    • becomes a rebel against the bonds of blood and thereby
    • question which can come before us very clearly in this field,
    • As a result of their conflict, there comes clown on to the
    • it is true, but the point is that Paris only becomes fully
    • Number that you will come to the solution of this Riddle of
    • human being can only come to spiritual freedom by growing
    • falls, the ray will come in good time; of that you may be
  • Title: Problem of Faust: Lecture VII: Some Spiritual-Scientific Observations
    Matching lines:
    • yet come to him in clearly defined ideas. A poet whose
    • own bodily organisation, becomes capable of achieving self
    • then be the being who only becomes ripe for self-knowledge in
    • these things has come about in the first half of life we do
    • we ask where the blame lies for this, we come to the other
    • currents influencing man. We come to a stream that does not
    • the time being associated with him; we come to the Luciferic
    • stream (yellow in diagram), we come to that stream which
    • self-knowledge. And what did the Homunculus-figure become
    • science is in truth small, that'll is no scan that comes into
    • to suggest that man in his dreams comes near the riddle of
    • theory of knowledge! But then he never would have become
    • only comes to know through his dreams, which do interpret it
    • correct significance. That is why it is so difficult to come
    • must picture as though our metals were gradually to become so
    • glowing and fiery that at last they become actually nothing
    • — are down there in the world out of which dreams come
    • separate. That has come about because the water-air,
    • wished, and become hot or cold in the element of fire. And in
    • become this solid planet on which man can stand at the same
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Problem of Faust: Lecture VIII: Spiritual Science Considered with the Classical Walpurgis-Night
    Matching lines:
    • further, and then we shall come increasingly near to the
    • evoking all kinds of images as they come and go, ideas that
    • from innumerable people forces come to you. I cannot say that
    • come to something else significant. Out of the unconscious
    • evolution, to come to a knowledge of Spiritual Science. There
    • become anthroposophists, appears to differ very little from
    • give, they will be found to become, especially as they
    • attention to such things, we come to the differentiation of
    • accessible, become a Homo? — Not through the ordinary
    • become Homo. He is on the track of two philosophers,
    • Königsberg to get information from Kant on how to become
    • which, in their nature, the ants, the comets, and also the
    • to what has become”.
    • sees around him is what has become. Anaxagoras enters into
    • like the comets, for example, really belonged by nature to a
    • the world of the Pigmies, the comets, and so forth, and even
    • no match for Thales' objections, for these come from the
    • relation to Nature out of his subconscious, that never comes
    • feelings and impulses, prevailing in the human being, come
    • ideas and life of Greece, he would come nearer to the
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Problem of Faust: Lecture IX: Goethe's Life of the Soul from the Standpoint of Spiritual Science
    Matching lines:
    • also it only becomes clear how such a life of soul is
    • when it comes to art. This increasingly disturbed Goethe and
    • etheric body. And they become overdone, all these theories
    • world outlook at all — how is this? This comes about
    • quite definite way. He either becomes a scientist, learning
    • permeate natural phenomena with these; or, he becomes a
    • task when it comes to sound natural science. Should we really
    • come to a natural science of this kind, we shall then
    • come to a ‘Homunculus’ not to a
    • should have come to such perception of the mutual reflection
    • I have tried to understand what comes latest in Goethe's
    • particularly ugly phenomena have come to light as, for
    • absconditus’, the hidden God, that also comes to appearance
    • Christian Churches has become accentuated. The historical
    • Luther and those of Calvin. The extreme Anglicans have become
    • outlook is needed. But the moment men should really come to
    • does not appeal to them. One then comes to astonishing
    • the old way of looking at the world has come to grief. dut
    • in a general way this would naturally become abstract and
    • he has to overcome if he wants to make his way to the
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Problem of Faust: Lecture X: Faust's Knowledge and Understanding of Himself
    Matching lines:
    • from “Faust” just presented, which comes at the
    • human being must come if he wishes to acquire complete
    • Homunculus; if, however, he wishes to become a real man, he
    • then, must take place when Homunculus is to become Homo, when
    • the outlook of Homunculus is to become the outlook of Homo?
    • everything becomes real. Then we have to come upon those
    • Mysteries of Samothrace was supposed to come to the
    • incarnating soul a man arises, a man comes to birth. In the
    • This is what comes before the eye of man.
    • man — then the nearer you come to this secret.
    • has peculiar experiences in this regard. Men come to a
    • Thales himself cannot be made to help Homunculus to become
    • to advise Homunculus how to become man, complete man. For
    • Homunculus is to become man? Nereus has indeed understanding,
    • Spiritual Science is presented here, it becomes
    • importance; how in later life he becomes spiritual. This,
    • prepared for it. He becomes spiritual as the body falls into
    • decay, as the body becomes dry and sclerotic the spirit
    • becomes free, even during the waking condition. Only, a man
    • into which we men and women grow as we become old. There you
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Problem of Faust: Lecture XI: The Vision of Reality in the Greek Myths
    Matching lines:
    • comes into the idea of Homunculus. Yesterday I went more
    • soul only Homunculus, an elemental spirit who has come to a
    • outside his body, becomes able to perceive what is around
    • for modern man who has become so abstract. They felt with
    • become living, as demonic beings of the sea, only when the
    • Homunculus is to become Homo, to become man, and because the
    • Homunculus can never become Homo. Thus Goethe believes in all
    • Homunculus, with the help of that Mystery, to come to Homo.
    • to show Homunculus how to become Homo. This Nereus has a
    • that this is not the path. For on this path we come to a
    • conception, the abstract Homunculus-idea can become that of
    • come nearer the solution of the Homunculus-Homo problem if
    • up to man, hoping in this way to come nearer the riddle of
    • becomes the stamen and pistil of the flower. He also believed
    • incarnation, it becomes my next head. This is the crown of
    • here brought in by Goethe. Now he again comes to a
    • will see how Goethe sought to come nearer knowledge of the
    • beautifully expresses it in this book, nature becomes
    • When you turn the page, you come to the
    • Leaving the shore where we but now did land, I come
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Problem of Faust: Lecture XII: Goetheanism In Place of Homunculism and Mephistophelianism
    Matching lines:
    • towards spiritual experience. One of these feelings comes
    • darkness. he imagines it will only become clear when he
    • — Thus he comes to one of the boundaries to which he is
    • into action, we again come to a boundary. Fundamentally,
    • — or rather a Christianity that comes to activity
    • come. It is only when this coming age has passed over from a
    • how the whole of evolution is now conceived as if what come
    • this way you do not arrive at man, you would never come to
    • possibilities did not come to anything, for these were met by
    • animal kingdom rises to a certain height; then comes the
    • point of view. What would man have become had he just been
    • may so express it, by what comes from above out of the
    • Only because the spiritual comes from above and, as it were,
    • unattractive; and this is really what would come into being
    • produce something. There would come forth a sort of animal
    • were the outcome of
    • entered that, in order to overcome temptation, we should
    • strive in the right way to come to know the tempter, not
    • what you feel when Mephistopheles becomes a Phorkyad among
    • this Homunculus is. We come from the spiritual world seeking
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Anthroposophy as a Demand of the Times
    Matching lines:
    • humanity that one has to come to a halt at that which can be
    • does not yet come to the consciousness of many people, but
    • that which does not come from his physical nature, the moral
    • forces are just as valid as that which comes out of the brute
    • From this there come to man today not only theoretical doubts
    • come to this supersensible perception there is a point of view,
    • while one is striving towards such knowledge and just comes to
    • from one another comes together. By putting together fragments
    • which come into play, if one wants to recognise in the symbols
    • one can come to such a certainty. Because what we are inside
    • strengthen the soul life so that we come to that which in the
    • subconscious. One comes to this by accustoming oneself to
    • waking person. To the dreamer the symbols come spontaneously,
    • to the waking person the conceptual images come through outer
    • by outer observation. But he who in all seriousness becomes a
    • not such a fictitious one. He who becomes an imitator of dream
    • becomes aware of how a living inner being, something active,
    • is absolutely self-image, illusion. Therefore he comes to the
    • a general feeling of ego or self becomes a strongly felt inner
    • activity. If one wants to become a spiritual scientist and not
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: The Ten Commandments
    Matching lines:
    • souls, can become a specific connecting thread allowing an
    • we come to the third cultural epoch which we encounter mainly
    • After death however, when they have become sufficiently worthy,
    • and grandparents and their bodies will become stultified. If
    • “I” as divine, the way is given to become free from
    • for the Jewish people to become the most prepared people for
    • people had to, in order to become free, find the source of
    • generation to the next. We don't come to a real understanding
    • their bodies will become stultified.” You produce
    • are correctly translated. It becomes clear to us from the
    • sometimes it doesn't at all come down to stating a precise
    • festive day, so that the image of Your Being becomes the image
    • we come to the Commandments where your independent
    • which entered into mankind. Yet, what had to come through
    • “No one comes to the Father but through Me.” At
  • Title: Way of Knowledge
    Matching lines:
    • this: in our time we will gradually come to say: Of thoughts
    • work into us, it becomes transformed in us as feelings, as soul
    • things come about, than it is to penetrate behind the sensual
    • spiritual events to work through the soul, we become warm,
    • to come to grips with the relationship between the outer
    • and the apparently lifeless world of stones we can come to
    • about these things they come to believe that everything
    • the rest of nature becomes understandable in a wonderful way.
    • justified, even though it causes pain. Something else comes to
    • a single being, but becomes part of the great living being,
    • spirit and can penetrate all. So our earth becomes a living
    • being. So every single plant becomes something which grows out
    • of a large supersensible being and, on the surface, becomes
    • safe within the soul-spiritual. Gradually it becomes possible
    • time it will become old and aged.
    • between sun and earth has come about during many, many millions
    • Christ. Paul didn't become a believer through sharing the life
    • one comes to an understanding of the Events of Damascus but
    • spirit in the astral world, who had become the earth spirit; he
    • become a worthy body for the Christ-Spirit and while the earth
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Haeckel, "The Riddle of the Universe," Theosophy
    Matching lines:
    • of life comes to be considered, the suggestion is ever present
    • become interwoven with explanations relating to the facts
    • come within this period of materialism. Had these discoveries
    • been able to “come into line;” he has not succeeded
    • reason he comes to the conclusion that even the smallest living
    • higher and lower species of apes, and that we could but come to
    • ancestry comes in?’ Huxley did not rise till the meeting called
    • entity by which man becomes a spiritual being. No mental
    • spiritual observer; he must become one. become a
    • evidences of his senses. What does not come within the scope of
    • hours you have come to “live in your dreams,” if,
    • soon come a time when you will learn, by these new experiences,
    • become audible, telling their spiritual names, and able to
    • he becomes aware of that harmony of the spheres, that truth to
    • Tones and sounds, this music of the spheres, now become, for
    • senses, if he should come to see and hear that there is such a
    • incomplete brain, enabling it at a later period to become the
    • something we may call spiritual, but he has as yet not come to
    • that has overcome the ancient superstitions. Yet theosophists
  • Title: Karmic Relationships, Volume III: Lecture I
    Matching lines:
    • it with the help of Anthroposophy, but as soon as it becomes a
    • this: At the beginning of his earthly life, man becomes capable
    • then have come about?
    • never have come to expression in the fullest sense: I mean the
    • evolution of the Consciousness Soul would not have come about.
    • Nevertheless, if their idea had become dominant in Europe, only
    • become vaguer and vaguer. People would increasingly have fixed
    • not really come to an end until the 16th or 17th century.
    • that a younger priest would come to an older priest, telling of
    • comparison. Today the thinking of many people has become quite
    • automatic. Today we are scarcely overcome by the longing to
    • them that his thoughts had become condensed, consolidated once
    • people become unconscious during earthly life of what is there
    • begin to think along these lines the strangest nonsense becomes
    • living thought. For otherwise it will come about more and more
    • thinking. For then they become distorted, misrepresented truth,
  • Title: Cosmic Forces in Man: Lecture I: Cosmic Forces in Man
    Matching lines:
    • will come in European affairs when much will depend upon whether
    • is bound to come to grief if attention is not turned to the
    • gradually come to feel himself living on Earth just as a mole might
    • Earthly existence has finally come to be regarded as confined within
    • but until it becomes a natural matter of course to speak of
    • it comes to the question of pre-existence, of the life before
    • this knowledge was the outcome of ancient clairvoyance, hence the
    • indicate very briefly that it must become possible for man once again
  • Title: Cosmic Forces in Man: Lecture II: The Soul Life of Man ...
    Matching lines:
    • metabolic system, for example. When metabolism becomes too strong in
    • for what works more from out of the unconscious, to become
    • we wake in the morning and become aware of the colours and sounds of
    • forces which enable him to come into contact with his Angel. Whenever
    • feelings and thoughts which come with us, and the more we bring, the
    • more intimate becomes our relation to the Angel while we are asleep.
    • whereby our relation to the Angel becomes more and more intimate.
    • acquires its real significance for us when it becomes our environment
    • clearer does our consciousness become.
    • Now between death and a new birth there comes a time when the Angel
    • moment comes when the Angel must as it were deliver up to the
    • love, of piety, when the time comes for the Angel to pass on to the
    • Before the Midnight Hour of Existence man has become more and more
    • And now comes another important point in the life between death and a
    • with deep and inward love for what will become his mother-tongue, or
    • being. He becomes one with it. This love is absolutely natural to him;
    • folk and our language. The former conditions never come to expression
    • come down into race and language through the stream of heredity,
    • death and a new birth when man comes for the second time into the
    • such a case the individual life also becomes unfree. This lack of
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Cosmic Forces in Man: Lecture III: The Mission of the Scandanavian Peoples
    Matching lines:
    • with the world of the higher Hierarchies becomes especially noticeable
    • stretching between death and a new birth. As soon as we come to study
    • feeling. Our thinking faculty per se comes with us at birth
    • The faculty of thinking which we bring with us at birth, comes to an
    • there before birth or conception and has come down with us into the
    • connected with selflessness in man, whereas human egotism comes
    • that must be made clear to him. But in spiritual matters man has become
    • programmes, men disperse without having come to any real decision
    • had suddenly become frenzied with desire to tear one another to
    • otherwise have come to pass only in the course of centuries.
    • the highest form of wisdom. A change comes about in this respect, but
    • illumination of the highest wisdom if they were to become intelligible
    • which man brings to expression in his life on the physical Earth comes
    • on the Earth, he comes down from world of soul-and-spirit and there is
    • one soul has the urge to become a Norwegian, and another a Swede. But
    • everywhere deflected. They do not become really active. They cannot
    • what man is and has become through many earthly lives, when we have
    • understand what comes to pass on Earth. In the external national
    • what they have become to-day as a result of these experiences. We have
    • and the course of their historical evolution, remarkable things come
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Spirit of Fichte: Lecture I: The Spirit of Fichte Present in Our Midst
    Matching lines:
    • there, gave him a cuff and told him to come along home.
    • visiting the landowner in Rammenau. He had come over from his
    • seemed to have so imbibed it that it had become part of himself.
    • such a responsibility was bound to be extremely welcome to them,
    • other children had come, till they were now a large family; and so
    • opportune moment, appeared the writer Weisse, who had become one of his
    • directing the intellectual life in that University welcomed with the
    • about world mysteries, then, and only then, did he come before his
    • hearers. His endeavour was that what had come to life in his soul
    • concerning the world mysteries should come to life likewise
    • them profoundly. The spirit at work in Fichte had to come to grips with
    • his courses at Jena had ever come into contact with such teaching
    • assimilated that education till it had become the most fundamental
    • growth and work, until at last he becomes, as we have been able to
    • gestures in his dealings with other people. But here we come to an
    • had sent for him will come to this conclusion: that those people
    • mind thus comes to regard the world as a chain of exterior
    • necessities. And in Part III we come to the enquiry as to how the
    • after going on to discuss what a man should become in life if in
    • in a blue smock of whom earlier we had a glimpse. We have come now
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: The Christmas Festival In The Changing Course Of Time
    Matching lines:
    • greatness any longer, a greatness to which humanity had become
    • that times have changed, and that in our modern cities it has become
    • be present — that humanity can once again come to experience the
    • these can no longer exist at present. What has become often a mere
    • and what should it become in the future? To this end, let us compare,
    • this mood of the present time with what can come about in the soul as
    • Christmas or Easter. Today it has become very difficult indeed,
    • darkness has come about. Long have the nights become, shortened are
    • Story.” The actual Christmas plays had already become quite rare,
    • their souls. Grotesque, comedy-like presentations of sacred scenes,
    • such as have become customary in our time in imitation of the Passion
    • the entire progress of humanity through certain words which have come
    • in such a Christmas play should become signposts, as it were, by which
    • says, “The time has come, I see a little child”, this means
    • most sacred mood, like a mystery, has become merely external poetry,
    • Christ Impulse, which comes forth from our spiritual movement, will
    • become something able to give us solace and comfort in the darkest
    • spiritual life. Yes indeed, cradles shall our places of work become at
    • essence humanity must come to feel spirituality as a resurrection, by
  • Title: Occult Significance of the Bhagavad Gita: Lecture 1 of 9
    Matching lines:
    • which, ancient as it is, yet in its foundations comes before us with
    • peoples become familiar with this marvelous song. But these lectures
    • against mere familiarity with it, can only come when its occult
    • in a time when he could become acquainted with the wondrous things
    • start to be a fratricidal conflict. He comes before us as one who is
    • own blood relations. His bow falls from his grasp when it becomes
    • picture before our eyes it is almost as though the teaching becomes
    • that have only become known in this last century, very little
    • overcome by the strong desire to see the form, the spiritual form of
    • inevitable force that can come only from the impulse of so sublime a
    • comes to men of the West who undoubtedly have an
    • understanding for earthly things! It comes to men who have attained
    • have no doubt whatever about it but becomes confused instead with the
    • us. It will be our task to get beyond what seems so strange and come
  • Title: Occult Significance of the Bhagavad Gita: Lecture 2 of 9
    Matching lines:
    • occult record it becomes ever clearer that it is really most
    • fact, as we may come back to it in the course of these lectures.
    • fight against them. While fear and terror come over him and he is
    • allowed to become unbalanced. The upheaval that may be the
    • and calm. To this end a person who is striving to become ripe for
    • of mankind, of the earth, of the whole planetary system become his
    • learn of the mighty upheaval of the soul that has to come at the
    • charioteer becomes the instrument through which the god Krishna
    • clairvoyant. If that were true they could never become clairvoyant at
    • become so?” This is just the point. It is most important to
    • and ideas. We must realize that these come to us from the
    • concepts and ideas come into the human soul, not from the world of
    • come from super-sensible, spiritual knowledge. It was not understood
    • Loneliness! It is the icy cold of loneliness. Furthermore, it comes
    • ideas. You become utterly bewildered in your world of ideas, an
    • which your ideas have come. Now only, after the bitterness of doubt,
    • to be, since you imagined that the ideas had come into your soul from
    • in earnest with what has today come to be a trivial, commonplace
    • suggest to you that it would be quite simple for someone to come
    • his soul, is bound to come to such conceptions. Herein all dogmatism
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Occult Significance of the Bhagavad Gita: Lecture 3 of 9
    Matching lines:
    • sleeping — our dream consciousness. We cannot become familiar
    • afterward, we come to analyze them objectively we can be struck
    • experienced in the outer world. But it is just when we become more
    • arising in me. It is as though some being had come near to me who
    • intellect, then my soul had greater power. My soul could come freely
    • ordinary consciousness. This recognition can become still more
    • welcomed it gladly. Something lives in us that felt a kind of delight
    • events that come to us in the course of our destiny. We meet these
    • that had longed to live through what we felt to be so unwelcome. This
    • from what we imagine. It is just this difference that now becomes
    • given for soul development you will soon realize that it all comes to
    • find their way in if we have come so far as to alter our sympathies
    • occultism. For example, they become vegetarians. In spite of all
    • practice, we become aware of a certain layer of consciousness present
    • it only becomes such through our carrying into it what we experience
    • bitter feelings, let us try to understand how one actually comes to
    • necessary, to become ever more perfect. This feeling is stronger than
    • nearly strong enough to overcome the feeling of revulsion that says,
    • has even received personal instructions. He comes to his instructor
    • here. His ordinary ego has come into this world in order to evolve.
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Occult Significance of the Bhagavad Gita: Lecture 4 of 9
    Matching lines:
    • fear and shyness comes over him if he has not yet attained it. He tends
    • how they come into being and pass away again, but he would ask no
    • The philosopher replied, “Look at a fair or market; men come to
    • but become altogether wrong if they linger on for centuries, or as in
    • what it is that comes into the soul that does not belong to this
    • say that buyers and sellers come and go. When at length they close
    • a spiritual culture. Otherwise we shall be overcome by
    • pay attention to all that comes from the higher hierarchies but
    • spiritual that comes from the physical plane.
    • of the more acute power of judgment that must come with our enhanced
    • would become one-sided, it would not bring forth all the fullness of
    • must be included which come from the evil beings. There is great
    • their scholarly viewpoint. But what they set out to criticize comes
    • way. When truths come to us in that higher realm and enter our
    • ourselves, just as in the outer world we come across a flower or
    • would be no sense in asking about these truths that we simply come
    • falsehood only come into the picture when it is a question of our
    • He would become a true
    • he is able to become a twofold man. Those who have the power at will
  • Title: Occult Significance of the Bhagavad Gita: Lecture 5 of 9
    Matching lines:
    • intellectualism will go on adhering to it for some time to come, but
    • more become evident how the new mode of thought has to come in touch
    • with the reality of things. Thought will become very different from
    • now approaching it will become evident in more and more people. Now
    • evolution for the forces at work preparing the future to become free
    • for a moment and become clairvoyantly visible.
    • them, for they have become forces of the soul. Here we have a cycle
    • known world from the unknown. In the last few days I have again come
    • it will become later on. So we must say that until the period when
    • withdraw the constructive forces and become clairvoyant. Or what men
    • tells us how under special circumstances a man could come into the
  • Title: Occult Significance of the Bhagavad Gita: Lecture 6 of 9
    Matching lines:
    • it hard for people to come to a sound judgment in such matters. They
    • definite, familiar feelings. Then comes a still greater climax. We
    • are told how the soul can become ever more free of the outer bodily
    • actions the body experiences. The soul can become a complete whole,
    • independent of outer things as it gradually attains Yoga and becomes
    • discourse. What can come next, now that we have reached the climax of
    • of Arjuna’s opened vision comes before us. Arjuna becomes the
    • them. And what I have done will through thee become perceptible.
    • in the age to come; that into this center there were focused the
    • planted; the highest they can attain is to become free souls.
    • Free — that is what men will become if they bring to full
    • else came in. The Krishna Impulse comes into man’s soul when
    • come together in the age of the mid-point of evolution, even though
    • they come from diametrically opposite directions. We can make very
  • Title: Occult Significance of the Bhagavad Gita: Lecture 7 of 9
    Matching lines:
    • human forces, can only be perceived by man when he becomes
    • it will become possible to discover them if not to perceive them.
    • to know the truth. It will draw certain conclusions and thus come
    • in man there are at work forces that can become capable of either
    • from man ‘become’ to man ‘becoming;’ from man
    • becomes sexually mature. But the body of this child that had
    • in Jordan, there comes toward this special human body what now
    • Christ now comes toward the physical body from the other side. In the
    • yesterday we thought of abstractly. What belongs to all mankind comes
    • reason but our whole soul is illumined when we let the truth come to
    • with all the faculties of our soul. Then we shall ourselves become
  • Title: Occult Significance of the Bhagavad Gita: Lecture 8 of 9
    Matching lines:
    • real depth, even afterward when it passes over and becomes the
    • Thus it comes about
    • a rule we cannot find the way to come near to an understanding of
    • were in the world in that ancient epoch. They would have come in
    • fate of truth that it must always become paradoxical in the world.
    • Shankaracharya himself, had come again in the nineteenth century and
    • which men were striving upward; today it has come down and is
    • sattwa, rajas and tamas exhaustively. I only want to help you to come
    • have come nearer to the idea of life by producing external forms that
    • rajas-understanding. When we come to the animal kingdom, its
    • differences do not come into consideration because we have the tamas
  • Title: Occult Significance of the Bhagavad Gita: Lecture 9 of 9
    Matching lines:
    • tamas food what had become rotten, had stood too long, and had a foul
    • to it but meets it with what he himself is. For example, he becomes
    • But man must gradually become apathetic to the physical world in
    • his surroundings. However, when the world about him becomes so
    • becomes more and more free of the world, more independent in
    • abstract concepts, but afterward these become more and more vivid.
    • he does not want to lift himself up to them. He wants them to come
    • he who would truly become free in his soul, who does not wish to be
    • and in thine own self become as one who lays hold of himself. Learn
    • Arjuna's highest endeavor has become the greatest suffering for many
    • must say, “I have to come; I have to give thee the ego-man, a
    • generator of the self-consciousness that is to come, Krishna calls
    • him to become ever more perfect as an individual being. The Krishna
    • teaching, how it directs man to put aside all externals, to become
    • antagonist Lucifer had come; he who said, “Your eyes will be
    • striving for perfection has become too strong. It has gone so far
    • become a means of shedding light on all religions. He must learn to
    • easily when it comes to comparing religions. It will not do to
    • outcome of the dilettante comparison of religions that can also be
    • conditions that have now become necessary. It is certainly more
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Mysteries of the East: Lecture 1
    Matching lines:
    • carried through in the right way. Sense-impressions become merely a
    • of humanity. First, by way of introduction, we must come to an
    • becomes for him a matter of knowledge, equally with his knowledge of
    • Mysteries, everything in his soul-life must gradually become
    • figure in ordinary soul-life must all become a means to higher
    • if he wants to be an Initiate of a certain degree he must come to the
    • become transparent, and he must be able to see what he wants to see
    • to be a boundary. It becomes transparent, and behind it appears that
    • it becomes transparent and is eliminated by the soul-force which has
    • themselves a complete experience, after Initiation they become merely
    • that the Initiate could ever come to a time when he would regard
    • object of the life of the soul, thinking must become merely a means to
    • themselves; for the Initiate they become the means of expressing what
    • come down from the level where he sees in a flash what has to be done,
    • Initiation, then comes to a very remarkable piece of knowledge: the
    • Initiation. Through inner experience he must come to know what these
    • what is meant by having “come into contact with Death”, by
    • “To come into the vicinity of Death.” The point here is that
    • which I have just been saying: it must be overcome, must become for
    • experiences of his soul. All this must become merely a means, as soon
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Mysteries of the East: Lecture 2
    Matching lines:
    • fate of morally irresponsible souls after death is to become the
    • Love of ease a widespread attribute. Souls subject to it become
    • This requirement is shown by the fact that when the soul becomes
    • contemplation, so that they become capable of conscious experience
    • what good thing the rock crystal has done that it should have become a
    • seer has in all earnestness come as far as we have already indicated,
    • a certain category — have become the servants of very terrible
    • ask ourselves: Whence come the forces which are responsible for these
    • physical world comes about through influences from the spiritual
    • become servants of the evil spirits of illness and death, and have
    • which things come about in the higher worlds is dependent on beings
    • indolence — they become servants of the god or gods of
    • again how moral and natural law intermingle as soon as we come into
    • Such are the experiences that are gone through when one has come to
    • will mount upwards stage by stage. For him who wants to become an
    • indeed come stage by stage into the higher worlds, but from this
    • sojourn in the higher worlds he must again come forth and live in the
    • after he has become an Initiate, that while moving around in the
    • feelings and perceptions remain with him, once he has become a seer;
    • do not let us imagine that anyone who has become a seer must forfeit
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Mysteries of the East: Lecture 3
    Matching lines:
    • rise. Yes, from these memory pictures you may well come to recognise
    • etheric bodies come into existence within the physical world. He
    • learns to understand this thoroughly. He comes to understand how
    • Then, however, arises a great longing, a longing that becomes terrible
    • come into existence. Whereas the seer can discern exactly how the
    • marvellous construction such as the human brain could come into
    • They knew they had come to the farthest point attainable. In the
    • through cosmic realms and have come to know the beings and forces that
    • for after it all things become in some sense different.
    • beings whom he has already come to know, and who make it clear to him
    • weaving in the innermost astral being of the man himself. It becomes
    • before the silent Goddess from whom Warmth and Light come forth for
    • he could also become acquainted with the Light which illumines the
    • and that wherein one met only the mute, mourning Isis and could become
    • the higher worlds, becomes acquainted with all the Beings who
    • which separates the evolution of humanity into two parts. We have come
  • Title: Mysteries of the East: Lecture 4
    Matching lines:
    • This Standing before the Upper and the Lower Gods comes about when the
    • Osiris legend we learn that the spouse of Isis was overcome by the
    • enemy and torn away from her. But we have also come to know the
    • But since we have become accustomed to bring in pictures as a help in
    • our ordinary speech, which has already become so secular, fails us,
    • all being and development. Now the Word has become mute and silent.
    • as the Creative Word, had gradually become lost to the experience of
    • Earth-region so that He could gradually come to life again in the
    • How did That reappear which had become submerged in ancient Egypt? It
    • added, something new which must come from the Consciousness Soul to
    • astral body from his physical and etheric bodies and come forth from
    • toward death. We investigate how this has come about, and we find that
    • can become master of the dead part. Montsalvat, the sanctuary of the
    • order to become master of the part of the physical body that has died,
    • and the part of the soul that has become unconscious. Hence, in these
    • that had become dead, and to the part of the human soul that had
    • become unconscious. This domain, into which were justly transferred
    • part of the human soul that had become unconscious and on the portion
    • of the human organism that had become dead.
    • comes into the neighbourhood of those places from which can emanate
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Esoteric Cosmology: Lecture I: The Birth of the Intellect and the Mission of Christianity
    Matching lines:
    • the centuries to come, and to which he will be wending his way from
    • Scandinavian and Germanic myths of Sigurd and Gudrun. Love becomes an
    • faculties unite once more and become dynamic through the power of the
    • become Theosophy.
  • Title: Esoteric Cosmology: Lecture II: The Mission of Manicheism
    Matching lines:
    • that when Noah's Ark had come to rest, the rainbow, the “bow in
    • ancestor, whose higher development comes to expression in man.
  • Title: Esoteric Cosmology: Lecture III: God, Man, Nature
    Matching lines:
    • A star is visible in the heavens only when it has become mineral. Thus
    • How comes it that the animals and man out-breathe love?
  • Title: Esoteric Cosmology: Lecture IV: Involution and Evolution
    Matching lines:
    • to physical life — organs which have now become useless,
    • body; its mission is to become the temple of the soul.
    • and will blossom again in her. Thus does Involution become Evolution.
  • Title: Esoteric Cosmology: Lecture V: Yoga In East and West
    Matching lines:
    • flowers to distil and make it into honey, so does the soul come forth
    • Initiates — have become public property. Knowledge possessed by science
    • (2) The etheric body. How does it become perceptible?
    • when it has become wholly luminous (the first phase of Initiation), he
    • becomes a master.
    • extent to which he achieves this; he becomes a sage and has power over
    • body becomes much more sensitive and impressionable because it is no
  • Title: Esoteric Cosmology: Lecture VI: Yoga In East and West (conclusion)
    Matching lines:
    • before the divine soul comes forth from the desire-nature of man. The
    • control of the will. They must be the outcome of inner initiative.
    • pure. He gradually becomes able to live on the forces contained
  • Title: Esoteric Cosmology: Lecture VII: The Gospel of St. John
    Matching lines:
    • souls of all who become aware of it in the depths of their being. The
    • All that was supersensibly seen in the Ancient Mysteries becomes, in
  • Title: Esoteric Cosmology: Lecture VIII: The Christian Mystery
    Matching lines:
    • fear. When he has become fearless, he sees, in dream, the scene of the
    • of man. Goethe himself says that he was overcome with joy and a kind
    • enthusiasm, we are immature, for such enthusiasm comes from the event,
    • a dense forest. The noises gradually cease and the silence becomes
    • time has come for the next:
  • Title: Esoteric Cosmology: Lecture IX: The Astral World
    Matching lines:
    • an end. Man comes from other-where and passes other-where.
    • world the cause comes after the effect, whereas on Earth, the effect
    • unto you, unless ye become as little children, ye cannot enter into
    • A lie in the physical world becomes an agent of destruction in the
    • will reappear in times to come, on the physical plane. What we sow in
    • What on the Earth we call feeling comes back again to Earth in
  • Title: Esoteric Cosmology: Lecture X: The Astral World (continued)
    Matching lines:
    • is to say, our own astral body. We become aware of it from within
    • thoughts then become living and visible forms, constituting the aura
    • acquisition of six virtues will, in times to come, develop the other
    • spiritual world — tends towards the domain of Art. Art, too, comes from
    • the astral world; the rite becomes beauty. This came to pass
  • Title: Esoteric Cosmology: Lecture XI: The Devachanic World (Heaven)
    Matching lines:
    • longer transmits sensations which come from outside; it works upon
    • another, higher spiritual principle comes into being — Spirit-Man
    • The Initiate can work in the sphere where the germs of new plants come
    • circumstances whereby a new civilisation comes into being,
    • the Spirit is to forge the future. A time will come when there will be
  • Title: Esoteric Cosmology: Lecture XII: The Devachanic World (continued)
    Matching lines:
    • meaning. It becomes more and more possible to decipher the meaning of
    • At the second stage of clairvoyance, dreams become precise and clear.
    • The Beings living in the region which becomes perceptible at the
    • Cosmic Word. To the clairvoyant who has now become
    • time the Initiate is united with all beings, becomes one with his
    • said to come from the land of the Hyperboreans — that is to say
    • Earth but from the side of the heavens. The Akashic Record becomes the
    • Lohengrin, the knight who comes from an unknown country, from the
    • “Swan.” None may ask his true name nor whence he comes. His
    • why Lohengrin forbids Elsa to ask his name and whence he comes. The
  • Title: Esoteric Cosmology: Lecture XIII: The Logos and the Word
    Matching lines:
    • the course of evolution, the etheric and physical brains have become
    • If we go still further back in the history of Atlantis, we come to a
    • universal’ becomes the objective universe; man proceeds, first,
  • Title: Esoteric Cosmology: Lecture XIV: The Logos and Man
    Matching lines:
    • faculties of thinking and feeling, a man becomes as pure and free from
    • Sleep itself — not the dream — here becomes a conscious state. We do not only behold images but we enter into the living essence of beings and hear their inner tones. In the physical world we give names to things but the names are merely outer appellations. Only man can express his own being from within by saying ‘I’ — the ineffable name of conscious individuality. By this word we distinguish our own personality from the rest of the universe. But when we become conscious of the world of sound, each being, each thing communicates its own true name; in clairaudience we hear the sound which expresses its innermost being and rings forth as a tone in the universe that is distinct from all others.
    • One stage further and deep sleep becomes a conscious state. Description is impossible, for this condition passes beyond the limits of comparison. All that can be said is that it exists.
  • Title: Esoteric Cosmology: Lecture XV: The Evolution of Planets and Earth
    Matching lines:
    • truth, beauty and goodness. And then, those who come after him will
    • institutions are the germs from which a future world will come to
    • stage has come, these bodies will be a fit expression of the Logos.
    • become the substance of which the brain is now composed. On the Old
    • In times to come, the physical body will disappear; man and the Earth
    • own forces. But before this metamorphosis comes about, a cosmic night
    • Old Moon, the planetary sphere which has now become our Earth had a
    • being and his conscience becomes his rightful guide. His
    • primordial being comes to expression in the ‘I,’ the Ego.
  • Title: Esoteric Cosmology: Lecture XVI: Earthquakes, Volcanoes, and Human Will
    Matching lines:
    • different kingdoms on earth have become as we now know them: the plant
    • similarly it recognizes the earth as a planet destined to become the
    • he would become on the ancient sun; he simply vibrated like a tone in
    • shall become conscious of what today is the unconsciousness of sleep.
    • Finally, a period of Vulcan will come into being which corresponds to
    • this will have happened the soul of man will have become totally
    • have become conscious. This fact is connected with the forces of
    • which they will densify and finally become solid. The Earth is both
    • being a negative emptiness, becomes a positive substance.
  • Title: Esoteric Cosmology: Lecture XVII: Redemption and Liberation
    Matching lines:
    • activity comes to expression at the point where the nerves give rise
    • being. And so it was due to Lucifer that man was able to become truly
    • intervenes in this karmic process and becomes its central pivot. Since
    • Through karma, the Act of Christ becomes cosmic law, and through the
    • suffers and lives for others. There will come a time in the future
  • Title: Esoteric Cosmology: Lecture XVIII: The Apocalypse
    Matching lines:
    • finally to become physical in the future, already exists in germ, in
    • thought. Nothing comes into being in the physical world which in its
    • will proceed in the same way and consider how man has gradually become
    • come.
    • the two streams will again unite. Mechanical science will become
    • laws of evolution slowly come to expression. At first, man has
    • feelings, will find expression in the outer world and become his
    • a time will come when he will no longer be able to do so, when the
    • future, its plan begins to unfold before us. A new race will come into
    • all humanity. Having become like unto Christ, men will gather around
  • Title: First Lecture: The Gospel of St. John
    Matching lines:
    • outer confirmation. There is a feeling that comes over one
    • world) which lies even deeper, will come to a new and higher
    • the John Gospel rise to the two higher worlds and become
    • It is as if one cooled water in a vessel until it becomes
    • world, but one does not see this world or become aware of it
    • these organs are gradually developed one becomes clairvoyant
    • heart, so that the heart becomes one with these words, then
    • darkness of night. It comes to those who sleep. It comes to
    • all its movements. What slumbers in the child strives to come
    • physiognomy becomes an expression of the individual soul,
    • reached when the inner word has become flesh completely
    • — when the outer has become an exact imprint of the
    • inner soul lives unconscious in man and he only becomes aware
    • does it mean to say: something becomes conscious. Can we
    • become conscious of something which lives within us? As long
    • it must come out if you are to see it, and this can only
    • the soul must leave the temple of the body so that it becomes
    • profundity, and then it becomes one of the greatest texts
  • Title: Second Lecture: The Gospel of St. John
    Matching lines:
    • make it alive in us, we come to know the Christian
    • experiences how man has become what he is. This was achieved
    • become steeled after the feeling of humiliation, this
    • that later also becomes noticable in the waking state.
    • person has got as far as this he comes to the fifth stage.
    • bottom of the human soul. He becomes a second person by the
    • Everything pertaining to this planet becomes the body of the
    • bound with it. The grave becomes the source of his experience
    • — man and animal, plant and rock around him become
    • not inwardly experienced it. Once one has come to such an
  • Title: Third Lecture: The Gospel of St. John
    Matching lines:
    • earth, it was possible to become an initiate — to
    • higher interests become mere subsidiary interests, mere
    • overcome what is only in him. Then his interests become
    • they will, becomes his own feeling and his own will. The
    • initiate of the fifth grade had so overcome his personality
    • vanished and his consciousness has become one with the whole.
    • said unto him: Can there any good thing come out of Nazareth?
    • Philip saith unto him: Come and see. Jesus saw Nathanael
    • the spiritual element become established in man? For someone
    • is complete. Jesus answered him, and said that it will become
    • who directs his gaze towards the spiritual world to become
    • has to develop to become mature. Such is he who has developed
    • it. But how does he come to obtain these holy wheels? Through
    • Walk while ye have the light, lest darkness come upon you for
    • “All this should only have come to pass once Elias has
    • come again.” Thus they spoke to him as though
    • thou Elias come again?” Then answered the master,
    • “Elias is indeed come again — John the Baptist is
    • man until I come again.” Here we have the general,
    • unto no man until I come again.” This coming again
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: At the Gates: Lecture I: The Being of Man
    Matching lines:
    • the nature and being of man. When someone comes into our presence, we
    • substances and their forces in such a way that they become for him the
    • experience, but for the Initiate the astral body can become an outer
    • of man's being, which comes to expression in a name different
  • Title: At the Gates: Lecture II: The Three Worlds
    Matching lines:
    • to become widely known — Helen Keller. In her second year she
    • or seven hours; or it will come, as the Bible says, “like a thief
    • and both are given in the highest measure. Strength comes from the impulses
    • of the higher worlds; security comes when we are consciously aware that
    • people do not see their own passions, but these may sometimes become
    • of the objects around you. Everything that comes out of you seems to
    • The pupil gradually comes
    • event: he comes to understand the profound utterance of Indian wisdom,
    • becomes clear for the first time when he passes from the astral world
    • the world of colours comes the world of musical sounds which in a certain
    • Phoebus comes with wheels of thunder:
    • When our senses have become
    • we come to the boundary of the spiritual world. Just as the sky at night
  • Title: At the Gates: Lecture III: Life of the Soul in Kamaloka
    Matching lines:
    • the forces which have been used up during the day. Hence comes the need
    • to get loose, and this can be very dangerous. The victims become dreamy,
    • act on the brain sufficiently to become conscious, because the physical
    • and the higher a man's development, the slower the process becomes, until
    • depends entirely on his senses. Let us think away everything that comes
    • the Kamaloka period comes to an end and man ascends to Devachan.
    • All the Gospel sayings have a deep meaning, and we come to know their
    • through suicide. When death comes naturally, the three bodies separate
    • I enter into the person or the animal and come to know what the other
    • understand how it is that modern men have come to actions of this kind.
    • for example. But the material culture of modern times had to come, and
    • and doctors; and vivisection is a result of it. In this way we can come to
    • astral body, the outcome of his own endeavours, and to leave the lower
    • time, and may come to speak through a medium. People then begin to believe
  • Title: At the Gates: Lecture IV: Devachan
    Matching lines:
    • which comes before the soul at death vanishes at the moment when the
    • conditions of the Earth come into it.
    • once only, but by degrees you come to see yourself as you were in former
    • can become when the experiences of this latest life are added to those
    • past life, but now they come before him as clouds, thunder and lightning.
    • hardly observable in the ordinary man of today, but if he becomes
  • Title: At the Gates: Lecture V: Human Tasks in the Higher Worlds
    Matching lines:
    • bliss of Devachan comes about. Most of the activity there is creative,
    • different. As soon as an Initiate enters that plane, he comes to know
    • the old astral body comes before him as a second Ego, playing tricks
    • come from Devachan into astral space. What is happening here?
  • Title: At the Gates: Lecture VI: The Upbringing of Children. Karma.
    Matching lines:
    • a child's senses, to draw them out so that they become active
    • the scale of nature towards man, the more individual does destiny become.
    • do not have to understand the law in all its details; that becomes possible
    • of years, the law will of its own accord become part of our feelings.
    • become sheer fatalists! If we are responsible for whatever happens to
    • I refused to help another man in order not to come into conflict with
  • Title: At the Gates: Lecture VII: Workings of the Law of Karma in Human Life
    Matching lines:
    • our destiny come about and why are we born with talents and circumstances
    • will engender in his astral body something which will become a
    • things and has not merely looked on at them, he will become a choleric.
    • will become a phlegmatic or a sanguine type.
    • body acquires during one life comes to expression in the physical body
    • new has come into the world.
  • Title: At the Gates: Lecture VIII: Good and Evil. Individual Karmic Questions.
    Matching lines:
    • inner voice come into being?
    • this cannibal come to distinguish between good and bad? He went on eating
    • outcome of experiences spread over a number of incarnations. Fundamentally,
    • all knowledge, from the highest to the lowest, is the outcome of what
    • a man has experienced; it has come into being as a result of trial and
    • achievements of the physical body itself? Its deeds become its future
    • Either the physical body becomes more beautiful as a result of the illness
    • himself so that he might become more truly human. It was as though you
    • to become outward, and man will rise still higher when his karma has
    • transformed evil will become a quite special good. The power to effect
    • this can be achieved only if the evil has first come into existence;
    • then the power needed to overcome the evil will yield a power that can
    • if good is to rise to the heights of holiness, it must first overcome
    • Later on, when man has overcome evil, he can go on to redeem the creatures
    • himself, it becomes intelligible for him to say: All that is myself.
    • splitting off, because man was to become an inward being; he had to put
    • self. So we can come to understand the mission of illness, of evil, and
    • From individual instances known to occult science we may come to the
    • spirit. Then the incarnating entity comes to a physical body which cannot
    • outcome of a faulty mixture, on the physical level, of the fluids of
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: At the Gates: Lecture IX: Evolution of the Earth
    Matching lines:
    • a faint indication of what they were to become, the physical body of
    • is its root; then come the stalk, leaves, stamens and pistils; the pistils
    • out to the Sun. The animal comes in between: its body is horizontal.
  • Title: At the Gates: Lecture X: Progress of Mankind Up To Atlantean Times
    Matching lines:
    • the human soul. Your souls, which today have come down into your bodies,
    • surrounding the separate physical forms, which in their turn had become
    • which have now become dwarfed. The animals, too, had not yet acquired
    • matter began to become harder and more solid. Shortly before the separation
    • had come when something spiritual which had previously surrounded man
    • fire which had become permanent in man, in the warm human blood —
    • Luciferic beings, everything would have come to man as a gift from the
    • undergone further changes and had become more solid. Other continents
  • Title: At the Gates: Lecture XI: The Post-Atlantean Culture-Epochs
    Matching lines:
    • failed to make headway and had then become retrograde — to relinquish
    • reality, so that it may itself become an image of the eternal Spirit.
    • come by the path of knowledge to recognise the wisdom in external nature,
    • world. The result is that humanity has become more material, indeed
    • will become more spiritual again.
    • talk of Theosophy today, but we know that when we come to reborn in
    • we shall become tolerant towards every form of truth. We come to a better
  • Title: At the Gates: Lecture XII: Occult Develpment
    Matching lines:
    • will gradually become able to gain knowledge for themselves. You should
    • a symbol of some latent illness which will come out in a few days'
    • of dreamless sleep, sleep without consciousness, when nothing comes
    • that your dreams become more regular and meaningful. Above all, you
    • careful attention to them. Later, you may notice that your dreams become
    • more frequent, until you come to feel that you have been dreaming all
    • Suppose someone had then come along and said: “The lamp is no
    • Later comes a stage when
    • name and its relation to other things. This comes in addition to astral
    • activate the lotus-flowers, and where do they come from? We know that
    • pleasure and in the deepest grief. Indeed, we become truly receptive
    • comes faith, which in its occult sense implies something rather different
    • comes up to you and tells you that the church steeple is crooked and
    • This is a natural outcome of the other five qualities. The pupil must
    • suddenly become a liar, vengeful, quick to anger; all sorts of
    • development becomes unduly absorbed in the teachings of Theosophy.
    • must first pass through the stage of spiritual sight and only then comes
  • Title: At the Gates: Lecture XIII: Oriental and Christian Training
    Matching lines:
    • that you can be a good man and come to a form of the higher life without
    • comes into the same category as killing.
    • have become so complex that many people violate this commandment without
    • of them. There are sacred rites which have come down from very ancient
    • become the rule in our social life. So begins a complete disregard of
    • This is how it comes about.
    • powers and will gradually come to do for himself what at present he
    • retrace his steps. He will himself become plant; he will take up the
    • it comes about man will cease to be a killer with his breath.
    • so that he may become a being who does not kill.
    • long as you yourself fill your thinking, they cannot come in. The longer
    • a transformation of the soul. In a certain sense you become clairvoyant
    • vision which will quite certainly come: he sees himself washing the
    • come to me.” The outer sign of this is that the pupil feels a
    • for him; his body must become as indifferent to him as a piece of wood.
    • He then comes to look quite objectively on the body he carries with
    • him through life; it has become for him the wood of the Cross. He need
    • that which is to come, and while he is in this condition the pupil comes
    • the whole planet. The Earth has become his body; he is buried in the
    • this seventh stage, Christianity has become an inner experience of the
  • Title: At the Gates: Lecture XIV: Rosicrucian Training - The Interior of the Earth - Earthquakes and Volcanoes
    Matching lines:
    • foreseen that a time would come when because of the gradual increase of
    • truly for the first time. By this method anyone can come to a deeper
    • but practically, so that they become part of his everyday life. There are
    • overcome the lower self, and the higher form of self-knowledge which is
    • becomes an illusion unless we look on it as an expression of the Divine.
    • to be divine but is not so at all. We must come out of ourselves if we are
    • to know the Divine. “Know thyself” means also “Overcome
    • we come to form strictly logical thoughts ourselves. This kind of study,
    • into the life of the soul. Everything must become for us a symbol in
    • in this way, so that external things become symbolic pictures of moral
    • means one comes to see things surrounded by their astral element.
    • for example, no astral body, and therefore they could not come into
    • corresponds to this point and he will come to know it. If he concentrates
    • on this point under definite guidance, he will come to know the nature
    • organ on which he concentrates his attention. This method has become
    • specially important in recent times because humanity has become deeply
    • the eye leads him — the light. In this way he comes to the creator
    • the activity of thought remains. And thus he comes to rest in the
    • life; it must be overcome. This form of training is particularly well
    • for the fact that strife and disharmony exist there. In order to overcome
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Pastoral Medicine: Lecture 1
    Matching lines:
    • understood will become clear during the course. We have admitted a few
    • bring it about. But things have come to light that must be corrected
    • theologians are to become physicians, or that the physicians are to
    • become in the slightest way theologians. It is purely a matter of the
    • movement must not be allowed to become an area where everything is
    • Anthroposophy must not become propaganda for quackery. Theologians
    • must not be allowed to become quacks.
    • anthroposophical physician. But the following must also become an
    • Section. There will be no progress unless this procedure becomes a
    • our various states of consciousness come. But thereby you are
    • to consciousness, and consciousness becomes a helper, at least (in
    • relationship has become completely veiled. This true relationship
    • must be reestablished. It must become active again.
    • Again it must become
    • to the spiritual world. The priests themselves will have come out of
  • Title: Pastoral Medicine: Lecture 2
    Matching lines:
    • attitude that has come into them in this materialistic epoch. We need
    • unable to come with their ego organization properly into their astral
    • become dim. And in the same measure that the sense impressions fade,
    • the thoughts become livelier. Sense impressions can appear almost
    • their thoughts have a lively quality and tend to become more intense,
    • Then the following can take place: the person becomes unable to control
    • becomes “senseless.” Sense impressions in general fade
    • comes in contact with such a person. The person confesses to
    • one's neighbor can become tremendously intense, so much so that the
    • person comes to them and says, “The things you pronounce from
    • their priest they come out with such speeches. They claim to know
    • physician comes upon such a person destined to go through all these
    • touch with a priest, particularly when the fourth stage becomes
    • of themselves. Now with their ego organization separated, they come
    • perception from within increases; it becomes, as it were, a larger
    • pray out of their own initiative, for it will come to them if God
    • interpreters, the theological detail becomes clear to them — if
    • a man is hidden away in an office, or if such a woman becomes an
    • in bourgeois everyday life, these people become really insane, and
    • Pythians. As a rule, the Pythians were individuals who had come
  • Title: Pastoral Medicine: Lecture 3
    Matching lines:
    • the being. If the experience comes to a definite conclusion, they
    • earlier they had become angry when others told them of their own
    • in every detail. They tell how when it comes upon them they are
    • pain comes, its objective condition is still there, but now the
    • have the feeling that spiritual beings come to them, but that they
    • begins a symbolic objectifying of the pain. When they come out of
    • comes about through this situation. In ordinary life, when we see, we
    • being touched comes about in a sensation of the nerves: by the
    • human soul-spiritual entity comes down out of the soul-spiritual
    • the pain? The real spiritual world. It comes through the pain. The
    • spiritual world comes from the other direction. Ordinary sense
    • becomes independent of the physical body, of the ordinary connection
    • this etheric body becomes inwardly stronger than is the case with the
    • they enter the third stage they become really ill. At the same time
    • their strong etheric body enables them to overcome the illness as it
    • automatically become active in the self-healing of these abnormal
    • ball of time was present in her earthly life. We come upon a true
    • widely separate for some reason become entangled.
    • karmic views that open up for them. And the harmony will come from
    • come to the idea of freedom. You come to causal conditioning. If you
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Pastoral Medicine: Lecture 4
    Matching lines:
    • a human being? What is not inherited and must come to the human being
    • two ingredients. Human beings come out of the spiritual,
    • this development. They have different origins; they come from
    • older one becomes, the more one retains of old physical substance. A
    • come from parents and grandparents. The physical body of those first
    • of inwardly strong individuals important changes come after the
    • come upon an important secret of human evolution, a secret that
    • from those found here in the physical world. We come out of that
    • soul and with which it moves. They come from the fact that constant
    • — itself becomes free in the etheric body. Quantitatively it is
    • importance. It is what now becomes tremendously active as soul
    • the first life period with what comes to us from the sun. And with
    • forces that have now become free for soul activity. That is the great
    • yet freed for the soul-life. They become free at puberty, and then
    • stays fixed in the human being, it becomes permanent structure.
    • a person becomes, the less material is stripped away from the bones
    • faster so far as quality is concerned, for they actually become bad
    • twenties. Then the world becomes severe. It no longer wants to work
    • into a person; it becomes harsh. Of this strange new relation of the
    • realize that when we come to the end of our twenties, we find no more
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Pastoral Medicine: Lecture 5
    Matching lines:
    • who come to such final stages as St. Teresa or Mechthild of
    • typical outcome. You must then think of the corresponding lighter
    • body draws the ego organization in, there comes about a kind of power
    • soup.” It can happen that he comes entirely away from the first
    • them. For they become amazingly stubborn, they don't want to
    • still a good distance from the place he is heading for. He becomes
    • memory is unusually well developed. He becomes anxious. He wants to
    • comes about. The astral body should only be drawing the ego down
    • delighted by it. By the time the late teens come, the eighteenth,
    • medicine would come about. People do not realize that the first
    • only become aware of the second condition when seizures or other
    • gaps in it. This can become so extreme that the person lives in a
    • the physical body has become even weaker, along with all the other
    • in the physical body. With such a person it now comes about, not that
    • in the way I am now describing do not come to “rest in
    • God” or “rest in the Spirit.” They come, although
    • these things have become extraordinarily precious to people.
    • they come back again and again to the same thing.
  • Title: Pastoral Medicine: Lecture 6
    Matching lines:
    • find a universal conviction that illness comes from sinfulness, that
    • bodily defect. Sin comes from disease. That's how evolution goes
    • believed that illness comes from sin. For they know they themselves
    • are right, that sin comes from illness. And they know with absolute
    • not just a feeling in him: it becomes his life practice. In the
    • visionary images that come to him in a matter-of-fact way. His poetry
    • all, he is an important actor; this comes from his impulse to bring
    • rhythmic system, nerve-sense system. What comes from an earlier
    • what comes from the time between death and a new birth works over
    • into the rhythmic system; and what comes from the new earth-life
    • genius that has to come to expression. One branch of the stream flows
    • torture of his earlier incarnation. You see how this deed comes from
    • the playing-out of his karma. Raimund becomes obsessed by the
    • body and become pathological cases, as I showed you, in three stages.
    • character in this way, we come inevitably to a consideration of
    • — namely, that illness comes from sin — which means that
    • sin comes from illness, and that there are physical substances and
    • This does not mean one becomes sentimental and goes calling on a
    • these things apply to physical illnesses. You will come to this if
    • divine service. Healing then becomes a divine service. Things that
  • Title: Pastoral Medicine: Lecture 7
    Matching lines:
    • combustion that has become living. This fact is important for all of
    • that become fashionable are particularly important when one wants to
    • saying. We come into conflict with science just when we would like to
    • unintelligent as to oppose facts! All the more, then, one comes into
    • Now there should come
    • control of our inhalation during sleep comes from outside. When we
    • astrality of the human being can become abnormal. There we have the
    • element of air. But when we come up higher to the region centered
    • the entire human organism), we come to a finer breathing process that
    • Therefore we can say: higher up, we come to a finer process
    • nerve-sense system becomes united with what is being inhaled by the
    • it from the macrocosm. Only after that does one come to the breathing
    • which then carries the process inward; I come gradually to the path
    • breathing. Then it will be understood how yoga could come about in
    • nerve-sense process that becomes a spiritual activity. Below we have
    • activity gradually becomes purely physical, becomes altogether a
    • of nerve-sense spirit activity becomes inner activity, so what
    • remains behind of inner activity from exhalation becomes the sum of
    • what comes down from above. With exhalation, we have to say the
    • becomes inner chemism — which is something different from the
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Pastoral Medicine: Lecture 8
    Matching lines:
    • properly, we already come to see through its form a relation between
    • come, moving inward from the periphery, we find the forces of Mercury
    • bodies, one would not come to the sun. How, then, does this
    • very thorough, energetic meditation. Then it is easy to come to this
    • for instance thoughts about the macrocosm. Thinking becomes wider.
    • which the sense world comes.” But one is not able to
    • in the organs, the perceptions that had become dim or had vanished
    • sun and then it had become dark, foggy, but had still been within the
    • experience; then the sense experience comes through infusion, tinted
    • gradually come from the etheric world to which we have become
    • we can attain. It is by virtue of our past that we have become what
    • blood, one becomes aware of the activity of the moon. This is of
    • come out. When on the other hand the moon forces activate their
    • forces — then the spirit in the universe comes into being
    • come in from the spiritual world, what has been in the spiritual
    • world up to the time of a new earth-life and now comes in as spirit
    • things, we come to see that they are completely interwoven. Then we
    • Now help comes from
    • still weaker — when they unite with what comes from the other
    • their relation to the macrocosm. The human being comes into
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Pastoral Medicine: Lecture 9
    Matching lines:
    • to do with pastoral medicine can really only come from such a point
    • Medicine is seriously ill with materialism. It has become blind and
    • physical-etheric body), then a clairvoyance comes about that borders
    • elemental life of nature comes into dreams, the person experiences
    • experimentation in this field will now have to become careful
    • physicians must more and more become really practical individuals
    • development has made them. They have gradually become pure
    • together is all right, of course, but it will come of itself if
    • one bursts, if another becomes a bit thicker from the bursting of
    • realized, is that one does not ever becomes a materialist if one is
    • Here we come to a
    • out of their feelings. Spiritualism is just such a symptom. One comes
  • Title: Pastoral Medicine: Lecture 10
    Matching lines:
    • thought power, how their thoughts can become powerful. In this way
    • bottom of it all? These things will simply become worse unless clear
    • particularly scientific thinking, has come enormously under the
    • the theologians who want to overcome materialism in a modern manner
    • gradually become untenable through their very absurdity. And those
    • things that must be faced. But how can we come to creative thoughts?
    • We can come to the
    • has come back to the same spot. That means after a certain period of
    • Thinking can't go any further. Clairvoyance must then come to our
    • reckon how many breaths a human being takes in a day, we come to
    • I said about the breathing, that in the upper human it becomes a
    • out, spread out into the universe. When we come back to earth again,
    • But what comes into
    • spring until St. John's Day; then the change comes. As autumn
    • must more and more become a part of science.
    • we come to that part of the outer world that is related to the
    • right thoughts — and they come out of the cosmos — must
    • matter. It only becomes important if one observes such people from a
    • Hippocrates was really a latecomer as far as ancient medicine is
    • “approximately.” For our human calculation never comes
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Pastoral Medicine: Lecture 11
    Matching lines:
    • ancient times said: When the human being comes down out of spiritual
    • death would not have the form it now has; nor would illness come in
    • the way it now comes. Illness and death were regarded as the symptoms
    • important, but it only becomes so after one has first obtained full
    • what temperature a substance becomes earth, for instance; in what
    • temperature it becomes solid, or fluid, or air. That was the
    • come into relation with the subnatural. We fall to a level at which
    • their development, are all active. We come into relation with those
    • into infinity, comes back from the other side. This shows that the
    • gods come to human beings. They have been thought of as working in
    • become well acquainted with illness and with clairvoyance.
    • body. When we become conscious in them, we are in the opposite
    • priests become more and more aware of the relation of a human being
    • When you have become
  • Title: Broken Vessels: Lecture 1
    Matching lines:
    • bring it about. But things have come to light that must be corrected
    • theologians are to become physicians, or that the physicians are to
    • become in the slightest way theologians. It is purely a matter of the
    • movement must not be allowed to become an area where everything is
    • Anthroposophy must not become propaganda for quackery. Theologians
    • must not be allowed to become quacks.
    • anthroposophical physician. But the following must also become an
    • Section. There will be no progress unless this procedure becomes a
    • our various states of consciousness come. But thereby you are
    • to consciousness, and consciousness becomes a helper, at least (in
    • relationship has become completely veiled. This true relationship
    • must be reestablished. It must become active again.
    • Again it must become
    • to the spiritual world. The priests themselves will have come out of
  • Title: Broken Vessels: Lecture 2
    Matching lines:
    • attitude that has come into them in this materialistic epoch. We need
    • unable to come with their ego organization properly into their astral
    • become dim. And in the same measure that the sense impressions fade,
    • the thoughts become livelier. Sense impressions can appear almost
    • their thoughts have a lively quality and tend to become more intense,
    • following can take place: the person becomes unable to control the
    • becomes “senseless.” Sense impressions in general fade
    • comes in contact with such a person. The person confesses to
    • one's neighbor can become tremendously intense, so much so that the
    • person comes to them and says, “The things you pronounce from
    • their priest they come out with such speeches. They claim to know
    • physician comes upon such a person destined to go through all these
    • touch with a priest, particularly when the fourth stage becomes
    • of themselves. Now with their ego organization separated, they come
    • perception from within increases; it becomes, as it were, a larger
    • pray out of their own initiative, for it will come to them if God
    • interpreters, the theological detail becomes clear to them — if
    • a man is hidden away in an office, or if such a woman becomes an
    • in bourgeois everyday life, these people become really insane, and
    • Pythians. As a rule, the Pythians were individuals who had come
  • Title: Broken Vessels: Lecture 3
    Matching lines:
    • the being. If the experience comes to a definite conclusion, they
    • earlier they had become angry when others told them of their own
    • in every detail. They tell how when it comes upon them they are
    • pain comes, its objective condition is still there, but now the
    • have the feeling that spiritual beings come to them, but that they
    • begins a symbolic objectifying of the pain. When they come out of
    • comes about through this situation. In ordinary life, when we see, we
    • being touched comes about in a sensation of the nerves: by the
    • human soul-spiritual entity comes down out of the soul-spiritual
    • the pain? The real spiritual world. It comes through the pain. The
    • spiritual world comes from the other direction. Ordinary sense
    • becomes independent of the physical body, of the ordinary connection
    • this etheric body becomes inwardly stronger than is the case with the
    • they enter the third stage they become really ill. At the same time
    • their strong etheric body enables them to overcome the illness as it
    • automatically become active in the self-healing of these abnormal
    • ball of time was present in her earthly life. We come upon a true
    • widely separate for some reason become entangled.
    • karmic views that open up for them. And the harmony will come from
    • come to the idea of freedom. You come to causal conditioning. If you
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Broken Vessels: Lecture 4
    Matching lines:
    • a human being? What is not inherited and must come to the human being
    • two ingredients. Human beings come out of the spiritual,
    • this development. They have different origins; they come from
    • older one becomes, the more one retains of old physical substance. A
    • come from parents and grandparents. The physical body of those first
    • of inwardly strong individuals important changes come after the
    • come upon an important secret of human evolution, a secret that
    • from those found here in the physical world. We come out of that
    • soul and with which it moves. They come from the fact that constant
    • — itself becomes free in the etheric body. Quantitatively it is
    • importance. It is what now becomes tremendously active as soul
    • the first life period with what comes to us from the sun. And with
    • forces that have now become free for soul activity. That is the great
    • yet freed for the soul-life. They become free at puberty, and then
    • stays fixed in the human being, it becomes permanent structure.
    • a person becomes, the less material is stripped away from the bones
    • faster so far as quality is concerned, for they actually become bad
    • twenties. Then the world becomes severe. It no longer wants to work
    • into a person; it becomes harsh. Of this strange new relation of the
    • realize that when we come to the end of our twenties, we find no more
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Broken Vessels: Lecture 5
    Matching lines:
    • who come to such final stages as St. Teresa or Mechthild of
    • typical outcome. You must then think of the corresponding lighter
    • body draws the ego organization in, there comes about a kind of power
    • soup.” It can happen that he comes entirely away from the first
    • them. For they become amazingly stubborn, they don't want to
    • still a good distance from the place he is heading for. He becomes
    • memory is unusually well developed. He becomes anxious. He wants to
    • comes about. The astral body should only be drawing the ego down
    • delighted by it. By the time the late teens come, the eighteenth,
    • medicine would come about. People do not realize that the first
    • only become aware of the second condition when seizures or other
    • gaps in it. This can become so extreme that the person lives in a
    • the physical body has become even weaker, along with all the other
    • in the physical body. With such a person it now comes about, not that
    • in the way I am now describing do not come to “rest in
    • God” or “rest in the Spirit.” They come, although
    • these things have become extraordinarily precious to people.
    • they come back again and again to the same thing.
  • Title: Broken Vessels: Lecture 6
    Matching lines:
    • find a universal conviction that illness comes from sinfulness, that
    • bodily defect. Sin comes from disease. That's how evolution goes
    • believed that illness comes from sin. For they know they themselves
    • are right, that sin comes from illness. And they know with absolute
    • not just a feeling in him: it becomes his life practice. In the
    • visionary images that come to him in a matter-of-fact way. His poetry
    • all, he is an important actor; this comes from his impulse to bring
    • rhythmic system, nerve-sense system. What comes from an earlier
    • what comes from the time between death and a new birth works over
    • into the rhythmic system; and what comes from the new earth-life
    • genius that has to come to expression. One branch of the stream flows
    • torture of his earlier incarnation. You see how this deed comes from
    • the playing-out of his karma. Raimund becomes obsessed by the
    • body and become pathological cases, as I showed you, in three stages.
    • character in this way, we come inevitably to a consideration of
    • — namely, that illness comes from sin — which means that
    • sin comes from illness, and that there are physical substances and
    • This does not mean one becomes sentimental and goes calling on a
    • these things apply to physical illnesses. You will come to this if
    • divine service. Healing then becomes a divine service. Things that
  • Title: Broken Vessels: Lecture 7
    Matching lines:
    • combustion that has become living. This fact is important for all of
    • saying. We come into conflict with science just when we would like to
    • unintelligent as to oppose facts! All the more, then, one comes into
    • Now there should come
    • control of our inhalation during sleep comes from outside. When we
    • astrality of the human being can become abnormal. There we have the
    • element of air. But when we come up higher to the region centered
    • the entire human organism), we come to a finer breathing process that
    • Therefore we can say: higher up, we come to a finer process
    • nerve-sense system becomes united with what is being inhaled by the
    • it from the macrocosm. Only after that does one come to the breathing
    • which then carries the process inward; I come gradually to the path
    • breathing. Then it will be understood how yoga could come about in
    • nerve-sense process that becomes a spiritual activity. Below we have
    • activity gradually becomes purely physical, becomes altogether a
    • of nerve-sense spirit activity becomes inner activity, so what
    • remains behind of inner activity from exhalation becomes the sum of
    • what comes down from above. With exhalation, we have to say the
    • becomes inner chemism — which is something different from the
    • it comes to a “stop!” for the light. The light spreads
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Broken Vessels: Lecture 8
    Matching lines:
    • properly, we already come to see through its form a relation between
    • come, moving inward from the periphery, we find the forces of Mercury
    • bodies, one would not come to the sun. How, then, does this
    • very thorough, energetic meditation. Then it is easy to come to this
    • for instance thoughts about the macrocosm. Thinking becomes wider.
    • which the sense world comes.” But one is not able to
    • in the organs, the perceptions that had become dim or had vanished
    • sun and then it had become dark, foggy, but had still been within the
    • experience; then the sense experience comes through infusion, tinted
    • gradually come from the etheric world to which we have become
    • we can attain. It is by virtue of our past that we have become what
    • blood, one becomes aware of the activity of the moon. This is of
    • come out. When on the other hand the moon forces activate their
    • forces — then the spirit in the universe comes into being
    • come in from the spiritual world, what has been in the spiritual
    • world up to the time of a new earth-life and now comes in as spirit
    • things, we come to see that they are completely interwoven. Then we
    • Now help comes from
    • still weaker — when they unite with what comes from the other
    • their relation to the macrocosm. The human being comes into
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Broken Vessels: Lecture 9
    Matching lines:
    • to do with pastoral medicine can really only come from such a point
    • Medicine is seriously ill with materialism. It has become blind and
    • physical-etheric body), then a clairvoyance comes about that borders
    • elemental life of nature comes into dreams, the person experiences
    • experimentation in this field will now have to become careful
    • physicians must more and more become really practical individuals
    • development has made them. They have gradually become pure
    • together is all right, of course, but it will come of itself if
    • one bursts, if another becomes a bit thicker from the bursting of
    • realized, is that one does not ever becomes a materialist if one is
    • Here we come to a
    • out of their feelings. Spiritualism is just such a symptom. One comes
  • Title: Broken Vessels: Lecture 10
    Matching lines:
    • thought power, how their thoughts can become powerful. In this way
    • bottom of it all? These things will simply become worse unless clear
    • particularly scientific thinking, has come enormously under the
    • the theologians who want to overcome materialism in a modern manner
    • gradually become untenable through their very absurdity. And those
    • things that must be faced. But how can we come to creative thoughts?
    • We can come to the
    • has come back to the same spot. That means after a certain period of
    • Thinking can't go any further. Clairvoyance must then come to our
    • reckon how many breaths a human being takes in a day, we come to
    • I said about the breathing, that in the upper human it becomes a
    • out, spread out into the universe. When we come back to earth again,
    • But what comes into
    • spring until St. John's Day; then the change comes. As autumn
    • must more and more become a part of science.
    • we come to that part of the outer world that is related to the
    • right thoughts — and they come out of the cosmos — must
    • matter. It only becomes important if one observes such people from a
    • Hippocrates was really a latecomer as far as ancient medicine is
    • “approximately.” For our human calculation never comes
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Broken Vessels: Lecture 11
    Matching lines:
    • ancient times said: When the human being comes down out of spiritual
    • death would not have the form it now has; nor would illness come in
    • the way it now comes. Illness and death were regarded as the symptoms
    • important, but it only becomes so after one has first obtained full
    • what temperature a substance becomes earth, for instance; in what
    • temperature it becomes solid, or fluid, or air. That was the
    • come into relation with the subnatural. We fall to a level at which
    • their development, are all active. We come into relation with those
    • into infinity, comes back from the other side. This shows that the
    • gods come to human beings. They have been thought of as working in
    • become well acquainted with illness and with clairvoyance.
    • body. When we become conscious in them, we are in the opposite
    • priests become more and more aware of the relation of a human being
    • When you have become
  • Title: Genesis: Lecture I
    Matching lines:
    • the outcome of seership, of the living intuitions which the seer
    • the spiritual worlds. Thereby something comes into existence which
    • physical sense-world; something comes into existence which we must
    • we shall become thoroughly convinced that it would be quite wrong to
    • of a gaseous, airy element and a warmth element. Then comes the third
    • is only when we come to the fourth stage of our planetary evolution
    • watery elements. In order that this solid element could come into
    • during your musing two kinds of images come before your souls.
    • come about through external sight, through perception, but through
    • possible for man to become man as we know him. In none of the earlier
    • being that he will more and more become in the future; that was not
    • existence were weaving its fabric — how best do we come to know
    • Beings. To begin with, however, we can come to know one aspect of
    • Bible, then you will have a foundation for all that is to come before
  • Title: Genesis: Lecture II
    Matching lines:
    • just has to be said that, as regards the questions now to come before
    • your souls in picture form, there comes a description of one of the
    • understand what comes next, usually rendered “darkness was
    • Saturn existence, inweaving in the fiery element. Then comes the Sun
    • said that what had already existed in the Sun evolution had now come
    • Ha'arets had thus become one-sided. It had not brought with
    • trinity. To recognise this unity in trinity first becomes necessary
    • Thus when we come to
    • light from without. That its light comes from without is the
    • difference between the earth, as it has become in the course of
    • descend from warmth into the denser, we come to the gaseous
    • condition; if we ascend, we come to light. Ascending still further,
    • beyond the light we come to a yet finer etheric condition, we come to
    • to earth. When we mount from the sound-ether we come to a still
    • haschamayim. We come to the finest etheric state of all,
    • tohu wabohu, and made it what it later became. Whence comes
    • is today. Let us ask ourselves how man has become what he is —
    • What would have to permeate it for it to become human? Let us put the
    • picture by picture, how can one come to feel the cosmos inwardly, how
    • can one come inwardly to feel the structure of macrocosmic man? By
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Genesis: Lecture III
    Matching lines:
    • Then comes the Sun
    • today has become sun and earth was then a common body, a
    • again; but now it had become sufficiently mature to manifest as a
    • tendency to become vaporous, to rise upward as cloud, and the other
    • had the tendency to press upward, to become vapour; that is, the
    • become air, which of course includes watery vapour, from what tends
    • to contract and become denser. That is the second “day”
    • separation constitutes what comes to pass on the third
    • — the solid element. It is only now that the solid comes into
    • evolution, after a duality had come into being, after the sun had
    • earth the sun, moon and stars now come into activity; how there begins
    • this, we see something which comes from the heavenly spaces,
    • air and water comes into existence. It describes a recapitulation of
    • before, but on the sixth “day” the earth-nature comes
  • Title: Genesis: Lecture IV
    Matching lines:
    • that these recapitulations cannot come about in an entirely
    • of the life-ether, which evokes everything that is said to have come
    • say of our own accord comes sounding back to us from the spiritual
    • know that then we come to a second hierarchy which we call the Kyriotetes
    • Far above all principality, and power, and might, and dominion, and every name that is named, not only in this world, but also in that which is to comeEph. 1:21).
    • Exusiai or Powers, or Revelations; when we come to the lowest
    • the spiritual Beings who stand nearest to man. Only then do we come
    • light and darkness alternated. I shall come back again to a closer
    • arises of course when one comes to the fourth “day,” when
  • Title: Genesis: Lecture V
    Matching lines:
    • instead of empty abstractions behind much else that comes before us
    • you will come across something extremely important for the
    • backward one. The Sun existence has to wait; it comes later, it comes
    • Here we come to a
    • earlier existence, it comes about that darkness is interwoven therein
    • represented by yom, day, so out of the darkness come Beings
    • become of the world if all those who ought to be teachers of young
    • children were to become university professors? Those who do not
    • become professors are much better where they are than the professors
    • become stunted in their growth. Light is an element of life for every
    • comes if it knows how to interpret its own findings properly. What
    • order that existence could come about. Thus we have yom and
    • Sun. When therefore the Moon (later to become earth) separated from
    • Before an animal nature with an inner life could come about there had
    • than the tasks of the Elohim. Then come the regulators, the
    • becomes possible for Beings who are already united with the sun
    • of darkness can come into association with the activity of light.
  • Title: Genesis: Lecture VI
    Matching lines:
    • are able to come to an understanding with those times, which we
    • if, with a certain intellectual superiority which can easily become
    • rarefied warmth-substance, the denser air comes into being. It is
    • and whose effluence has become denser and denser until it has now
    • at work in the aeriform. And when we come to the warmth nature, to
    • through the Spirits of Wisdom and the Spirits of Movement, we come
    • into our sense-world? In the sense-world it becomes the expanse of
    • form, to become crystalline. Solid matter tends towards the form of
    • become revealed as the solid matter we see around us. In the act of
    • around us, he cannot say that it comes into being in the same way as
    • on the ground; he cannot say that the water hovering above us comes
    • Anyone who has become
    • which goes on around the earth wherein the watery vapour becomes
    • something which comes from nowhere. The seer knows that the Spirits
    • of electricity, which prevails in the lightning, comes forth out of
    • this entire hierarchical order, help had to come from yet another
    • other hierarchies up to the Seraphim. But then help had to come from
    • apprehension, it has to come from a sphere really above that of the
    • soul-life become knit together in a conscious unity. The human being
    • become a unity, and a unity possessing real being. What I am here
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Genesis: Lecture VII
    Matching lines:
    • Johannes Thomasius has come to know Professor Capesius and Doctor
    • are separated. This did not come about even for the Elohim until the
    • is simply that something new has come about.
    • externally sense-perceptible. When does a marble sculpture become a
    • external. Thus when in Genesis we come to the words God saw the
    • evolution were only able to come about through the separation of the
    • of the moon nature and of the sun nature change, become different. If
    • modern physics. Such a separation of elementary conditions comes
    • is true, a wonderful feeling comes over him — a feeling such as
  • Title: Genesis: Lecture VIII
    Matching lines:
    • earth incarnation. But everything which comes finally to
    • being has to come about. This soul-spiritual element must gradually
    • you come back from the sleeping to the waking state you have absorbed
    • as to why animals become animals, and man becomes man. That man has
    • could become man upon the earth, appropriate conditions had to be
    • prepared for his densification. Suppose that man had become dense
    • enough to become an earth being, such as he is today, on the fifth
    • to wait until the Elohim had become Jahve-Elohim. Only then could he
    • even the vibrations of heat are physical. If you come into a space
    • man. And the next stage of densification did not come until
    • him come about? Here we come to something described pretty fully in my
    • we come to what we call the Luciferic
    • passage of that book we come to a description of the Luciferic
    • influence given from quite a different aspect. But when we have come
    • Paradise. When you realise this it becomes almost palpable that those
    • he could come back, to hear what he himself is supposed to have said
  • Title: Genesis: Lecture IX
    Matching lines:
    • as he has become through the Saturn, Sun and Moon evolutions, still
    • union with the earth. Here we come to something of great importance
    • would have become too coarse had it remained with the moon. Hence the
    • in this way the earth prepared itself to become the bearer of human
    • in mind we shall be able to come to a conclusion as to the point of
    • “days” of creation have been described, there comes what
    • of creation. It did not come about until the time of Atlantis. The
    • soul-spiritual element comes into it from the periphery. To begin
    • awoke in the soul-spirits of the neighbouring planets to come down
    • after the exit of the moon, when those conditions come about which
    • physical. We must become ever clearer that always behind the coarser
    • have been lost to the earth. The earth would have become a desert
    • the sun within it, then he would have become a mere cipher, fettered
    • become hardened, he would have met his death. Why had man to come
    • order that he might become free, in order that he might cut himself
    • off from the Elohim, in order that he might become an independent
    • who bear that within ourselves. What would have become of the earth
    • earth would become if the moon forces were still in it, think of a
    • that the earth would have become dust, it had the tendency to become
  • Title: Genesis: Lecture X
    Matching lines:
    • of the Elohim to become JahveElohim. We had to think of this advance
    • nature which enabled him to become a mature being. Had he come down
    • “day,” he could only have become a being resembling
    • become a creature physically resembling the animals. The group-souls
    • body. How did it come about? This differentiation, this separation into
    • into what he has become today. That had to be preceded by the
    • himself becomes a living being.
    • the essential thing is that man did not become a living being in the
    • Here we come to
    • to become effective, the human soul-spiritual being, which still
    • principle was repeated in man which we have come to recognise as
    • higher levels. The male-female becomes differentiated into man and
    • promotion to become Jahve-Elohim. But we must not conceive
    • has become Jahve-Elohim continues to work on man. The other part does
    • become. But in this misty element spiritual Beings hold sway. And man
    • Genesis, we come to the original spiritual condition of our earth
    • come the land animals; the birds and marine animals came into
    • Whether we become better men in the intellectual, feeling and moral
    • become on the earth more and more what we were predisposed to be in
  • Title: Festivals/Easter: Lecture I: Easter: The Festival of Warning
    Matching lines:
    • their connection with the sun-forces — when the Sunday comes that
    • is beyond the earth, man is to become free of the evolution of the
    • Christ Impulse, to become free of earthly conditions.
    • which during a certain period of earthly evolution have become more
    • world left Paul unconvinced; when these events in Palestine had come
    • which becomes intelligible to us, only when with the help of spiritual
    • to cosmic evolution had come to them. He felt it essential to declare:
    • and indeed if we would understand history as it truly is, we must come
    • world of sense. A time had to come when man must perforce lift himself
    • had entered earth-evolution. “Christ will come again to
    • purely physical vision of the earth. Christ will come again to you,
    • there. But you must find Him; He must come again for
    • world of sense is not enough. To-day, mankind has only come so far as
    • This would be the necessary outcome of the teaching of modern
    • sickness of our age comes to clearest expression; for a deep inner
    • solar system has come out of a primeval nebula, and in course of
    • animals and also man have come into being. And carrying the theory
    • further, a time will come when everything on the earth will have found
    • earth. The time has come when man must realise with full and clear
    • materialism all that can come from super-sensible knowledge.
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Festivals/Easter: Lecture II: The Blood-relationship and The Christ-relationship
    Matching lines:
    • What will come now is the spread of Bolshevism over Europe; that is to
    • always dangerous because the new that is trying to come to expression
    • beheld its reality. It was the outcome of sensory vision.
    • world reveals to me that objects and beings come from the gods, that
    • eternal life, for we come from God and God will take us to Himself
    • looking to themselves alone, relying upon what comes with them at
    • forsaken God, had become unchristian, because a situation which had
    • the blood comes to life once again in nation-consciousness. We see a
    • befitting the present age would be to overcome nationalism, to
    • dug to-day. And wherever these principles, even in a mild form, become
    • Christianity will not rise from the grave until men overcome
    • to man beyond death — this is what must become reality.
    • comes vividly before us — above all the need to work for the
    • want to continue with a consciousness that is merely the outcome of
    • all their forces to the furtherance of decadence. The time has come
    • intolerance become more and more vehement, Them developed in Rome an
    • spiritual knowledge becomes a driving force in mankind.
  • Title: Festivals/Easter: Lecture III: The Death of A God and Its Fruits In Humanity
    Matching lines:
    • spiritual-scientific concepts, for they must become actual forces,
    • had not yet come into the consciousness of men. We find self-contained
    • it will become increasingly material and our earth-body more and more
    • ground of their particular creeds! But the time will come when their
    • the new clairvoyance, come to know of sublime Beings who have risen
    • and believe what you understand and believe. No one who has come to
    • And what will be the attitude of the Buddhist who has become an
    • decline of spirituality is evident. Then we come to Greco-Latin
    • life, man becomes master on the physical plane. But the spirituality
    • The Mystery of Golgotha was enacted in a remote comer of the earth,
    • conquered death — only then did they become true Apostles and
    • Christianity is only beginning to come into its own. And when men
    • mankind could come forth only once from the bosom of the Godhead, so
    • If the Christian who has become an anthroposophist were to speak of
    • the nature of Christ to a Buddhist who has become an anthroposophist,
    • future time gathers men together, now it has become something
  • Title: Festivals/Easter: Lecture IV: Spirit Triumphant
    Matching lines:
    • being of man comes into the world whence his material, bodily
    • deeply religious man, could not accept what Christianity had become
    • civilisation, the Good Friday thought has come increasingly to the
    • become something that has dragged the greatest of Mysteries into the
    • must become an inner festival, a festival in which we celebrate in
    • punishment, become part of the world-order. Michelangelo's picture
    • no longer a living reality — comes to an end on the Cross. We
    • has gradually come to be a picture of the Man of suffering and pain,
    • sufficiently large number of men realise that the Spirit must come to
    • become a reality. This will express itself outwardly in the fact that
    • suffering Chrestos as upon that which has been overcome. And now again
    • in earth-evolution. We must come to realise that it was the
    • understanding of what has been created, but that we shall become
  • Title: Festivals/Easter: Lecture V: The Teachings of The Risen Christ
    Matching lines:
    • laying aside many of the conceptions that have become part of
    • the mystery of death as it confronts men, comes to be fraught with an
    • too had come, but Who in accordance with a decision taken in these
    • Many things concerning the Mystery of Golgotha have become known to
    •  “The human body,” He taught, “has gradually become
    •  “men of earth; if only you can come to realise that here
    •  “Through everything else that comes to fulfilment on earth
    • nature comes to the help of man, through the kind of knowledge that
    • clairvoyance could still come to its aid, while the last possessors of
    • knowledge through Inspiration, finally becomes Intuition.
    • Golgotha was veiled, concealed. Men had first to become firmly rooted in
    • But the individuals who come together in all kinds of masonic and
    • shed darkness over the Mystery of Golgotha, the time has come when
    • Golgotha will then again be acquired. Then men will again come to
    • of the Mystery of Golgotha, mankind has come to a point where those
    • united, too, with all the molecules which become part of the earth
    • through cremation or decomposition. It would have come about that at
    • who we are, what we have become, where we were, whither we
  • Title: Festivals/Easter: Lecture VI: Easter: The Mystery of the Future
    Matching lines:
    • and will have become a potent spiritual influence in the whole of
    • have come to my notice. I have had a brief period of lecturing in the
    • Nordic Gods and Divinities would be superseded by One yet to come.
    • and that through One yet to come it will be covered by the arms of the
    • central idea of Christianity comes to birth, how it bursts the bonds
    • of religion and becomes universal. When on Good Friday, in the year
    • come.
    • when a man wakes in the morning he comes down with his astral body and
    • come down into his physical and etheric bodies he still had some
    • legends and myths which originated in Atlantis had come over with the
    • loosened etheric body experiences which had once come to Atlantean man
    • for him in scripts, or in tradition, but had become his own,
    • being may become spiritualised and once again have vision of the
    • and here we come near to the secret of our own epoch of
    • spiritualised. It will be essential for mankind in times to come to
    • with the utmost perfection, the physical body, the men who have become
    • is a spiritual world. They will regard everything that then comes to
    • If in times to come, when the etheric body has again loosened
    • etheric body. In order that he may be conscious that what then comes
    • spiritual world, has come to believe that life in the physical body
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Festivals/Easter: Lecture VII: Spiritual Bells of Easter, I
    Matching lines:
    • comes to realise that the wellsprings of spiritual life can deliver us
    • It is precisely at the time of Easter that man's soul can become
    • without losing our identity, to become one with the fountain-head of
    • to light, that the wisdom of the Mysteries is now emerging to become
    • resurrection of the spirit of man and of mankind, we must come
    • mankind, would come, and reaching the supreme height of existence to
    • when the great Initiate comes